di 001 contractor ship specifications rev b

12 November 2008 Rev. B

DI-001 Regional Class Research Vessel Contractor’s Ship Specifications

Page i Regional Class Research Vessel 12 November 2008 Contractor’s Ship Specifications, Rev. B DI-001_Specs\Outline Specifications\Rev B\toc_new.doc

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 000 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 042 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................................ 000-1 070 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR CONSTRUCTION.................................................. 000-10 071 ACCESS (AND MAINTENANCE) ................................................................................... 000-21 073 NOISE, VIBRATION AND RESILIENT MOUNTINGS ................................................. 000-21 077 HUMAN ENGINEERING AND SYSTEM SAFETY ....................................................... 000-25 078 MATERIALS...................................................................................................................... 000-25 079 STABILITY........................................................................................................................ 000-26 081 MACHINERY ACCESS .................................................................................................... 000-26 085 CONTRACTOR ENGINEERING AND DRAWINGS...................................................... 000-27 086 TECHNICAL PUBLICATIONS ........................................................................................ 000-28 092 TESTS................................................................................................................................. 000-29 096 WEIGHT ESTIMATES AND WEIGHT CONTROL........................................................ 000-41

SECTION 100 HULL AND DECKHOUSE STRUCTURE 100 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................................ 100-1 102 WELDING............................................................................................................................ 100-5 103 HULL STRUCTURE SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS........................................................... 100-7 150 SUPERSTRUCTURE........................................................................................................... 100-7 162 STACK(S)............................................................................................................................. 100-7 170 MASTS AND FLAGSTAFF ................................................................................................ 100-7 184 NAVIGATION SYSTEM ALIGNMENT............................................................................ 100-8

SECTION 200 PROPULSION PLANT 200 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................................ 200-1 202 MACHINERY PLANT CENTRAL CONTROL SYSTEM................................................. 200-5 233 DIESEL GENERATOR SETS ............................................................................................. 200-6 235 ELECTRIC PROPULSION SYSTEM ............................................................................... 200-11 243 PROPULSION SHAFTING ............................................................................................... 200-13 244 PROPULSION SHAFT BEARINGS AND SEALS........................................................... 200-13 245 PROPULSORS ................................................................................................................... 200-14 256 ENGINE COOLING WATER SYSTEMS......................................................................... 200-15 259 DIESEL ENGINE EXHAUST ........................................................................................... 200-15 262 LUBRICATION SYSTEM................................................................................................. 200-16

SECTION 300 ELECTRIC PLANT AND CABLING 300 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................................ 300-1 302 ELECTRIC MOTORS AND ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT............................................... 300-9 310 ELECTRIC GENERATING EQUIPMENT....................................................................... 300-12 313 STORAGE BATTERIES AND CHARGING EQUIPMENT ............................................ 300-13 314 POWER CONVERSION EQUIPMENT............................................................................ 300-13 320 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRIC POWER DISTRIBUTION

SYSTEMS........................................................................................................................... 300-14 324 SWITCHBOARDS AND PANELS FOR ELECTRIC POWER AND LIGHTING .......... 300-19 331 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR LIGHTING SYSTEMS........................................... 300-25 332 ILLUMINATION REQUIREMENTS................................................................................ 300-27

SECTION 400 COMMAND AND CONTROL 405 ANTENNAS......................................................................................................................... 400-1 407 ELECTROMAGNETIC ENVIRONMENTAL EFFECTS (E3)........................................... 400-3 420 DYNAMIC POSITIONING SYSTEM (DPS) AND AUTOPILOT..................................... 400-4

Page ii Regional Class Research Vessel 12 November 2008 Contractor’s Ship Specifications, Rev. B DI-001_Specs\Outline Specifications\Rev B\toc_new.doc

421 NON-ELECTRICAL AND NON-ELECTRONIC NAVIGATION AIDS........................... 400-7 422 NAVIGATION LIGHTS, SIGNAL LIGHTS, AND SEARCH LIGHTS ............................ 400-8 423 ELECTRONIC NAVIGATION SYSTEMS......................................................................... 400-8 424 ELECTRONIC NAVIGATION SYSTEMS, ACOUSTICAL............................................ 400-11 426 SCIENTIFIC ELECTRONIC SYSTEMS (SES) ................................................................ 400-13 432 TELEPHONE SYSTEMS................................................................................................... 400-14 433 PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM........................................................................................... 400-17 434 ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM .......................................................................................... 400-20 436 ELECTRICAL ALARM, SAFETY, AND WARNING SYSTEMS .................................. 400-20 437 AUTOMATIC IDENTIFICATION SYSTEM ................................................................... 400-39 438 INTEGRATED BRIDGE SYSTEM................................................................................... 400-40 439 CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION SYSTEM (CCTV) ..................................................... 400-41 441 EXTERIOR COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS .................................................................. 400-43 451 SURFACE SEARCH RADARS......................................................................................... 400-44 493 SCIENTIFIC INFORMATION SYSTEM (SIS) ................................................................ 400-46 494 METROLOGICAL REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................. 400-47

SECTION 500 MACHINERY 500 MACHINERY GENERAL................................................................................................... 500-1 503 PUMPS ................................................................................................................................. 500-2 504 INSTRUMENT AND INSTRUMENT BOARDS................................................................ 500-3 505 PIPING.................................................................................................................................. 500-5 506 VENTS, SOUNDINGS AND OVERFLOWS ARRANGEMENT ...................................... 500-6 508 INSULATION FOR MACHINERY AND PIPING ............................................................. 500-6 509 THERMAL INSULATION AND ACOUSTIC ABSORPTIVE TREATMENT FOR

DUCTS AND TRUNKS....................................................................................................... 500-7 512 HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC)................................. 500-8 516 REFRIGERATION EQUIPMENT..................................................................................... 500-12 521 FIREMAIN ......................................................................................................................... 500-14 524 SEAWATER SERVICE SYSTEMS .................................................................................. 500-15 528 PLUMBING, DECK DRAINS AND VENTS.................................................................... 500-17 529 BILGE, BALLAST AND OILY WASTE SYSTEMS ....................................................... 500-19 531 SHIP FRESH WATER ....................................................................................................... 500-22 532 POTABLE WATER SYSTEM........................................................................................... 500-23 533 FRESHWATER COOLING SYSTEMS ............................................................................ 500-24 534 WASTE HEAT TRANSFER SYSTEMS........................................................................... 500-25 541 FUEL OIL SYSTEM .......................................................................................................... 500-25 542 LUBRICATING OIL SYSTEMS ....................................................................................... 500-28 551 COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEMS........................................................................................ 500-29 555 FIREFIGHTING ................................................................................................................. 500-31 556 HYDRAULIC POWER EQUIPMENT .............................................................................. 500-32 561 STEERING SYSTEM......................................................................................................... 500-32 562 COMBUSTION AIR SYSTEMS ....................................................................................... 500-33 565 ROLL STABILIZATION TANK ....................................................................................... 500-34 568 BOW THRUSTER.............................................................................................................. 500-34 570 VENTS, FILLS, AND SOUNDS........................................................................................ 500-35 573 HANDLING SYSTEMS..................................................................................................... 500-36 581 ANCHOR SYSTEMS......................................................................................................... 500-38 582 MOORING AND TOWING............................................................................................... 500-40 583 BOATS, BOAT HANDLING, AND STOWAGE.............................................................. 500-40 585 LIFERAFTS........................................................................................................................ 500-40 593 POLLUTION CONTROL SYSTEMS................................................................................ 500-41

Page iii Regional Class Research Vessel 12 November 2008 Contractor’s Ship Specifications, Rev. B DI-001_Specs\Outline Specifications\Rev B\toc_new.doc

SECTION 600 OUTFIT AND FURNISHINGS 600 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................................ 600-1 602 HULL DESIGNATIONS AND MARKINGS...................................................................... 600-1 603 DRAFT MARKINGS ........................................................................................................... 600-6 604 LOCKS, KEYS AND TAGS ................................................................................................ 600-7 611 HULL FITTINGS ................................................................................................................. 600-8 612 LIFERAILS, LIFELINES AND STANCHIONS ................................................................. 600-9 613 FLAG HOISTS, FABRIC COVERS AND CURTAINS.................................................... 600-10 621 NON-STRUCTURAL BULKHEADS AND PARTITIONS.............................................. 600-11 622 FLOORPLATES, LADDERS, HANDRAILS AND HANDGRABS ................................ 600-14 624 DOORS, HATCHES, SCUTTLES AND MANHOLE COVERS...................................... 600-16 625 WINDOWS, FIXED PORTLIGHTS AND AIRPORTS .................................................... 600-21 631 PAINTING.......................................................................................................................... 600-22 633 CATHODIC PROTECTION .............................................................................................. 600-26 634 DECK COVERINGS.......................................................................................................... 600-27 635 INSULATION .................................................................................................................... 600-32 637 SHEET METAL SHEATHINGS AND LININGS............................................................. 600-35 638 THERMAL INSULATION FOR REFRIGERATED SPACES ......................................... 600-36 640 REQUIREMENTS FOR LIVING ACCOMMODATIONS SPACES ............................... 600-37 644 SANITARY SPACES, PLUMBING FIXTURES, FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES ..... 600-41 651 FOOD SERVICE SPACES ................................................................................................ 600-44 652 HOSPITAL ......................................................................................................................... 600-49 655 LAUNDRY SPACES ......................................................................................................... 600-50 662 MACHINERY CONTROL STATION FURNISHINGS ................................................... 600-50 663 PILOTHOUSE AND CHARTROOM FURNISHINGS..................................................... 600-51 664 WORKSHOPS.................................................................................................................... 600-51 665 LABS .................................................................................................................................. 600-54 670 STOWAGE REQUIREMENTS ......................................................................................... 600-56 671 SPECIAL STOWAGE........................................................................................................ 600-57 672 STOREROOMS.................................................................................................................. 600-59

SECTION 000 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

TABLE OF CONTENTS

042 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS .................................................................................................1 042.1 General..........................................................................................................................................1 042.2 Reference Documents (and Contract Drawings)...........................................................................1 042.3 Definitions.....................................................................................................................................7 070 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR CONSTRUCTION ....................................................10 070.1 General........................................................................................................................................10 070.2 Regulatory Body Requirements ..................................................................................................11 070.3 General Characteristics ...............................................................................................................12 070.4 Operating Environment...............................................................................................................15 070.5 Seakeeping and Maneuvering .....................................................................................................15 070.6 General Requirements for Equipment, Machinery and Materials ...............................................16 070.7 Inspection....................................................................................................................................18 070.8 Project Office ..............................................................................................................................18 070.9 Launching and Drydocking.........................................................................................................19 070.10 Delivery ......................................................................................................................................19 070.11 Post Delivery Availability (PDA) ...............................................................................................20 071 ACCESS (AND MAINTENANCE) .........................................................................................21 073 NOISE, VIBRATION AND RESILIENT MOUNTINGS.....................................................21 073.1 General........................................................................................................................................21 073.2 Resilient Mounts .........................................................................................................................21 073.3 Airborne Noise............................................................................................................................22 073.4 Vibration .....................................................................................................................................23 073.5 Sonar Self-Noise .........................................................................................................................23 073.6 Radiated Noise ............................................................................................................................24 077 HUMAN ENGINEERING AND SYSTEM SAFETY............................................................25 077.1 Human Engineering ....................................................................................................................25 077.2 System Safety..............................................................................................................................25 078 MATERIALS ............................................................................................................................26 079 STABILITY...............................................................................................................................26 081 MACHINERY ACCESS ..........................................................................................................27 085 CONTRACTOR ENGINEERING AND DRAWINGS .........................................................27 085.1 Working Drawings......................................................................................................................27 085.2 As-Built Drawings ......................................................................................................................28 085.3 Vessel Record Drawings and Vendor Drawings.........................................................................28 086 TECHNICAL PUBLICATIONS .............................................................................................29 086.1 Purchase Orders and Subcontracts ..............................................................................................29 086.2 Integrated Logistics Support (ILS)..............................................................................................29 092 TESTS ........................................................................................................................................30 092.1 General........................................................................................................................................30 092.2 Shop Inspections and Factory Acceptance Tests – Stage 1.........................................................30 092.3 Construction Inspections and Tests – Stage 2 .............................................................................31 092.4 Operation and Performance Tests – Stage 3 ...............................................................................32 092.5 Dock Trials – Stage 4..................................................................................................................33 092.6 Builder’s Sea Trials – Stage 5.....................................................................................................35

Page 000-i Regional Class Research Vessel 12 November 2008 Contractor’s Ship Specifications, Rev. B DI-001_Specs\Outline Specifications\Rev B\000b.doc

ii Regional Class Research Vessel 12 November 2008 Contractor’s Ship Specifications, Rev. B DI-001_Specs\Outline Specifications\Rev B\000b.doc

092.7 Acceptance Trials – Stage 6........................................................................................................36 092.8 Special Tests and Reports – Stage 7 ...........................................................................................38 092.9 Lightship Survey.........................................................................................................................38 092.10 Inclining Test ..............................................................................................................................39 092.11 Stability Report ...........................................................................................................................39 092.12 Airborne Noise Survey................................................................................................................39 092.13 Structure-Borne Noise Survey ....................................................................................................39 092.14 Vibration Survey.........................................................................................................................39 092.15 Sonar Self-Noise Underwater Radiated Noise ............................................................................40 092.16 Tests and Trials Program Planning Documentation....................................................................40 096 WEIGHT ESTIMATES AND WEIGHT CONTROL...........................................................41 096.1 Weight Control Plan....................................................................................................................41 096.2 Quarterly Weight Report (QWR)................................................................................................41 096.3 Accepted Vessel Weight Report .................................................................................................42

SECTION 000 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

042 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

042.1 General

These specifications and the accompanying drawings describe the design and construction of a Regional Class Research Vessel (RCRV). The vessel is diesel-electric powered with twin screw fixed pitch propellers and an azimuthing bow thruster. The hull and superstructure shall be of steel with shell plating and associated framing of Type A36 steel. The vessel shall be delivered complete and ready for service, inclusive of permanently installed science and handling equipment.

The Contractor shall furnish all materials, labor and equipment required for the construction of the vessel and called out or referred to in these specifications, excepting only those items specifically identified as Owner-furnished equipment, which, however, are to be installed by the Contractor in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer and tested by the Contractor to demonstrate successful operation.

The specifications and contract drawings complement each other; and all work covered by the drawings and specifications shall be accomplished. In the event of any inconsistency between the contract, specifications and contract drawings, the following contractual precedence shall apply:

• Contract

• Contract Specifications

• Contract Drawings

Silence of one document with respect to details shown or described on another shall not be considered an inconsistency.

042.2 Reference Documents (and Contract Drawings)

The vessel shall be constructed in accordance with these specifications, using the drawings listed below. The drawings define the features of the vessel that are important to the Owner; hence, deviations from these drawings shall be kept to a minimum. It is recognized, however, that exact adherence to details, arrangements, machinery layout, etc. is not always possible in progressing from the contract drawings and contract design to construction or working drawings. The Owner shall be notified of all changes to the drawings, and acceptance of the change shall be subject to written approval by the Owner, which will not be unreasonably withheld.

Whenever reference is made in these specifications by use of such terms as “as shown on the drawings” or “as shown on the plans,” it refers to the drawings listed below.

Page 000-1 Regional Class Research Vessel 12 November 2008 Contractor’s Ship Specifications, Rev. B DI-001_Specs\Outline Specifications\Rev B\000b.doc

40

45

The Contractor shall submit the contract drawings to ABS for review and approval. Approval letters, amendments and information on required changes to the drawings shall be incorporated into the working drawings by the Contractor. Copies of all correspondence with regulatory agencies and ABS shall be forwarded to the Owner within 2 days of receipt.

The following contract drawings and documents accompany and form a part of the contract specifications.

Ref. No.

Description

1 Item No. DI-008-01 General Arrangement Drawing, Rev. A, November 2008

2 Item No. DI-008-02 Topside Configuration Drawing, Rev. A, November 2008

3 Item No. DI-008-03 Navigation Lights Locations Drawing, Rev. A, November 2008

4 Item No. DI-008-04 Hull Lines Drawing, Rev. A, November 2008 5 Item No. DI-008-05 Appendage Drawing, Rev. A,

November 2008 6 Item No. DI-008-06 Deck Systems Arrangement Drawing, Rev. A,

November 2008 7 Item No. DI-009-01 Pilothouse and Chart Room Sketch, Rev. A,

November 2008 8 Item No. DI-009-02 Scientific Systems Deployment Sketch,

Rev. A, November 2008 9 Item No. DI-009-03 Mooring, Anchoring and Deck Fitting Sketch,

Rev. A, November 2008 10 Item No. DI-009-04 Structural Sketch, Rev. A, November 2008 11 Item No. DI-009-05 Equipment Removal Sketch, Rev. A,

November 2008 12 Item No. DI-010-12 Integrated Electrical Plant Design Report,

Rev. A, November 2008 13 Item No. DI-010-13 Scientific Electronic Systems (SES) Report,

Rev. A, November 2008 14 Item No. DI-010-15 Auxiliary Systems Report, Rev. A,

November 2008 15 Item No. DI-010-17 Habitability Systems Report, Rev. A,

November 2008


Additional reference information relating to any Owner-furnished equipment shall be furnished to the Contractor by the Owner for use and reference during preparation for construction. 50

Effective issue – Where first tier references, such as industry standards or Government specifications and standards are referred to, the issue or revision in effect at Phase II Contract Award shall apply.

GOVERNMENT STANDARDS

55

60

65

• Code of Federal Regulations (CFR)

• GSA Standard A-A-59470, Federal Specifications Standards and Test Methods: Cabinets, Modular Drawer Storage (Naval Shipboard)

• MIL-DTL-24643, General Specification for Cables and Cords, Electric, Low Smoke, For Shipboard Use

• MIL-STD-1310, Standard Practice For Shipboard Bonding

• USCG COMDTINST M16672.2C, (’72 COLREGS as amended)

• USCG COMDTINST M16672.2D, Navigation Rules (International - Inland)

• USCG NVIC 2-89, Guide for Electrical Installations on Merchant Vessels and Mobile Offshore Drilling Units

• USCG NVIC No. 11-86, Guidelines Governing the Use of Fiberglass Pipe (FGP) on Inspected Vessels

• USCG NVIC No. 12-82, Recommendations on Control of Excessive Noise

NON GOVERNMENT STANDARDS

• International Hydrographic Organization Special Publication S57, Transfer Standard for Digital Hydrographic Data 70

75

80

• ICES Cooperative Research Report Number 209, Underwater Noise of Research Vessels: Review and Recommendations

• IEC 60034, Rotating Electrical Machines

• IEC 60076-11, Power Transformers, Part 11, Dry-Type Transformers

• IEC 60092-302, Electrical Installations in Ships, Part 302, Low-Voltage Switchgear and Controlgear Assemblies

• IEEE 45, Recommended Practice for Electric Installations on Shipboard

• IEEE C95.1, IEEE Standard for Safety Levels with Respect to Human Exposure to Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Fields, 3 kHz to 300 GHz

• IEEE C95.2, IEEE Standard for Radio Frequency Energy and Current Flow Symbols

• IEEE 399, IEEE Recommended Practice for Power Systems Analysis


• IEEE 429 Recommended Practice for Thermal Evaluation of Sealed Insulation Systems for AC Electric Machinery Employing Form-Wound Pre-insulated Stator Coils for Machines Rated 6900 V and Below 85

90

95

100

105

110

115

• IEEE 518 Guide for the Installation of Electrical Equipment to Minimize Electrical Noise Inputs to Controllers from External Sources

• IESNA Publication RP-12 “Recommended Practice for Marine Lighting”

• ISO 484, Ship Screw Propellers, Manufacturing Tolerances - Part 2, Propellers of diameter between 0,80 and 2,50 m inclusive

• ISO 3046-1, Reciprocating Internal Combustion Engines, Performance - Part 1, Declarations of power, fuel and lubricating oil consumptions, and test methods -- Additional requirements for engines for general use

• ISO 4867, Code for the Measurement and Reporting of Shipboard Vibration Data

• ISO 4868, Code for the Measurement and Reporting of Local Vibration Data of Ship Structures and Equipment

• ISO 6954, Guidelines for the Measurement, Reporting and Evaluation of Vibration with regard to Habitability on Passenger and Merchant Ships

• ISO 8178, Part 3 Standard for Emission Test Cycles

• ISO Standard 8217, Petroleum Products, Fuels, Class F, Specifications of Marine Fuels

• ISO 11614, Reciprocating Internal Combustion Compression-Ignition Engines

• National Aerospace Standard (NAS) 411, Hazardous Materials Management Program

• NFPA 45, Standard on Fire Protection for Laboratories Using Chemicals

• NFPA 70, National Electrical Code

• NFPA 72, National Fire Alarm Code

• Regulations on Navigation in Panama Canal Waters, Chapter IV, Sections 4 through 8

• SNAME T&R Bulletin No. 2-29A, Measurement and Evaluation of Structural and Machinery Vibration in Ships

• SNAME T&R Bulletin No. 3-15, Guide to the Design and Testing of Anchors Windlasses for Merchant Ships

• SNAME T&R Bulletin No. 3-39, Guide for Shop and Installation Tests

• SNAME T&R Bulletin No. 3-47, Guide for Sea Trials

• SNAME T&R Bulletin No. 3-49, Marine Diesel Power Plant Practices

• SNAME T&R Bulletin No. 4-16, Calculations for Merchant Ship Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning Design


• SNAME T&R Code No. C-5, Acceptable Vibration of Marine Steam and Gas Turbine Main and Auxiliary Machinery Plants 120

125

130

• Standards of the Hydraulic Institute, Design Practices for Marine Application

• UL 67, Standard for Panelboards (with Marine Supplement)

• UL 489, Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches and Circuit-Breaker Enclosures (with Marine Supplement)

• UL 508, Industrial Control Equipment (with Marine Supplement)

• UL 1008, Standard for Automatic Transfer Switches

• UL 1104, Standard for Marine Navigation Lights

• UNOLS publication, American Disabilities Act (ADA) Guidelines for UNOLS Vessels

• World Health Organization “Guide to Ship Sanitation”

• World Meteorological Organization Standard, reference North Atlantic Treaty Organization Standardization Agreement 4194, Edition 1, “Standard Wave and Wind Environments and Shipboard Reporting of Sea Conditions”

AMERICAN BUREAU OF SHIPPING (ABS)

135

140

• ABS Guidance Notes on Control of Harmonics in Electrical Power Systems

• ABS Guide for Bridge Design and Navigational Equipment/Systems

• ABS Guide for Certification of Lifting Appliances

• ABS Guide for the Class Notation Underwater Inspection in Lieu of Drydocking (UWILD)

• American Bureau of Shipping (ABS), Rules for Building and Classing Vessels Intended for Navigation in Polar Waters

• ABS Rules for Building and Classing Steel Vessels under 90m

INTERNATIONAL MARITIME ORGANIZATION (IMO)

• MARPOL, International Convention for the Prevention of Pollution from Ships Annex IV of MARPOL 73/78 145

150

• Annex V of MARPOL 73/78

• Annex VI of MARPOL 73/78

• SOLAS, International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea

• IMO Resolution MEPC76 (40)

• IMO Circular MEPC.2 (VI) Annex A

• IMO Resolution MSC.61 (67)


• IMO Resolution A.468(XII)

• IMO Resolution A684 (17)

• IMO Resolution A.752(18)

155 • IMO Resolution A.861(20)

AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTES (ANSI)

• ANSI 16.5 Flange Connections

• ANSI A14.3 American National Standard for Ladders - Fixed - Safety Requirements

160

165

170

175

180

185

AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)

• ASTM 01.07, Ships & Marine Technology

• ASTM A123/A123M Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products

• ASTM C501, Standard Test Method for Relative Resistance to Wear of Unglazed Ceramic Tile by the Taber Abraser

• ASTM C1071, Standard Specification for Fibrous Glass Duct Lining Insulation (Thermal and Sound Absorbing Material)

• ASTM D975, Standard Specification for Diesel Fuel Oils

• ASTM D2047, Standard Test Method for Static Coefficient of Friction of Polish Coated Flooring Surfaces Measured by the James Machine

• ASTM D4940, Standard Test Method for Conductimetric Analysis of Water Soluble Ionic Contamination of Blasting Abrasives

• ASTM E162, Standard Test Method for Surface Flammability of Materials Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source

• ASTM F683, Standard Practice for Selection and Application of Thermal Insulation for Piping and Machinery

• ASTM F707, Standard Specification for Modular Gage Boards

• ASTM F721, Standard Specification for Gage Piping Assemblies

• ASTM F765, Standard Specification for Wildcats, Ship Anchor Chain

• ASTM F783, Standard Specification for Staple, Handgrab, Handle, and Stirrup Rung

• ASTM F821, Standard Specification for Domestic Use Doors and Frames, Steel, Interior, Marine

• ASTM F840, Standard Specification for Ladders, Fixed, Vertical, Steel, Ship’s

• ASTM F998, Standard Specification for Centrifugal Pump, Shipboard Use


• ASTM F1134, Standard Specification for Insulation Resistance Monitor for Shipboard Electrical Motors and Generators

• ASTM F1155, Standard Practice for Selection and Application of Piping System Materials

190

195

200

• ASTM F1166, Standard Practice for Human Engineering Design for Marine Systems, Equipment and Facilities

• ASTM F1321, Standard Guide for Conducting a Stability Test

• ASTM F1337, Standard Practice for Human Engineering Program Requirements for Ships and Marine Systems, Equipment, and Facilities

• ASTM F1510, Standard Specification for Rotary Positive Displacement Pumps, Commercial Ships Use

• ASTM F1511, Standard Specification for Mechanical Seals for Shipboard Pump Applications

• ASTM F1718, Standard Specification for Rotary Positive Displacement Distillate Fuel Pumps

042.3 Definitions

As used throughout these specifications, the following terms shall have the meanings stated below:

AAV Autonomous Air Vehicle ABS American Bureau of Shipping ADCP Acoustic Doppler Current Profiler AHRS Attitude Heading Reference System AISI American Iron and Steel Institute ANSI American National Standards Institute ANTS Acoustic Navigation and Tracking System API American Petroleum Institute Area The available arrangeable area after losses from structure, insulation,

linings and distributive systems. ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigeration, and Air Conditioning

Engineers Approved, As Approved, To Approve, As Required, As Selected, As Directed

These terms, used without further qualification, refer to action by the Owner or their authorized representative, unless otherwise stated.

ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials


ARI Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute AUV Autonomous Underwater Vehicle CCTV Closed Circuit Television CF Contractor-Furnished CFE Contractor-Furnished Equipment CFM Cubic Feet per Minute CFR Code of Federal Regulations Construction The term “construction” means the construction of the vessel to meet

the requirements identified in the Contract. Contract The contract to be entered into between the Owner and the Contractor

for construction and delivery of the vessel described by the contract specifications and contract plans.

Contractor The Contractor is the firm that holds the Contract with the Government for design, construction, and delivery of the vessel.

By extension, the term “Contractor” as used in these specifications also may refer to the subcontractors and to the shipbuilder, as specified by the applicable subcontract agreements between the contracting organization and its subcontractors.

COTS Commercial Off-The-Shelf CPDC Control, Processing and Display Computer CRES ASTM A276, A473, A167 Classes 304 or 316, Passivated CTD Conductivity, Temperature and Depth DPS Dynamic Positioning System ENC Electronic Navigation Chart ET Electronics Technician FCC Federal Communications Commission FDA Food and Drug Administration Provide, Install, or Furnish

Whether used together or separately, refer to action required by the Contractor to supply all materials, equipment, tools, labor and incidentals to perform the work required to integrate the equipment or system into the vessel, and to verify its operation for the intended use.

GMDSS Global Maritime Distress and Safety System Government The United States Government GFE Government-Furnished Equipment GFI Government-Furnished Information GFM Government-Furnished Material GPS Global Positioning System GSF Generic Sensor Format


HSS Hydrographic Survey System IAPP International Air Pollution Prevention IARC International Agency for Research on Cancer ICES International Council for the Exploration of the Sea IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers IESNA Illuminating Engineering Society of North America IHO International Hydrographic Organization IMO International Maritime Organization IMU Inertial Measurement Unit INS Integrated Navigation System ISO International Standards Organization MBSS Multibeam Survey System MCS Machinery Control System MCT Multi-Cable Transit MOCNESS Multiple Opening and Closing Net Environmental Sampling System MSD Marine Sanitation Device Naval Architect The firm of of Seattle, Washington,

which prepared these specifications and drawings. NDI Non-Developmental Items NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association NFPA National Fire Protection Association NIAB Nickel Aluminum Bronze NTP National Toxicology Program NVIC USCG Navigation and Vessel Inspection Circular Or equal, Or equivalent

Intends to define the general characteristics of design, quality, weight and construction of the items so designated.

OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration Owner The Owner is the United States Government Owner’s Representative

The shipbuilding inspector or other designated agents or employees of the Owner to the extent that those individuals have been authorized by the Owner to act on its behalf.

PCB Polychlorinated Biphenyl Regulatory Body

The term “regulatory body” includes ABS, USCG, FDA, USPHS, OSHA, FCC, and any other industry or Government agency which oversees the construction of the vessel as required by federal law.

Prepare The term ‘prepare’ means to develop or produce data or information for submittal and distribution to the Government.


Provide The term ‘provide’ means design, purchase, install/integrate into the vessel, tested and verified to be operational for its intended use

RTD Resistance Temperature Detector ROV Remotely Operated Vehicle SBSS Single Beam Survey System SCAQMD Southern California Air Quality Management District SCC Ship Control Console SES Scientific Electronic System SNAME Society of Naval Architects and Marine Engineers SOLAS Safety of Life at Sea Convention SPB Sub-bottom Profiler SSTS Sea Surface Temperature Sensor TEFC Totally Enclosed Fan Cooled (referring to motors) Ton The term “ton” means long ton (2,240 pounds) UL Underwriters Laboratory UNOLS University National Oceanographic Laboratory System UPS Uninterruptible Power Supply USCG United States Coast Guard USPHS United States Public Health Service, United States Department of

Health and Human Services USSG United States Standard Gauge VCHT Vacuum Collection, Holding and Transfer VOC Volatile Organic Compound VPI Vacuum Pressure Impregnation 070 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR CONSTRUCTION 205

210

215

070.1 General

The vessel shall be constructed in accordance with the general requirements in the following sections. These general requirements supplement the detailed requirements in Sections 100 through 600.

The Regional Class Research Vessel will be a modern monohull research ship capable of integrated, interdisciplinary, oceanographic research in areas from shallow coastal bays and estuaries out to deeper water. The vessel shall be capable of performing the following tasks:

• Sampling and data collection of surface, midwater and sea floor parameters using modern scientific instrumentation.


• Launch, towing and recovery of scientific packages, both tethered and autonomous.

• Handling, monitoring and servicing of remotely operated vehicles (ROVs) and autonomous underwater vehicles (AUVs).

• Deployment and recovery of autonomous air vehicles (AAVs) and balloons.

220

225

230

• Deployment and recovery of moorings.

• Deployment and recovery of boats (appropriate for vessel size).

• Deployment and recovery of free-floating instruments.

• Shipboard data processing and sample analyses in modern, well-equipped scientific laboratories.

• Precise navigation and station keeping and trackline maneuvering to support deep sea and coastal operations.

• Long periods of operation (up to 21 days) on-station or at low speeds.

070.2 Regulatory Body Requirements

The vessel and propelling machinery shall be classed and shall be built under the survey of the American Bureau of Shipping for designation in the Bureau’s record book by the following symbols:

• ABS A1 E Oceanographic Vessel, AMS, ACCU for vessels under 90 meters in length.

• ABS Record of Notation CRC for compliance with ABS Guide for Bridge Design and Navigational Equipment/Systems and ABS Guide for the Class Notation Underwater Inspection in Lieu of Drydocking Survey (UWILD)

235

240

245

• The vessel shall be classified by ABS Ice Class D0.

The vessel will be certified by the USCG in accordance with 46 CFR, Subchapter U (Oceanographic Vessels), and shall comply with all applicable federal regulations.

The vessel shall be equipped to satisfy the Panama Canal Transit Regulations.

The Contractor shall obtain and provide:

• United States Certificate of Admeasurement

• International Tonnage Certificate

• Deratting Exemption

• Certificate of Sanitary Construction

• Panama Canal/Universal Measurement System (PC/UMS) Net Tonnage Certificate

• Certificates of compliance with MARPOL Annex I and Annex V

• International Air Pollution Prevention (IAPP) certificate


The vessel shall comply with SOLAS requirements. The following SOLAS certificates shall be obtained and provided: 250

255

260

265

270

275

280

285

• Cargo Ship Safety Construction Certificate

• Cargo Ship Safety Equipment Certificate

• Cargo Ship Safety Radio Certificate

The Contractor shall obtain and provide GMDSS certification for Sea Area A3.

The vessel shall be designed, constructed, outfitted, and documented such that the Government may obtain a SOLAS Safety Management Certificate, Safety Management Plan, and Vessel Security Plan.

The IMO Ship Identification Number shall be provided and permanently marked as required by regulatory bodies.

The vessel, as delivered, shall comply with all applicable regulatory body requirements in effect at the time of the Phase II Contract Award, including those regulatory body requirements formally approved and scheduled for implementation prior to the scheduled delivery of the vessel(s).

In case of conflict between regulatory body requirements and these specifications, regulatory body requirements take precedence, unless the specifications exceed regulatory body requirements, in which case the specifications take precedence.

070.3 General Characteristics

Length Overall .....................................................155'-0" Length on Design Waterline ...............................152'-1" Beam ......................................................................38'-0" Depth, Baseline to Main Deck ...............................17'-6" Total Installed Power, Continuous...................1,275 kW Sustained Speed, Calm Water............................10 knots Max Speed, Calm Water .................................11.8 knots Range, Sustained Speed................................... 5,400 nm Endurance ........................................................... 21 days Single Staterooms 01 Deck............................................6 Double Staterooms 01 Deck ..........................................3 ADA Stateroom (Double+1 Fold Down) Main Deck....1 Double Stateroom Hold Deck........................................7 Design Draft...........................................................12'-0" Displacement at Design Draft ...........................1,035 LT Lightship Weight (estimated) ..............................771 LT

Maximum Capacities:

Diesel Fuel, at 95%........................................35,800 gal. Fresh Water, at 100%.......................................8,400 gal.


Towing, at 6 knots...........................................10,000 lbs Towing, at 4 knots...........................................20,000 lbs

Speed and Range: The vessel shall be capable of a maximum speed of at least 11 knots and a sustained speed of 10 to 11 knots in calm seas at full load. The vessel shall be capable of a 5,400 nautical mile range at sustained speed in calm water.

290

295

300

305

310

315

320

The vessel shall have an integrated diesel electric propulsion plant and be capable of continuous speed control to 1/2 rev/minute throughout the entire operating speed range.

Endurance shall be at least 21 days.

Some science operating profiles will require continuous underway survey or towing operations at speeds from 0 knots up to the normal cruising speed. The design shall consider the impacts on engine operation, maintenance and emissions, exhaust gas ingestion, watermaking capability, and other factors when on-station or moving at slow speeds for extended periods of time.

The vessel shall be capable of towing scientific packages with up to 10,000 pounds of towing load at 6 knots and 20,000 pounds of towing load at 4 knots. The vessel shall be capable of performing towing operations continuously during an entire cruise (up to 21 days.)

Berthing Accommodations: Permanent berthing accommodations and toilet/showers shall be provided as follows:

• 6 single staterooms with toilet/shower facilities shared between pairs of single staterooms.

• 11 double staterooms with toilet/shower facilities shared between pairs of double staterooms. One double stateroom shall be an accessible stateroom.

Public Toilets: A public toilet with sink shall be located adjacent to the laboratories and the working deck area. A public toilet with sink shall be provided in the immediate vicinity of the pilothouse.

Lounge: A lounge shall be provided.

Laboratories: A suite of modern, well-equipped laboratories including main lab, hydro/wet lab, and computer lab shall be provided. The main lab and hydro/wet lab shall be located adjacent to each other and the working deck. It is desirable that the computer lab also be located adjacent to the other labs. Labs shall be arranged and designed to minimize their use as passageways.

Aft Control Station: An enclosed aft control station shall be provided for operation of working deck equipment.

ET Shop: An ET shop shall be provided.


Deck Equipment: Cranes, winches, stern frame and other deck equipment shall be installed to permit conducting a variety of oceanographic operations at sea, such as coring, water sampling, equipment implantation, and array and trawl towing. All deck equipment, with the exception of the vessel’s heavy crane, shall be demountable. 325

330

335

340

345

350

355

Working Deck Areas: A stern working area shall be provided with a minimum of 800 sq. ft. of clear space aft of the deck house. In addition, a 40 foot long by 8 foot wide area of clear deck shall be provided along the starboard rail contiguous with the aft working area. The total clear working deck area, including the starboard side shall be a minimum of 1,100 sq. ft.

Working deck areas shall be as clear as possible to accommodate large and heavy temporary equipment. Bulwarks shall be removable and all deck-mounted gear (winches, portable cranes, stern frames, etc.) shall be removable to a flush deck to provide flexible re-configuration.

A clear foredeck area shall be provided to accommodate small, specialized towers, booms and other sampling equipment.

Additional deck areas shall be provided with the means for flexible and effective installation of incubators, vans, workboats and temporary equipment.

All working decks shall be equipped with easily accessible power, fresh and seawater, air, data ports, and voice communication systems. Adequate flow of ambient temperature seawater for incubators shall be available on decks supporting the installation of incubators.

The arrangement shall provide for good visibility from the pilothouse of the working deck areas.

Van Locations: Space shall be provided to carry two UNOLS/ISO standard vans.

On-Deck Incubators and Optical Equipment/Instruments: Design of deck layout and science infrastructure shall include areas and services for deck incubation or optical experiments. These deck areas must receive as much unobstructed sunlight as possible, and continuous flow of near surface seawater at ambient temperatures (< 1°C above ambient) in order to maintain the proper temperature for the experiments. Overboard drains shall be provided to prevent water running across decks.

Provision shall be made for readily installing equipment that is brought onboard occasionally such as portable winches, SeaSoar, MOCNESS, Deep Tow, Magnetometers, specialized ADCPs, slack tether ROVs, AUVs, AAVs, and other systems. Power sources, deck space, mounting locations, data connections, hydraulic power, and compressed air shall be provided to support these installations.


070.4 Operating Environment

The vessel shall be capable of operating in any ocean or waterway worldwide and in the conditions of ice required for Ice Class D0. In addition to the seawater and sea air environment, the vessel and its subsystems shall be capable of functioning in the following environmental conditions:

360

365

370

375

380

385

390

WINTER:

Minimum Air Temperature:.............................................0°F Minimum Seawater Temperature: .................................28°F

SUMMER:

Maximum Air Temperature: Dry Bulb: ...............................................................100°F Wet Bulb: .................................................................86°F

Maximum Seawater Temperature:.................................90°F

070.5 Seakeeping and Maneuvering

Seakeeping is the ability to carry out the scientific work of the vessel while maintaining crew comfort and safety, and maintaining equipment operability. Vessel equipment and personnel are considered fully operable if the following criteria are met:

• Limit maximum vertical accelerations to less than 0.15 g (rms).

• Limit maximum lateral accelerations to less than 0.05 g (rms) at lab deck level.

• Limit maximum roll to less than 3 degrees (rms).

• Limit maximum pitch to less than 2 degrees (rms).

It is an important design criterion to maximize the sea-kindliness of this vessel and its ability to work in Sea States 4 and higher. Specifically, it is desirable that the vessel be able to:

• Maintain 9 knots and remain operable at best heading 80% of the time in Sea State 4 (1.25 – 2.5 m wave heights).

• Maintain 7 knots and remain operable at best heading 50% of the time in Sea State 5 (2.5 – 4 m wave heights).

• Maintain 4 knots and remain operable at best heading 25% of the time in Sea State 6 (4 – 6 m wave heights).

• Survive while hove to at Sea State 7 or greater (>6 m wave heights).

Seakeeping calculations shall be performed using mean wave height and most probable modal period characteristic data for each sea state for the Open Ocean North Atlantic as defined in Table D-1 of STANAG 4194.


Additionally, the vessel shall be capable of achieving a steady turning diameter of no more than four vessel lengths in either direction at sustained speed, at full load condition in calm water, without use of the bow thruster. The vessel shall be directionally stable at all speeds.

395

400

405

Mast, structure, foundations and superstructure shall withstand the dynamic forces produced by the motion of the vessel in a seaway. The dynamic forces shall be calculated using the load factors obtained in the following equations:

Vessel Characteristics:

Roll Period .............................TR seconds Pitch Period ...........................Tp seconds Roll Angle .............................Φ radians (Note 1) Pitch Angle ............................Θ radians (Note 1) Heave Acceleration................h ft/sec2 (Note 1) Surge acceleration..................s ft/sec2 (Note 1)

Maximum Load Factors at Specific Locations (Note 2):

Surge zgT

xgTg

sSinpp

x ⎟⎟⎠

⎞⎜⎜⎝

⎛ Θ+⎟

⎟⎠

⎞⎜⎜⎝

⎛ Θ++Θ= 2

2

2

22 44 ππη

Sway zgT

ygT

xgT

SinRRp

y Φ⎟⎟⎠

⎞⎜⎜⎝

⎛+⎟⎟

⎠

⎞⎜⎜⎝

⎛ Φ+⎟

⎟⎠

⎞⎜⎜⎝

⎛ Θ+Φ= 2

2

2

22

2

2

21 444 πππη

Heave ⎥⎥⎦

⎤

⎢⎢⎣

⎡Φ⎟⎟⎠

⎞⎜⎜⎝

⎛+Θ⎟

⎟⎠

⎞⎜⎜⎝

⎛+±= y

gTx

gTgh

Rpz 2

2

2

2 440.1 ππη

Notes: 410

415

420

1. Maximum probable lifetime values to be extrapolated from model test results. 2. Dimensions x, y, z, feet-longitudinal, transverse, and vertical respectively,

related to the CG.

070.6 General Requirements for Equipment, Machinery and Materials

All equipment, machinery, and materials shall be designed for operation in a marine environment and shall be ruggedly constructed and suitable for shipboard use.

Equipment and replaceable parts shall be standardized wherever practicable. Hull, mechanical, electrical and electronics items that can be maintained by the replacement of parts shall be supportable through commercial vendors. Systems shall use the lowest practicable variety of types and sizes of multi-application items, such as pumps, valves, motors, fluids and controllers.


Equipment, machinery, and materials shall be selected for long service life, low maintenance, high reliability, ease of operation by shipboard personnel, and availability of spare parts and service from the manufacturer.

Equipment and machinery shall operate properly and perform all required functions under the vibration and ambient conditions at the installation location. 425

430

435

440

445

450

455

Equipment shall be provided with all necessary cables with mating connectors. Mating connectors shall be provided for all chassis connectors that interface to external equipment. Wiring clamps for internal and external wiring, tubing, hoses and piping shall be installed at frequent intervals to prevent breakage or wear during vibration. Inter-connecting cable lists shall be provided with termination, wire type, color and connector type.

All materials shall be new and unused, unless specified otherwise herein.

All materials and equipment subject to approval by the U.S. Coast Guard or the American Bureau of Shipping shall be tested and inspected in accordance with the rules of those agencies.

Materials shall be ordered to recognized standard sizes wherever possible to facilitate replacement or repair. All bolt heads and nuts shall be the standard hexagonal type. As far as practicable, all items of a class, for example valves, shall be ordered from one manufacturer in order to facilitate the stocking of repair parts and to support the Owner’s standardization process.

All galvanizing shall be done by the hot-dip process in accordance with ASTM A123/A123M. Touch-up using Galvicon is acceptable.

The Contractor shall provide suitable facilities and exercise proper diligence in connection with the storage, handling and installation of both Owner-furnished and Contractor-furnished materials and equipment. Machinery and other components subject to damage or deterioration from exposure to weather or excessive heat, cold or humidity shall be placed in suitable warehouses. Special attention shall be given to manufacturers’ installation instructions.

Aluminum structure and fittings shall be of alloys currently approved by the American Bureau of Shipping for this application.

Stainless steel shall be Type 316 alloy, except galley counters, which may be Type 304 alloy.

Structural steel used in the construction shall be inspected, tested and approved as required by the American Bureau of Shipping.

Weld material shall be of brands approved by the American Bureau of Shipping for the proposed application.


070.7 Inspection

The Owner Representatives, regulatory agency inspectors/surveyors and Owner-contracted personnel shall be granted access to and the right to visit the vessel throughout the duration of the contract during normal business hours. As a condition of gaining access to the vessel, personnel on the vessel under the terms of this subsection will be required to have their own insurance to cover the Contractor’s liability. Every effort will be made by the Owner and the Owner-contracted personnel to minimize interference with the Contractor’s work.

460

465

470

475

480

485

490

495

070.8 Project Office

The Contractor shall provide the following facilities and services:

• Office Facilities and Services: Suitable office facilities and services for the on-site Government staff of six personnel shall be provided. In addition, office facilities shall also be provided for four vessel crew personnel beginning three months prior to Builder’s Trials through the end of the Post Delivery Availability (PDA) period. Offices shall be adequate to accommodate the furniture and equipment identified herein. Total space provided shall not be less than 80 square feet per person. The offices shall be located with convenient access to the vessel, Contractor project managers’ and shipyard’s shops and offices. Offices shall be air-conditioned, well-lighted, and provided with sufficient electrical receptacles for computers, and other office equipment. Offices shall be provided with locks. Keys shall be furnished to the Government. The Contractor shall provide toilet and washroom facilities, hot and cold potable water, and janitorial services.

• Office Furniture and Equipment: The Contractor shall provide for each person a double-pedestal desk, ergonomic swivel arm chair, book case, and trash receptacle. In addition, the Contractor shall provide six side chairs, six two-drawer legal size filing cabinets, six four-drawer legal size filing cabinets, and one drafting table suitable for reviewing plans and drawings. Computers, fax machine, copier, and printers will be provided by the Government.

• Telephone Service: The Contractor shall provide and maintain three dedicated telephone lines, and ten telephones with a packaged service of unlimited local and long distance calling, and a T-1 equivalent data line with Internet service for the on-site Government office spaces. Phone lines and separate data lines, via router to the T-1 line for high-speed data service, shall be provided to each of the six staff desks and four vessel crew desks.

• Parking Spaces: The Contractor shall provide conveniently located secure parking spaces to accommodate eight vehicles for the duration of this Contract, marked as reserved for RCRV. Additionally, the Contractor shall provide parking spaces for four vehicles for the vessel crew upon their arrival at the shipyard, until the vessel departs following the PDA period.

• Access to the vessel and applicable facilities as required herein.


070.9 Launching and Drydocking

The vessel shall be launched, outfitted, tested and completed in a depth of water sufficient to ensure that it is not grounded at any time. The Contractor shall be responsible for the safe launching of the vessel.

500

505

510

515

520

525

530

535

If the vessel is in the water for more than 150 days prior to delivery, the vessel shall be drydocked for survey, repair and final hull preservation and painting prior to delivery.

070.10 Delivery

Vessel delivery shall occur at or near the Contractor’s construction facilities.

• The vessel shall not be presented for Acceptance Trials (as used in this requirement, “Acceptance Trials” means Acceptance Trials or Combined Acceptance Trials) until it is determined by the Owner that the Contractor has satisfactorily carried out those parts of the Builder’s Trials for which the Contractor is responsible, including Builder’s Dock and Sea Trials, and that the Contractor has:

o Corrected all Contractor responsible deficiencies discovered before completion of Builder’s Sea Trials, unless otherwise agreed to in writing by the Owner; and

o Corrected all Contractor responsible deficiencies discovered after completion of the Builder’s Sea Trials which are determined by the Owner to be necessary to avoid an adverse effect on the operational capability of the vessel.

• The Contractor shall be responsible for scheduling an interval of a minimum of approximately 14 days between the satisfactory completion of Acceptance Trials and delivery of the vessel. During this period, the Contractor shall satisfactorily correct all Contractor responsible deficiencies, whether discovered before, during, or after completion of Acceptance Trials, which are determined by the Contracting Officer to be necessary to avoid an adverse effect on the operational capability of the vessel.

• Prior to delivery of the vessel, to the extent necessary for tests, crew training, or operations which the Government is to perform and which do not require the Government to have control of the entire vessel, the Contractor shall make parts of the vessel available to the Government; to the extent necessary for tests, crew training, trials or operations which the Government is to perform and which require the Government to have control of the entire vessel, such as alongside training, fast cruise and underway trials, the Contractor shall make the entire vessel available to the Government at dockside, at the Contractor’s plant, for such periods of time as are necessary for such trials and operations. During all periods of time when the entire vessel is made available to the Government, the Contractor shall, as requested by the Government and required by the specifications, provide technical assistance and provide assistance necessary to correct defects that develop or are discovered during trials or operations of the vessel. Following the completion of each such trial or operation, the Government shall return the vessel to the


Contractor at dockside, at the Contractor’s plant, for the correction of defects, if any, and completion of construction in accordance with the terms of this Contract.

• Upon satisfactory completion (i) of Acceptance Trials and (ii) of the correction of deficiencies as provided above, the Contractor shall deliver the vessel to the Government for preliminary acceptance. 540

545

550

555

560

565

570

• Following preliminary acceptance, the Government may, during the guaranty period, make the vessel available to the Contractor, at the Contractor’s plant,

o for correction of defects noted at the time of preliminary acceptance, or which are discovered during the guaranty period, and

o for the performance of any additional work required by change orders issued pursuant to the “CHANGES” clause of this Contract prior to preliminary acceptance and not theretofore performed. If the Government elects to make the vessel available to the Contractor, at the Contractor’s plant, for the accomplishment of the above described post delivery work, the Contractor agrees to accept the vessel and perform the work. The Contractor also agrees to consider the accomplishment of additional work during the post-shakedown availability under a standard Government contract. If the post-shakedown availability period shall begin during but extend beyond the expiration of the guaranty period, the Government may during the extended period leave the vessel at the Contractor’s plant or return the vessel thereto for the correction of defects not previously corrected and for the performance of any additional work required by change orders issued pursuant to the “CHANGES” clause of this Contract prior to preliminary acceptance and not theretofore performed.

070.11 Post Delivery Availability (PDA)

Immediately following vessel delivery, the RCRV will remain at the Contractor’s facility for a period of 30 days. During the PDA, the Contractor shall provide:

• Berthing space pier-side for the vessel, including the brow and landing platforms, as appropriate, with utilities from shore connections (electricity, fresh water, three dedicated telephone lines, a broadband data line for Internet service (the Government will provide the telephone service and Internet Service), sewage, bilge, and gray water disposal), daily garbage removal, and material handling services to support final outfitting.

• At least 15 convenient parking spaces, near the vessel, for authorized Government personnel, ship’s force and Government-authorized visitors.

• Fire protection including maintenance of the vessel’s fire main pressure in event of vessel’s system failure or interruption for repair services.

• Access to the vessel for authorized Government personnel, ship’s force and Government-authorized visitors.


071 ACCESS (AND MAINTENANCE)

575

580

585

590

595

600

605

All spaces shall be provided with practical and convenient access.

Vertical ladders shall not be considered a means of escape from public spaces. Dead end passageways shall be avoided where possible. Vestibules shall be provided on the weather ends of passageways.

Passageways shall have a clear width (distance between protuberances) of at least 36 inches. Passageways where lines form shall be a minimum clear width of 54 inches. Access routes shall be kept clear of items that restrict passage or are a source of danger to personnel. Access shall be provided between the vans and the vessel superstructure without requiring personnel to be exposed to the weather. Van access shall be at van ends.

Clear headroom in living, walking and working areas shall be a minimum of 6 feet 9 inches. Headroom in doors, arches, and van accesses shall be at least 6 feet 6 inches.

Door openings shall provide a clear width of 32 inches minimum. Clear openings of doorways with swinging doors shall be measured between the face of the door and the stop, with the door open 90 degrees.

073 NOISE, VIBRATION AND RESILIENT MOUNTINGS

073.1 General

These specifications and drawings call for certain measures to reduce noise levels and vibrations in the vessel, as well as underwater radiated noise, under operating conditions. These include the use of sound isolation mounts under vibrating, reciprocating and rotating machinery, and the details to be used in heating and ventilation ductwork. In addition, acoustical treatment is called for in the engine room and other areas of the vessel.

The Contractor shall contract with an expert consultant in shipboard noise control experienced in working with shipyards and vessel requirements. The noise consultant shall be an active participant in detail design and production engineering, inspection and production QA, and review of change orders that impact noise and vibration.

073.2 Resilient Mounts

Resilient mounts are identified in Section 500 for selected rotating machinery and equipment. All mounts shall be inherently captive in design, or retainers shall be added. All mounts shall be loaded to within 20% of the rated load. The resilient mounts shall not be painted. All mounts under a unit shall be equally loaded relative to each other. Mount materials shall be compatible with their environment, including heat levels. Snubbers shall be used on compressors. Sound shorts shall be eliminated.

Where it is required to place two or more components together connected by shafting, the components shall be installed on a common sub-base with the resilient mountings installed between the sub-base and the vessel structure.


610

615

620

625

A six degree-of-freedom (6DOF) analysis should be performed by the noise consultant for each type of resiliently mounted equipment to ensure that no natural frequencies coincide with the equipment’s operation frequencies.

073.3 Airborne Noise

Airborne noise in vessel compartments and at deck stations shall be in accordance with the limits given in Table 000-1. Spaces not listed shall have a noise category similar to a listed space or be in accordance with NVIC No. 12-82 and IMO Resolution A.468(XII), “Code On Noise Levels On Board Ships.” Staterooms shall be sound insulated for privacy.

Airborne noise requirements are applicable during normal vessel operation at sustained speed, during overside handling and towing operations, and during station keeping, while propulsion, bow thruster, auxiliary and scientific-related equipment and machinery are operating simultaneously at rated conditions. Noise level requirements are applicable with all ventilation systems in proper balance and operating at design flow rates. Attention shall also be given to frequently used items, such as galley equipment, that may constitute annoyance problems (such as range hoods), while not actually exceeding specification levels.

Hearing protection signs shall be affixed in compartments and deck areas where airborne noise levels exceed 84 dBA.

Table 000-1. Airborne Noise Acceptance Levels for Vessel Spaces

Space dBA Pilothouse 65 Library/Conference Room 65 Staterooms 60 Offices 65 Laboratories 65 Aft Control Station 65 ET Shop 65 Lounge 65 Mess 65 Passageways 65 Hospital 65 Working Decks (Note 1) 70 Galley/Scullery 75 Storerooms 85 HVAC Machinery Spaces 90 Machinery Control Station 75 Engine Room 115 Propulsion Motor Room 110 Bow Thruster Room 110


630

635

640

645

650

655

660

665

Note 1: For airborne noise purposes, working decks includes the entire aft working deck, starboard side working deck area, forward working deck area, rescue boat operating station, anchor handling station, winch and deck crane local and remote control locations, and pilothouse top.

073.4 Vibration

The vessel and all vessel components shall be free from excessive vibration. Vibration is excessive when it results in damage, or danger of damage to vessel structure, machinery, equipment or systems, or when it interferes or threatens to interfere with the proper operation of the vessel and all vessel components. Vibration is also considered excessive when it interferes with personnel safety, comfort or proficiency, or with scientific operations.

Hull girders, masts, above-deck structures and the superstructure vibration shall be below the Zone III threshold as defined in SNAME T&R Bulletin No. 2-29A. Longitudinal, torsional and lateral propulsion shafting vibration shall meet the acceptability constraints of Sections 3, 4 and 5 of SNAME Code C-5. During the detail design phase, the noise control consultant will assess if any design changes will impact vibration of the hull girder, masts, cranes, other above deck structures, and the superstructure, However, it is not intended to perform any structural modeling, such as finite element analysis (FEA).

073.5 Sonar Self-Noise

The sonar self-noise levels at the sonar transducer locations shall not exceed the values given in Table 000-2 for all scientific sonar operating conditions.

The Contractor shall incorporate the following design features:

• Bow and underwater hull shape shall minimize bubble generation and prevent bubble sweepdown that degrades sonar performance.

• Sonar transducers shall be arranged and installed to minimize interference associated with local flow noise.

• Sonar transducers shall be arranged and installed in a location that is free from the effects of bubble sweepdown.

• All hull appendages including sonar transducers and their housings shall be cavitation free, aligned with water flow and fair within 0.125 inch over any 24-inch span. Surfaces within 10 feet of sonar transducer locations shall have a smooth finish when painted.

• Within 20 feet of sonar receive transducers, all piping and ducting, except in fuel tanks, shall be supported by resilient hangers per Section 500.1, and air flow in ducting shall not exceed 33 feet/second.

• Piping penetrations for fluid systems shall be located as far as practicable from sonar receive transducers. Structural paths to the sonar from bulkhead penetrations shall be damped to prevent compromising sonar transducer performance.


• The bow thruster inlet and discharge openings shall be designed to be cavitation free and to minimize turbulence at the sonar transducer locations. The design shall prevent the accumulation of air in the thruster. 670

675

• Hull openings for main sea suctions and discharges shall be located at least 30 feet from all sonar transducers. Except for the bow thruster openings and uncontaminated seawater system intakes, all sea connectors and underwater shell openings shall be aft of the sonar transducers.

• Orifices and other flow control devices for fluid systems shall be located a minimum of 20 feet from sonar receive transducers.

Table 000-2. Sonar Self-Noise Level Requirements

Equipment Frequency of Band Spectrum Noise

Level Limit

Multibeam Survey System (MBSS)

70-100 kHz 30kHz

32dB 40dB

Single Beam Survey Systems (SBSS)

12kHz 38kHz 120kHz 200kHz

49dB 40dB 32dB 32dB

Sub-Bottom Profiler (SBP) 2kHz - 8kHz 15kHz - 20kHz

60dB 47dB

Acoustic Doppler Current Profiler (ADCP)

38kHz 75kHz 150kHz

40dB 32dB 32dB

Acoustic Navigation and Tracking System (ANTS)

20kHz – 30kHz 47dB

073.6 Radiated Noise

The RCRV has been designed to meet the underwater noise limit specified in the ICES CRR 209 Report at speeds up through 6 knots. Radiated noise levels are intended to be achieved with all main propulsion and auxiliary machinery operating, all normally operating hotel services such as refrigeration and HVAC systems, and all navigational and scientific instrumentation systems in operation. The following items are not intended to be operated: Bow Thruster, Fire Pump and the Ballast/Fire Pump. The ICES underwater noise limit shall be in the one-third octabe band format from 10 Hertz to 50,000 Hertz, as shown in

680

685

Figure 000-1.


Regional Class Research Vessel (RCRV): Underwater Noise LimitICES CRR-209 Converted to 1/3 Octave Bands from 10 to 50,000 Hertz

110

120

130

140

150

160

170

18010

12.5 16 20 25

31.5 40 50 63 80 100

125

160

200

250

315

400

500

630

800

1,00

01,

250

1,60

02,

000

2,50

03,

150

4,00

05,

000

6,30

08,

000

10,0

0012

,500

16,0

0020

,000

25,0

0031

,500

40,0

0050

,000

1/3 Octave Band Center Frequency, Hz

Lp, d

B re

1 m

icro

-Pa

@ 1

met

er

690

695

700

705

Figure 000-1. ICES Radiated Noise Level Criteria

077 HUMAN ENGINEERING AND SYSTEM SAFETY

077.1 Human Engineering

ASTM F1166 specific criteria shall be applied in the design of compartments, spaces, work and control stations, and facilities. Factors affecting both normal and emergency conditions, such as illumination and environmental conditions, shall be as outlined in ASTM F1337. Vessel systems shall be designed to be operated by a range of the specific user population, bounded between the 5th-percentile female to the 95th-percentile male. Operation, maintenance and repair activities and procedures shall minimize manual handling, and shall be designed to be conducted by this range of individual physical capability.

077.2 System Safety

Safety guards shall be installed over unprotected moving parts of rotating or oscillating equipment and machinery that could pose a hazard to personnel. Guards shall also be installed over moving wire ropes that could be contacted by personnel. Guards for scientific winches shall not enclose the drums or cable lead.


078 MATERIALS

The vessel shall be constructed of best commercial marine grade materials and components. Where CRES is used, it shall be Class 316, passivated.

Cast iron shall not be used in any service where it is exposed to impact loading.

710

715

720

725

730

735

740

Dissimilar metals that are not electrolytically compatible shall not be joined directly. Electrolytic corrosion shall be prevented by insulating dissimilar metals from each other with gaskets, washers and sleeves, or bushings of insulating materials. Faying surfaces between wood, metals and laminates, or any combination of these materials, except machinery foundation shims, shall be protected by use of bedding compound plus one coat of primer applied to the metal. Faying surfaces between wood and other materials shall be protected by use of wood preservative fortified bedding compound. Use of explosion bonded bimetallic joint material is preferred for aluminum-to-steel joints.

Asbestos, ceramic fiber, radioactive or radium-bearing material, magnesium, cadmium plated parts, chromate or lead containing materials, and mercury shall not be used in construction applications where a functionally equivalent substitute is available.

The use of polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB) or materials identified by Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA), International Agency for Research on Cancer (IARC) monographs, and National Toxicology Program (NTP) annual report as carcinogenic or potentially carcinogenic materials is prohibited.

All materials used in applications exposed to the weather, located in bilges, or used in ballast tanks shall be suitable for the corrosive seawater environment.

079 STABILITY

The stability calculations shall address the following loading conditions:

• Full load condition with fuel required for endurance, 100% fresh water and 100% consumables.

• Mid-voyage condition with 50% fuel, 50% fresh water and 50% consumables.

• Arrival condition with 10% fuel, 10% fresh water and 10% consumables.

• Capacity load condition with full fuel tanks, full fresh water tanks and full consumables.

All loading conditions, except capacity load, shall include service life weight allowance and service life KG allowance. All loading conditions shall include full scientific load. Trim in the full load condition shall not exceed one foot by the stern. A maximum trim of one-half foot by the bow is acceptable, provided the Contractor can demonstrate by model tests that the vessel is directionally stable and fully supports ship and scientific operations in this condition. List in the full load condition shall not exceed 1/2 degree to port or starboard.


Permanent ballast shall not be used. Ballasting of fuel tanks is not acceptable. Variable water ballast shall not be used in the full load condition.

081 MACHINERY ACCESS

745

750

755

760

765

770

775

Equipment and machinery shall be arranged and installed to facilitate access for use and access for purposes of maintenance, adjustment or repair. Access to equipment shall permit ease of maintenance and operation and shall permit the movement and positioning of portable tools and test and support equipment required to perform the maintenance and operational tasks. Permanent fittings and structure shall be kept clear of routes required for the removal of machinery, whenever possible.

Bolted equipment removal plates (BERPs) or welded equipment removal plates (WERPs) shall be provided for removal of large equipment and components where the size of the item or component to be shipped or unshipped exceeds door or hatch sizes. Removal of the BERPs or WERPs shall not require the removal of other fixed vessel structure. Ancillary systems shall be kept clear of BERP or WERP openings. The selection of a BERP or WERP shall be based on the regularity of need for equipment removal. Where equipment can be expected to require removal every eight years or less, a BERP shall be used for removal. For longer periods, a WERP is acceptable. As a minimum, a BERP shall be provided in the engine room.

Access shall be provided for maintenance and replacement of propulsion motor bearings.

Monorails, padeyes and lifting fittings shall be provided and attached to adequate structure, to permit equipment and machinery removals and installations.

Washers, dryers, hot water heaters and other domestic equipment shall be capable of being removed from the vessel without dismantling the equipment or the joiner work or doorways.

085 CONTRACTOR ENGINEERING AND DRAWINGS

The Contractor shall perform the engineering, design, calculation and investigation work necessary to develop the working drawings needed to construct, outfit, test and deliver the vessel and transfer to the Owner all required deliverables. This encompasses all efforts required by ABS for classification and the regulatory bodies for issuance of the required vessel documentation.

085.1 Working Drawings

The Contractor shall develop working drawings in the number necessary to describe the hull, mechanical and electrical systems identified by the contract drawings and specifications. All drawings and engineering documents requiring approval by the American Bureau of Shipping and the USCG shall be submitted, and approval obtained.


085.2 As-Built Drawings

The Contractor shall provide final revisions of all working drawings, termed “as-built drawings,” that represent the final as delivered vessel and are based on visual examination of the vessel. Prior to 30 days after delivery of the vessel, the Contractor shall furnish two hard copies; a pdf file, and the AutoCAD file of each drawing to the Owner. All drawings shall follow the general format of the contract drawings. An index of the drawings furnished shall be provided.

780

785

790

795

800

805

085.3 Vessel Record Drawings and Vendor Drawings

The following drawings shall be developed by the Contractor (unless fully incorporated in an as-built drawing):

• Docking plan, showing location of all seachests, thrusters and overboard discharges and hull attachments, with at least three (3) block positions.

• General arrangement drawings.

• Booklet of tank capacity and sounding tables.

• Running, signal and anchor lights, and searchlights plan.

• HVAC diagrams.

• Machinery arrangements.

• Electrical power one-line diagram.

• Fire and safety plans.

• Ventilation schedule (fans, motors, and control and heating equipment) in tabular form.

• Trim and stability booklet.

• Lighting system one-line diagram.

• Interior communication system block diagram.

• Auxiliary fluid system diagrams.

• Electric power load analysis.

• Electric fault current analysis.

The Contractor shall provide two hard copies; one pdf file and the AutoCAD file for each of the above drawings prior to delivery.


086 TECHNICAL PUBLICATIONS

086.1 Purchase Orders and Subcontracts

A Purchase Order Index shall be provided, maintained current and available for Government review at all times. Copies of Purchase Orders and subcontracts, and changes thereto, shall be provided. 810

815

820

825

830

835

840

845

086.2 Integrated Logistics Support (ILS)

Vendor Recommended Spares (VRS): The Contractor shall provide VRS Listings for onboard repair parts and maintenance consumables. The VRS are required to sustain operation and maintenance of each piece of equipment, component or system onboard the vessel for a period of 2,000 operating hours (approximately 90 days). Criteria for inclusion shall be based on mean time between failure (MTBF) figures for individual parts, as well as typical field experience.

• The VRS listings shall contain the Original Equipment Manufacturer’s (OEM’s) recommended quantities for every type of spare part required for each repairable piece of equipment, including all consumable and expendable items and items required for scheduled maintenance. Whole sub-systems shall not be included, except where repair is not possible or recommended.

• The list shall include the complete item’s name (nomenclature), OEM’s name, OEM’s Commercial and Government Entity (CAGE) code, OEM’s part number, model number, serial number, estimated unit price, recommended quantity to sustain operation for 2,000 operating hours, identification of the end item, quantity per end item, unit of issue, shelf life, production lead-time, and unique tools or support and test equipment necessary to inspect, test, calibrate, service, repair or overhaul the end item, as well as the name, address and telephone number of the authorized vendor supplying the part. The Contractor shall update the VRS listing information as necessary to reflect changes in equipment through the life of the RCRV Program.

• Regulatory Body Spares: The Contractor shall provide all recommended ABS Spares items identified in Part 4, for both Chapters 2 and 3, Section 1 Appendix 2 (Guidance for Spare Parts) of the ABS Rules for Building and Classing Steel Vessels Under 90m. Regulatory Body Spares shall be received, inspected, inventoried, preserved, packaged, stowed, prebinned and loaded to the final storage location prior to delivery of the vessel. Where items have limited shelf life or useful life, they shall be procured to maximize the service life to the Government after vessel delivery.

• Commercial Off-The-Shelf (COTS) Technical Manuals: Contractor shall provide the Vendor’s commercially available operation and maintenance technical manuals for all equipment and components onboard the vessel. The manuals shall include all OEM’s Commercial Off-The-Shelf (COTS) data. Each technical manual shall be clearly marked as to the equipment model and serial number. The Contractor shall also provide an index of all technical manuals for the vessel.


092 TESTS

092.1 General

Tests shall be conducted by the Contractor in accordance with the provisions herein, ABS requirements, and regulatory bodies’ requirements per Section 070.3. 850

855

860

865

870

875

880

Tests and trials, and related inspections, shall occur in stages to identify and remedy defective or improperly specified equipment, deficient design/installation/construction, and related problems as early as possible. Towards this end, test agenda and related procedures shall be developed for the following stages or inspections, testing and trials as applicable to the item of work, material, equipment or system:

• Stage 1 – Shop Inspections and Factory Acceptance Tests

• Stage 2 – Construction Inspections and Tests

• Stage 3 – Operation and Performance Tests

• Stage 4 – Dock Trials

• Stage 5 – Contractor’s Sea Trials

• Stage 6 – Builder’s Sea Trials

• Stage 7 – Special Tests

All portions of the vessel and all work thereon including structure, fittings, systems and machinery shall be thoroughly tested after installation to demonstrate satisfactory workmanship, proper working order, alignment of all moving parts, tightness, suitability for the purpose intended and compliance with the requirements of these specifications. Any defects that may develop or become apparent from these tests shall be corrected by the Contractor.

Tests shall be conducted at reasonable times, and the Owner’s Representative, inspectors and surveyors shall be notified a reasonable period in advance of the scheduling of tests so that they may arrange to be present.

The Contractor shall provide all meters, gages and other special equipment and supplies required, and shall be responsible for their proper installation, calibration and use and for their removal at the conclusion of the various tests.

The Contractor shall also provide all personnel required to run the tests and to record the data from them.

092.2 Shop Inspections and Factory Acceptance Tests – Stage 1

Shop inspections and factory acceptance tests shall be conducted for major equipment, systems, and assemblies listed below by the manufacturer to demonstrate proper manufacture, assembly, function and compliance with performance criteria prior to shipment.


Shop inspections and tests shall be performed in accordance with the recommendations of SNAME T&R Bulletin No. 3-39, Guide for Shop and Installation Tests, as supplemented by other requirements of the regulatory bodies, the provisions of these specifications and the general practices of the equipment manufacturers. 885

890

895

900

905

910

915

Stage 1 of the test and trial program shall consist of at least the following shop inspections and tests for the following equipment fitted on the vessel:

• Main diesel generator sets and ancillary equipment.

• Main propulsion motors and ancillary equipment.

• Bow thruster and ancillary equipment.

• Machinery plant control and monitoring system and ancillary equipment.

• Control and power distribution switchboards and ancillary equipment.

• Cranes, winches, frames and booms.

092.3 Construction Inspections and Tests – Stage 2

Construction inspections and tests are static demonstrations that precede operational testing. These tests and inspections shall verify that equipment, systems and fabricated construction materials are installed in accordance with design documents and the requirements of the manufacturer and regulatory bodies.

The inspections and tests shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of the regulatory bodies, the provisions of these specifications and recommendations of the equipment manufacturers.

Stage 2 of the test and trial program shall consist of at least the following inspections and tests:

• Cleanliness tests to verify cleaning and flushing of all Contractor-fabricated and installed piping systems.

• Hydrostatic (and/or pneumatic when permitted) testing of all Contractor-fabricated and installed piping systems.

• Functional and load testing of science lifting gear, cranes, winches, A-frame.

• Insulation resistance testing and point-to-point verification of all Contractor-installed electrical cables and connections.

• Equipment alignments such as alignment of motor-driven auxiliaries.

• Propulsion drive train alignment.

• Static load testing of all load-bearing hull fittings, including but not limited to padeyes, bitts and chocks.

• Static load testing of deck fittings, bolt-down fittings, padeyes and lift points.

• Pressure testing of Contractor-fabricated structural and independent tanks.


• Tightness testing of weather deck doors, scuttles, windows, port holes, roller doors or other similar vessel features intended to be sealed to prevent passage of liquid, gas or atmosphere, including penetrations in watertight bulkheads and decks.

920

925

930

935

940

945

950

• Calibration of instrumentation.

• Welding inspections and quality assurance checks.

• Protective coating inspections and quality assurance checks.

• Hull fairness and alignment inspections and quality assurance checks of structural fabrications.

092.4 Operation and Performance Tests – Stage 3

Operation and performance tests shall be conducted to verify that equipment and systems operate and perform within the limits and tolerances prescribed by the design and the requirements of the manufacturer and regulatory bodies.

The operation and performance tests shall be performed in accordance with the recommendations of SNAME T&R No. 3-39, as supplemented by other requirements of the regulatory bodies, the provisions of these specifications and recommendations of the equipment manufacturers.

Stage 3 of the test and trial program shall consist of at least the following operation and performance tests:

• All operational functions of equipment and systems shall be fully demonstrated.

• All performance criteria established for equipment and systems shall be fully verified.

• All control settings, safety trips, interlocks, alarms, fail-safe features, emergency shutdowns and other control features for equipment and systems shall be fully demonstrated. Demonstrations shall include all interconnecting cable and sensing devices.

• All local and remote controls for equipment and systems shall be fully demonstrated at all stations.

• All local and remote instrumentation for equipment and systems shall be fully verified at all locations and among locations.

• Heat run tests for all electric motor-driven auxiliaries shall be conducted.

Generator load testing shall be performed using load bank(s) having the capacity to fully load each generator in single and parallel operation at the generator’s rated capacity. The load bank(s) shall be suitable for performing transient response tests and verifying governor and associated control system settings, safety trips, interlocks and automatic start-up and transfer of the load between generators.


Where two or more systems or equipment items interface, the tests shall also demonstrate satisfactory alignment and performance of the systems and equipment as a whole.

092.5 Dock Trials – Stage 4

955

960

965

970

975

980

985

990

Dock Trials consisting of simultaneous dockside operation of the diesel generating plant, diesel generating plant controls and associated auxiliaries shall be conducted to demonstrate readiness for Sea Trials. In addition, certain installation, operational and performance tests unrelated to the machinery plant, but of particular interest in preparation for Sea Trials, shall be conducted as part of Dock Trials, as specified herein.

Dock Trials shall be performed in accordance with the recommendations of SNAME T&R Bulletin No. 3-47, Guide for Sea Trials, as supplemented by other requirements of the regulatory bodies, the provisions of these specifications and recommendations of the equipment manufacturers.

Dock Trials shall consist of at least the following:

• Diesel Generating Plant Preparation Tests: These tests shall include non-operational cold checks of the plant, confirmation of proper operation of monitoring instrumentation, static tests of emergency shutdowns, alarms, speed-limiting devices and overspeed trips, and other applicable start-up preparation tests, including checking coolant and lubricant levels.

• Diesel Generating Plant Spin and Load Tests: These tests shall include spin and load tests of the diesel generator sets, propulsion motors and propellers. Remote control system features shall be demonstrated as part of these tests for each of the remote control stations (e.g., primary control position, bridge wings, IMACS, etc.). Trials shall be performed with ahead, neutral and astern propulsion up to the highest power consistent with the manufacturer’s recommendations and the strength of the moorings and dock facility. All local and remote controls shall be functionally demonstrated, and related instrumentation shall be verified.

• Bow Thruster Tests: Complete functional testing of the bow thruster, controls and instrumentation shall be performed.

• Auxiliary Systems Tests: The proper operation of all auxiliary systems and their components shall be verified, including at least the following.

o Compressed air system o Lube oil systems o Diesel oil systems o Bilge systems o Potable water system o Seawater service and cooling systems o HVAC systems operation and balancing o MSD and sewage system o Ballast system o Sanitary flushing system o Firefighting systems


o Waste heat recovery systems o Waste oil transfer system o Oily water separator system 995

1000

1005

1010

1015

1020

1025

o Chilled water system o Uncontaminated seawater system o Scientific auxiliary and deck equipment

• Diesel Generator Tests: The generators shall be tested in single generator and parallel operating modes. The diesel generators’ response to transient load changes and all low voltage relays, safety trips, alarms, interlocks and controls shall be tested. All controls and instrumentation for the automatic start-up generators and transfer of load between generators shall be also tested.

• Lifesaving Equipment Tests: The rafts, rescue boats, their winches and davits shall be tested for proper operation and performance.

• Lighting Systems Tests: All lighting systems shall be tested for proper operation and performance.

• Thermographic Testing: All electrical switchboards, distribution panels and power connections shall be tested by an independent tester with experience in reporting shipboard electrical thermographic results. Dockside testing shall include all systems that can be powered up safely at the pier.

• Exterior Communication Equipment Tests: All exterior communication equipment shall be tested for proper operation and performance, including tests for radio interference.

• Navigation Equipment Tests: All electronic navigation and sounding equipment, associated alarm systems, and the ship’s whistle and fog horn shall be tested for proper operation and performance. Proper installation of the compasses and all other navigation equipment shall be verified.

• Anchor Handling Equipment and Ground Tackle Tests: The anchor-handling equipment and ground tackle shall be tested by raising and lowering the anchors.

• Overside Handling Equipment Tests: The winches, A-frame, cranes, and all wire lead paths and associated sheaves shall be tested for functionality. All load-handling equipment shall be load tested as required by ABS and USCG.

• Internal Communication Systems: All internal communication systems required for vessel operations and safety shall be functionally demonstrated.

• Science/Shipboard Network and Communications Systems: All aspects of the science and shipboard networks shall be functionally demonstrated.

• Emergency and Lifesaving Equipment Survey: The vessel’s emergency and lifesaving equipment shall be surveyed for proper stowage and provisioning.


092.6 Builder’s Sea Trials – Stage 5 1030

1035

1040

1045

1050

1055

1060

1065

Builder’s Sea Trials shall be conducted at sea prior to Acceptance Trials to check the operation of the machinery installation; make any adjustments necessary to establish proper operation; check compliance with vessel, equipment, and systems performance requirements; and establish the vessel’s readiness for Acceptance Trials.

Builder’s Sea Trials shall be performed in accordance with these specifications, as supplemented by requirements of the regulatory bodies and recommendations of the equipment manufacturers.

Builder’s Sea Trials shall include the following trial events and related tests. Other tests and trials shall be made at the Contractor’s discretion:

• Ahead Endurance Trials: This trial shall be conducted at the maximum continuous service rating of the engines for a period of not less than 4 hours duration.

• Astern Trial: This trial shall be conducted in accordance with the propeller manufacturer’s recommendations regarding duration and maximum shaft speed.

• Ahead and Astern Steering Test: This trial shall be conducted in accordance with the propeller manufacturer’s recommendations regarding duration and maximum shaft speed.

• Machinery Plant Control System Tests: Control system tests shall include local and remote stations and emergency controls.

• Navigation Equipment Tests: The compasses and electronic equipment shall be adjusted and calibrated as appropriate during initial phases of the trials. The Contractor shall demonstrate the mechanical and electrical intrasystem and intersystem adjustments and alignment of the steering gear and vessel’s navigational system elements, including sonar, radar, gyrocompass and repeaters, DPS, other navigation equipment and science sonar.

• Thermographic Testing: The thermographic testing that could not be done safely at full power during Dock Trials shall be completed or repeated.

• Loss of Electrical Power Test: This test shall be conducted to demonstrate safe operation of the vessel and emergency backup systems under loss of electrical generating power.

• Quick Reversal from Astern to Ahead Test: Two tests shall be conducted in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendation regarding duration and maximum shaft speed.

• Quick Reversal from Ahead to Astern Test: This test shall be performed with the vessel proceeding ahead at maximum vessel speed. Stopping time and head reach shall be recorded.

• Auxiliary System Test: Auxiliary systems and components that could not be fully tested during Dock Trials shall be tested.


092.7 Acceptance Trials – Stage 6

Acceptance Trials shall be conducted at sea to demonstrate compliance with specifications, contract drawings and all other contractual obligations, as a prerequisite to regulatory certification and acceptance of the vessel by the Government.

1070

1075

1080

1085

1090

1095

1100

Acceptance Trials shall be performed in accordance with these specifications, as supplemented by other requirements and recommendations of the regulatory bodies, and in accordance with SNAME T&R Bulletin No. 3-47 and equipment manufacturers’ recommendations.

Acceptance Trials shall consist of at least the following trial events and related tests conducted in accordance with approved test memorandums:

• Ahead Economy Trials: The economy trial shall be conducted at the 10-knot speed continuously for a period of 4 hours. The fuel consumed during this trial shall be determined. The vessel displacement at the beginning of the economy trials shall be the full load condition plus remaining contract modification and service life margins.

• Ahead Endurance Trials: This trial shall be conducted at the maximum rating of the diesel generator sets for a period of not less than 4 hours duration. Displacement shall be noted at the beginning and end of this trial.

• Speed Trials: Speed trials shall be conducted on reciprocal courses in accordance with SNAME T&R Bulletin No. 3-47, at generator loads corresponding to 80% and 100%, with the vessel loaded to the full load condition.

• Astern Trial: This trial shall be conducted in accordance with the propeller manufacturer’s recommendations regarding duration and maximum shaft speed.

• Machinery Plant Control System Tests: Control system tests shall include tests from the bridge, bridge wing, IMACS and local control stations.

• Ahead Steering Test: This trial shall be conducted in accordance with the requirements in SNAME T&R Bulletin No. 3-47.

• Astern Steering Test: This trial shall be conducted in accordance with the propeller manufacturer’s recommendations regarding duration and maximum shaft speed.

• Turning Circle Test: This trial shall be performed at full speed and 10 knots.

• “Z” Maneuver Test: Both 10°/10° and 20°/20° heading angle change tests shall be conducted at vessel speeds of 10 knots and full speed.

• Pullout Tests: Shall be performed to port and starboard in conjunction with Turning Circle Test.

• Spiral Test: Either the direct or reverse spiral tests shall be performed if the Pullout Tests identify any directional instability, but only to the extent necessary to determine the spiral loop width.


1105

1110

1115

1120

1125

1130

1135

1140

1145

• Thruster Tests: The bow thruster tests shall include the dead-in-water test described in SNAME T&R Bulletin No. 3-47 and the following additional tests:

o Tests shall be performed to determine the maximum forward speed that the bow thruster is effective.

o Tests shall be performed to determine the lateral thrust in both directions at zero speed.

o Refer to items below for use of thruster(s) in “crabbing” maneuvers and station keeping tests.

• Quick Reversal from Ahead to Astern Test: This test shall be performed with the vessel proceeding ahead at maximum vessel speed, and also with the vessel proceeding at 10 knots. Stopping time and head reach shall be recorded. Each test shall be repeated once. Displacement shall be determined and noted.

• Quick Reversal from Astern to Ahead Test: Two tests shall be conducted in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations regarding duration and maximum shaft speed. Displacement shall be determined and noted.

• Slow Speed Maneuvering Tests: Tests shall be performed which demonstrate the vessel’s ability to satisfy the slow speed maneuvering requirements.

• Crabbing Maneuver Tests: Tests shall be performed to demonstrate the vessel’s ability to perform crabbing maneuvers (lateral movement of the vessel with no significant fore or aft vessel motion). The maximum sideways velocity achievable using the crabbing maneuver shall be determined with and without bow thruster to port and starboard. Displacement shall be determined and noted.

• Standardization Trials: This test shall be performed in accordance with the requirements in SNAME T&R Bulletin No. 3-47.

• Anchor Windlass Tests: This test shall be performed in accordance with the requirements in SNAME T&R Bulletin No. 3-47.

• Navigation Equipment Tests: Proper calibration of the compasses and electronic equipment shall be verified by USCG and ABS prior to Builder’s Sea Trials. They do not need repeating if no major changes have taken place that affect navigation equipment.

• Miscellaneous Auxiliary Systems Tests: Auxiliary systems that are not suited for complete testing under dockside conditions, or which can more accurately be tested while underway, shall be tested during these trials. These include at least the following:

o Galley equipment o Heating, ventilation and air conditioning systems o Potable water treatment system o Ballasting system o Sewage system o Communication equipment o Navigation equipment


o Lube oil systems o Fuel oil systems o Hydraulic oil systems o Cooling water systems

1150

1155

1160

1165

1170

1175

1180

• Airborne Noise Survey: Shall be conducted to demonstrate compliance with Section 073 of these specifications.

• Vibration Survey: Shall be conducted to demonstrate compliance with Section 073 of these specifications.

• Trackline Keeping: Trackline keeping shall be tested on a predetermined course for 2 miles at 8 knots and 2 miles at 10 knots.

• Station Keeping: The Dynamic Positioning System shall be demonstrated to the satisfaction of the regulatory bodies. Displacement shall be noted.

• Science Overside Handling and Acoustic Equipment: Underway operation of Contractor-installed science handling and acoustic equipment including scientific sonar systems, scientific instrumentation, and overside handling systems. Tests shall be conducted to verify correct installation and system performance in accordance with all contract and manufacturers’ specifications.

The performance of auxiliary propulsion plant components shall be observed and recorded and other special considerations applicable to the diesel generating plant shall be made during trials as delineated in SNAME T&R Bulletin No. 3-47.

All science acoustic systems shall be operated simultaneously to the maximum extent possible at the required speeds and when performing station keeping and trackline tests. In addition, the Contractor shall perform continuity tests on signal and power cables, and ensure services are operational.

After Acceptance Trials have been completed, the vessel shall be returned to the Contractor’s facility and selected equipment, as required by the regulatory bodies, shall be immediately opened for post-trial examination. These examinations shall include, but not be limited to, the following equipment:

• Propulsion drive train hot alignment readings.

• Hull structural inspection (all spaces, including underwater diver inspection) and superstructure (where visible).

092.8 Special Tests and Reports – Stage 7

Special tests are those tests that require special simulation or test facilities and are not directly related to specific equipment or systems.

092.9 Lightship Survey

When all the work on the vessel is substantially complete, but prior to Sea Trials, a lightship survey shall be conducted in accordance with ASTM F1321, Standard Guide for


Conducting a Stability Test. The test shall be conducted under the witness of the USCG and ABS. The Contractor shall furnish written notification of the test to the USCG and ABS, no less than two (2) weeks prior to the intended test date. Additional notification requirements of the regulatory bodies shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.

1185

1190

1195

1200

1205

1210

1215

1220

092.10 Inclining Test

An Inclining Test of the vessel shall be conducted in accordance with ASTM F1321. The test shall be conducted under the witness of the USCG and ABS. The Contractor shall furnish written notification of the test to the USCG and ABS, no less than two (2) weeks prior to the intended test date.

Additional notification requirements of the regulatory bodies shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. The Contractor shall provide all labor, materials, test weights, cranes and all services needed to conduct the Inclining Test.

092.11 Stability Report

Upon successful completion of the Inclining Test and determination of the lightship characteristics, a stability test report shall be prepared establishing the displacement, and vertical and longitudinal positions of the center of gravity in the lightship condition. The test report shall be prepared using hydrostatic information applicable to the as-inclined waterplane of the vessel (as-inclined trim and heel considered), as obtained from the General HydroStatics program. Copies of the report shall be submitted to the USCG for approval. The USCG-approved report and electronic files, in an agreed format, of both the report and the supporting GHS data shall be furnished to the Owner.

092.12 Airborne Noise Survey

An airborne noise survey shall be performed during acceptance trials by the shipyard’s noise control consultant following the general procedures of IMO Resolution A.468 (XII). All compartments shall be complete. All propulsion, auxiliary and hotel systems shall be operating. HVAC shall be balanced and operating. Measurements of overall, A-weighted sound pressure levels (SPL) relative to 20 μPascals shall be made in all manned compartments and machinery spaces. The survey shall be performed at three conditions: (1) station keeping with Bow Thrusters operating at 30%, (2) station keeping with Bow Thrusters operating at 100%, (3) sustained speed of 10 knots. For all conditions, the measured sound levels shall be equal to or less than the limits specified in Section 073.3.

092.13 Vibration Survey

An underway vibration survey shall be performed during acceptance trials by the shipyard’s noise control consultant following the general procedures of SNAME T&R Bulletin No. 2-29 or ISO-6954. Vibration from 1 to 100 Hertz shall be measured for the hull girder, superstructure, and masts, with the vessel underway in water with a minimum depth of five times the draft of the vessel (60 feet). Measurements shall be taken at steady speed runs in 5 rpm increments, from half of full power rpm to full power rpm. A steady acceleration run of 10 rpm increase over 2 minutes shall be performed using “Peak Hold”


sampling. Additional runs of several minutes each of smaller RPM increments shall be taken as required to determine any resonant conditions. All vibration levels shall be below the Zone III (Adverse Comments Probable) of SNAME 2-29 or ISO 6954.

092.14 Sonar Self-Noise Underwater Radiated Noise 1225

Sonar Self-Noise Survey

Underway sonar self-noise tests shall be conducted by the Contractor to demonstrate compliance with the sonar self-noise requirements. The contractor shall measure the acoustic noise over the frequency range of the transducers at each planned sonar transducer installation site. Reference/test hydrophones (50Hz – 100kHz) shall be provided. Underway sonar self-noise tests shall be conducted from zero to maximum performance of the hull at each sonar frequency with respect to vessel speed. The tests shall be performed with the vessel in normal underway operating conditions at the full load condition. The sonar self-noise measurements shall be conducted at deep water, where own-ship bottom reflected noise has been determined to have minimal impact on the sonar self-noise levels. Measurements shall be made in an area free from outside noise sources that could affect results.

1230

1235

Underwater Radiated Noise Survey

It is assumed that the government shall arrange and pay for the underwater radiated noise survey at the U.S. Navy’s NUWC Keyport Division facility at Dabob Bay, Washington. The shipyard shall provide all staff and materials (food and fuel) to transit the vessel from the shipyard to Dabob Bay and back. It is assumed that the underwater radiated noise testing will take place for a period of one working day (8 hours). The government shall allow the shipyard’s noise control consultant to witness the data collection during the survey. Test conditions during the survey shall be determined solely by the government, with review by the shipyard’s noise control consultant.

1240

1245

092.15 Tests and Trials Program Planning Documentation

Test Program Plan

The Contractor shall prepare a comprehensive Test Program Plan defining the approach to be used to implement the inspection, test and evaluation requirements. 1250

1255

As part of the Test Program Plan, a test program numbering system shall be developed that is related to the test stage and the specification section associated with the particular test. This system shall be used to assign identifying numbers to inspection, test and trial documentation. The same number shall be assigned to all documentation and data associated with a particular event.

A test program index shall be developed and maintained to provide a complete tabular listing of all inspections, tests and trials to be conducted, including any recommended special (Stage 7) tests. The index shall list by test number and title all Contractor conducted inspections, tests and trials.


096 WEIGHT ESTIMATES AND WEIGHT CONTROL 1260

1265

1270

1275

1280

1285

1290

1295

096.1 Weight Control Plan

The Contractor shall prepare a weight control plan to manage the weight and center of gravity of the vessel as the design and construction progresses. The plan shall include the following:

• An overall description of the approach, procedures and organizational controls to be implemented to ensure compliance with the weight, KG, trim and list requirements of the Contract.

• A discussion of design risk with respect to the vessel’s naval architectural characteristics, including special weight control problems and the areas that will receive weight control emphasis.

• A discussion of the methodology to be used in adjusting margin accounts.

• A description of the computer software that will be used in the weight control effort.

• A discussion of the weight determination techniques to be employed including weighing of equipment, machinery and modules.

• A listing of the equipment that will be used to perform actual weight measurements including capacity, accuracy tolerance and calibration frequency.

• A discussion of the detail to which the vessel construction drawings will be calculated.

• The reporting schedule and cutoff dates for weight input.

• The planned action for verification of mill tolerances, welding and paint factors.

• Description of the weight control organization, including the weight control coordinator and his/her management and technical authority relative to the overall design effort.

• The management actions which will be taken upon detection of weight and margin trends tending to cause contractual values to be exceeded

• The method and degree of weight control that will be required of subcontractors.

• A discussion of the construction monitoring techniques that will be used to ensure that the vessel, as constructed, is accurately reflected in the weight reports and meets contractual requirements.

• A discussion of weight control training to be administered to personnel involved in the design and construction of the vessel.

096.2 Quarterly Weight Report (QWR)

A detailed QWR in the 3-digit SWBS format shall be prepared to document the current mass properties of the design and construction effort. The weight and moment data for all


components and material of the finished vessel and their overall effect on the vessel’s displacement, centers of gravity, list and trim shall be included in the QWR. Weight and moment effects of weight reservations for equipment to be installed by the Government after delivery shall be included in lightship. As vessel design or construction drawings are prepared, and as material and equipment is selected, acquired and received, the weight and centers of gravity for all items that comprise the vessel shall be determined and reported in the weight estimates. The weight estimate shall reflect the lightship that is projected for delivery, including the current mass properties values loads, GFM and margins.

1300

1305

1310

1315

1320

1325

1330

The vessel’s displacement, KG, list and trim shall be compared to the design values. Report details shall indicate whether the information shown is estimated, calculated or actually weighed. Weight estimates shall include summary sheets for lightship and all loading conditions defined in Section 079 with KG, metacentric height (uncorrected and corrected for the free surface effect of liquids in tanks), hydrostatic characteristics, list, trim and drafts above the bottom of the keel at the perpendiculars and midship. The weight estimate shall include a notation explaining the cause of each significant change in weight or moment of an element in the estimate. The weight estimate shall include a summary sheet of the weight and KG impacts of contract changes. Weight and KG margins for design and building shall be included. Weight estimates shall also include scientific loads, other required loads and GFM.

096.3 Accepted Vessel Weight Report

An Accepted Vessel Weight Report shall be prepared, reflecting the final status of the vessel design and construction effort that resulted in a delivered product and is based on the Inclining Test. The lightship weight and KG shall be adjusted to correlate with Inclining Test data. Design and building margin is used to account for irreconcilable differences between the final weight estimate and the Inclining Test. All required loads shall be added to lightship weight to verify the vessel weight and KG comply with Contract requirements. Naval architectural not-to-exceed values shall be included to verify the service life allowance requirements are met.

The vessel in its full load condition shall be capable of accommodating the loads in Table 000-3. If the vessel is configured to carry vans on the working deck, the van load shall be applied in addition to the working deck load. The van load shall be applied at the center of the vans, and the working deck load shall be applied at the center of the remaining open deck space, as described in Table 000-3.

A service life allowance of 5 percent of full load displacement (considered to act at the vessel’s CG) and 0.5 foot of full load KG shall be provided to allow for future growth of the vessel.

Design and building margin shall be selected by the Contractor and shall be included in the weight estimates.


Table 000-3. Variable Loads

Item Weight Density Factor Utilization

Factor Crew and Effects:

Crew Scientists and Technicians

14 @ 400 lbs/person 16 @ 300lbs

Small Arms Ammunition: 100 lbs Provisions and Stores:

Dry 7,000 pounds Freeze 5,000 pounds Chill 3,500 pounds Ship Stores 2,500 pounds Medical 400 pounds General Stores 8,500 pounds

Fluids: Fuel As req’d 52.93 lb/ft3 0.98 Lube Oil Tanks filled 57.50 lb/ft3 0.98 Potable Water Tanks filled 62.23 lb/ft3 1.00 Stability Tank (if provided) Water As req’d for operation 64.00 lb/ft3 Residual Ballast Water Water below the suction

inlets 64.00 lb/ft3

Hydraulic Fluid Tanks filled 58.20 lb/ft3 1.00 Sanitary Tank 50% full 64.00 lb/ft3

Scientific Stores and Expendables Working Deck Load 30 long tons (Note 1) Vans 15 tons (Note 2) Storerooms 5 long tons (Note 3) NOTES: 1. Located at the center of the working deck aft, three feet above the deck 2. Located at the center of the van locations. (7.5 tons per van.) 3. Located four feet above the deck in the scientific storeroom(s).

1335


SECTION 100 HULL AND DECKHOUSE STRUCTURE

TABLE OF CONTENTS

100 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS .................................................................................................1 100.1 General..........................................................................................................................................1 100.2 Foundations...................................................................................................................................1 100.3 Special Foundation Design ...........................................................................................................2 100.4 Special Structural Requirements ...................................................................................................2 100.5 Bulwarks .......................................................................................................................................3 100.6 Deck Bolts and Van Fittings .........................................................................................................3 100.7 Uncontaminated Seawater Seachest..............................................................................................3 100.8 Scientific Seachest ........................................................................................................................3 100.9 Scientific Transducer Tube ...........................................................................................................4 100.10 Bilge Keels....................................................................................................................................4 102 WELDING...................................................................................................................................4 102.1 Welding Operator Qualifications ..................................................................................................5 102.2 Welding Procedures ......................................................................................................................5 102.3 Preparation ....................................................................................................................................5 102.4 Tack Welding................................................................................................................................5 102.5 Alignment and Fit .........................................................................................................................5 102.6 Inspection......................................................................................................................................6 102.7 Weld Repair ..................................................................................................................................6 103 HULL STRUCTURE SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS..............................................................6 150 SUPERSTRUCTURE.................................................................................................................7 162 STACK(S)....................................................................................................................................7 170 MASTS AND FLAGSTAFF.......................................................................................................7 184 NAVIGATION SYSTEM ALIGNMENT.................................................................................8


SECTION 100 HULL AND DECKHOUSE STRUCTURE

5

10

15

20

25

30

35


100.1 General

The hull of the vessel (main deck and below) shall be built of steel, transversely framed with a 48-inch frame spacing. Longitudinals on 24-inch spacing shall be notched into the transverse frames. The superstructure (above main deck) shall be built of steel, transversely framed with a 24-inch frame spacing. All shell plating and attached framing shall be ABS Grade A, with the exception of the sheer strake which shall be ABS Grade B.

The arrangement of the structure shall be as shown on the hull and deckhouse structure drawings. Scantlings shown on the drawings which are in excess of ABS requirements shall not be reduced.

100.2 Foundations

All equipment shall be supported by foundations, as appropriate for the installation. Strength and rigidity of foundations shall be sufficient to withstand the following loads and shall distribute such loads into the hull structure:

• Weights of equipment, including fluids at operating levels.

• Weight of supported ancillary components and/or systems.

• Dynamic loading induced by vessel motion.

• Dynamic loading induced by equipment in operation.

The rigidity of foundations and supporting structure shall be sufficient to prevent misalignment which would interfere with operation of the equipment and to preclude excessive vibratory motion or rocking on the foundation. See also Section 100.3, below.

Design of foundations shall facilitate efficient operation and maintenance of equipment, as well as allow access for maintenance of foundations and adjacent hull structure. Foundation design shall avoid creation of pockets and inaccessible places where corrosion cannot be controlled or where dirt and debris can accumulate.

Foundations shall be suitably supported to prevent excessive or unusual vibration under the normal range of vessel operating conditions.

Foundations shall be attached to and maintain continuity of primary structure. Supporting structure shall be stiffened where necessary to carry both static and dynamic loads.

Containment coamings shall be provided around all equipment (except main propulsion engines and diesel generator sets) where oil leakage may occur. Coaming dimensions shall conform to containment capacity requirements of regulations where applicable. Coamings


shall be installed at the base of foundations or incorporated into the tops of foundation pedestals, as best suits the design for particular equipment items. 40

45

50

55

60

65

70

75

Foundations for bitts and chocks shall include insert plates and underdeck stiffening. Foundations for deck machinery and science equipment shall include heavy insert plates, as well as deep girders and additional vertical support if necessary.

100.3 Special Foundation Design

To meet the acoustic performance requirements in Section 073, the following machinery foundations shall be designed with higher (dynamic) stiffness and damping tiles on any plating larger than 8" x 8". The Contractor shall work with their noise consultant to optimize these foundation designs to minimize noise and vibration.

• Propulsion Motors • Air Compressors • Fuel Oil Purifier • MSD • Diesel Generators • A/C Chillers

Damping tiles shall be as described in Section 635.

In addition, the diesel generators shall have two-stage vibration isolation, with a high mass (at least 50% of the weight of the diesel generator set), dynamically stiff, intermediate foundation.

100.4 Special Structural Requirements

The working deck and working deck van stowage area shall be designed as exposed cargo decks with a uniform design load of 767 lb/ft2 over the entire working deck area. In addition, the aft working deck shall be designed to accept a 30-ton load at a density of 1,500 lb/ft2 located anywhere on the working deck. Deck plating in the working deck shall be at least 1/2-inch thick. No waterway bar shall be installed in these areas. The working deck-to-shell connection shall be rounded with a 6-inch radius. The working deck shall be capable of accepting the loads which can be imparted by any four deck bolts loaded at 5,000 pounds each, located in a continuous row. The working deck van stowage area shall be designed to withstand the loading of 2-20 ft x 8 ft ISO vans each with a maximum gross weight of 20,000 pounds. The stowage deck areas shall be marked with the maximum permissible uniform deck loads.

Regions subject to possible impact, such as the transom and side shell near overside handling equipment, shall be designed in accordance with the ABS recommendations for vessels subject to impact. The transom and side areas in way of overside handling systems shall be free of projections and fittings which could cause interference with nets or other towed equipment.


100.5 Bulwarks

The bulwarks provided shall include freeing ports to allow for adequate drainage in heavy seas. Bulwarks on the aft working deck shall be removable to provide flexible capability for ease of overside handling of oceanographic equipment, and shall be fitted with hinged freeing ports. Where rounded deck edges exist, means shall be provided to prevent personnel from slipping under the bulwark.

80

85

90

95

100

105

110

100.6 Deck Bolts and Van Fittings

All working deck areas shall be provided with 1-inch, 8NC (SAE National Coarse Thread) threaded inserts on 2-foot centers with a tolerance of ±1/16 inch on center. The layout of the tie down points shall emanate from the middle of the compartment/area and go out, so that a uniform grid pattern is achieved throughout the compartment/area served. Tie down points shall extend as close to the sides and stern as possible. The inserts shall be installed and tied to the deck structure to provide the maximum holding strength. Tie down points shall be provided for any clear deck space that might be used for equipment installation, including the foredeck and 01 deck. Additional bolt-down fittings shall be provided to serve specific equipment and outfit items, including winches, portable deck crane (three positions), aft working deck bitts and chocks, A-frame, removable bulwarks sections aft and the portable stanchions for lifelines.

On the decks of the laboratories and scientific storerooms a grid of flush deck bolt sockets, 1/2-inch 13NC on 2-foot centers with a tolerance of ±1/16 inch on center shall be provided. Deck sockets shall be located inline with the overhead Unistrut sections. The fittings shall be flush with the top of the finished deck, and designed to withstand the equivalent design uniform deck load.

All bolt-down fittings shall be of CRES 316 with a minimum thread length of two bolt diameters. Bolt holes shall not penetrate watertight decks. The Contractor shall provide removable stainless steel bolts with flush slot heads, set in molybdenum grease to fill all deck bolt sockets. The vessel shall be delivered with the bolts installed.

For the van stowage areas, flush ISO deck fittings shall be provided.

100.7 Uncontaminated Seawater Seachest

One vertically-oriented uncontaminated seachest shall be provided as shown on the drawings for the uncontaminated seawater system and incubator system described in Section 524.

100.8 Scientific Seachest

One vertically-oriented, 19-inch inner diameter, scientific transducer seachest shall be provided for temporary deployment of special purpose mission gear. The location of the scientific seachest shall be located aft of the multibeam sonar transducers, within 10 feet of the centerline, on a flat portion of the hull, and shall be provided with a faired flush external cover which can be installed/removed by divers.


The location of the seachest shall be in close proximity to the other sonars. The seachest shall be aligned with the vessel’s reference system and provided with local alignment benchmarks fore and aft on the exterior and interior hull area. The seachest shall have at least 10 inches of riser measured from the hull. The seachest shall be fabricated with a standard flange (16 holes on 21-1/4 inch DBC, OD 24 inch, ID 19 inch). A blank cover plate shall be provided to seal the upper end of the seachest when not in use. The seachest shall have provision for installation of a 1.5-inch thick flush sea window. The seachest shall have at least 5 feet of vertical clearance above it and shall have a padeye (500 lb working load) located above it.

115

120

125

130

135

140

145

150

100.9 Scientific Transducer Tube

One vertically-oriented, 24-inch inner diameter, scientific transducer tube shall be provided for special purpose scientific gear. The transducer tube shall open into the weather, at or above the bulkhead deck, and shall have substantial vertical clearance to allow for a crane or winch system to install and remove the scientific gear. The transducer tube shall be provided with a faired flush outer cover which can be installed and removed by divers. The transducer tube shall be aligned with the vessel’s reference system and provided with local alignment benchmarks usable from the deck. A blank flange shall be provided for the upper end of the transducer tube. The design of the tube shall allow for the ready changing of instrumentation without the use of divers (except for the outer cover). Easy cable access and a fresh water supply shall be provided. The Contractor shall install padeyes and support structure for removing the transducer well cover plates and attached transducers.

Each well shall consist of a 24" diameter steel tube with a bolted flange and plate blind flange. The location of the transducer well is shown on the drawings.

The Contractor shall install vent and fill valves on each transducer well.

100.10 Bilge Keels

Bilge keels shall be provided and designed to meet the seakeeping criteria of Section 070.5. Bilge keels shall be of watertight construction, have well-rounded edges and no exposed framing. They may not extend outboard past the maximum beam of the vessel. The volume enclosed by the bilge keels shall be treated as a void.

102 WELDING

All welding details and procedures shall be developed by the Contractor in accordance with the Rules of the American Bureau of Shipping.

Intermittent welding may be used where appropriate to minimize distortion and where oiltightness or watertightness is not involved. However, intermittent welding shall not be used in locations exposed to the weather.

All structure shall be continuously welded in way of mooring fittings, deck machinery, generator and propulsion motor foundations and other areas subject to high stress or vibration.


102.1 Welding Operator Qualifications

Welding operators shall be proficient in the type of welding to be performed. All weld operators shall be acceptable to ABS. 155

160

165

170

175

180

102.2 Welding Procedures

Welding procedures shall be established by the Contractor and submitted to ABS for approval. Procedures for the welding of all joints, including the type of consumables, joint preparation and welding position, shall be detailed.

102.3 Preparation

The preparation of plate edges shall be accurate and essentially free from blemishes. All joints shall be properly aligned and closed or adjusted before welding. Excessive force shall not be used in fairing and closing the work. Approved methods for holding the work in proper alignment shall be used during welding operations.

Parts shall be set up and welded in such a way that contraction stresses are kept to a minimum.

Welding shall proceed systematically, each welded joint being completed in proper sequence.

Joint edges shall be scratch-brushed (or other acceptable method) immediately before welding to remove oxide or adhering films of dirt and filings.

102.4 Tack Welding

Consumables for tack welding shall be of the same grade as those used for the main weld.

Tack welds that are to be retained as part of the finished weld shall be clean and free from defects before being incorporated into the weld.

Care shall be taken when removing tack welds used for assembly to ensure that the material of the structure is not damaged.

Any defects in the structure resulting from the removal of temporary attachments shall be prepared, welded and ground smooth so as to achieve a defect-free repair.

102.5 Alignment and Fit

Care shall be taken to obtain good alignment of structural members, particularly where such members oppose each other on opposite sides of bulkheads or decks. In such cases, misalignment exceeding half the thickness of the thicker member shall be considered cause for rejection. Where discontinuities of structure are unavoidable, suitable brackets or other reinforcement shall be installed.


All joints shall be prepared, aligned and adjusted in accordance with the approved joint design.

185

190

195

200

205

210

215

Clamps with wedges or strong-backs used for this purpose shall be suitably arranged to allow freedom of lateral movement between adjacent elements.

Welded temporary attachments used to aid construction shall be removed carefully.

102.6 Inspection

All new welds shall be inspected as necessary to satisfy the regulatory bodies.

Weld inspections shall occur prior to any painting of welds, and shall include both visual and non-destructive (ND) tests, as required by ABS.

All weld inspection equipment, inspection equipment operators and materials shall be furnished by the Contractor.

102.7 Weld Repair

Repairs to defective welding shall be carried out using approved consumables and procedures.

Repairs shall be re-examined for further defects. Care shall be taken when repairing defects that require the application of small weld beads. Tears and scars left on plating after the removal of temporary attachments shall be built up by welding, if necessary, and dressed smooth.

When modifications or repairs have been made that result in openings having to be closed by welded inserts, particular care shall be given to the fit of the insert and the welding sequence.

When misalignment of structural members on either side of bulkheads, decks, etc., exceeds the required tolerance, the member shall be released, re-aligned, and re-welded in accordance with the required repair procedure.

103 HULL STRUCTURE SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS

The thickness of the shell plating shall be in accordance with ABS Rules. Seams and butts may be located to suit the practice of the Contractor, provided that butts and seams are kept clear of bulkheads and framing by a minimum of 3 inches. Seams shall lie in fair lines.

The shell shall be increased in thickness locally by means of insert plates with rounded corners in way of seachests and other shell penetrations, as appropriate and in accordance with the requirements of the regulatory bodies.

Watertight bulkheads and tank boundaries shall be tested in accordance with regulatory requirements to demonstrate tightness.


All weather decks shall have no sheer and no camber as shown on the drawings. All deck plating shall be worked with flush seams and butts. Heavy insert plates shall be provided in way of the deck machinery. 220

225

230

235

240

245

250

150 SUPERSTRUCTURE

The steel deckhouse or superstructure shall be fabricated in accordance with the drawings.

162 STACK(S)

Provision shall be made to keep exhaust gases and soot from contaminating the ventilation air intakes, along with the working deck areas, incubator locations, other exterior deck areas, ventilation system intakes and exterior doorways during normal conditions of operation. The vessel’s stacks shall be provided with an efficient exhaust system that encloses all diesel exhaust gas systems (excluding the emergency diesel generator set) and the incinerator exhaust. Internal insulation and sheathing shall be provided as required. Ladder access and lighting shall be provided inside stack(s).

The steel stack shall be fabricated in accordance with the drawings.

170 MASTS AND FLAGSTAFF

The masts shall be installed and rigged for the intended service generally as indicated on the drawings, and as specified herein. The masts shall be suitable for mounting all navigation lights required for international service as indicated on the drawings. Structural reinforcement shall be provided for the loads imposed. The mast shall be self-supporting without the use of stays. The mast shall be fitted for ensign and signal hoists. The supporting structure, along with the mast, shall be designed to minimize blind arcs and false targets on the radars. Mast structures shall be suitable for the loads imposed in a seaway. Structural reinforcement shall be provided for the loads imposed.

Along with navigation, the main mast shall be provided with all the necessary fittings and connections for rigging, lights, antennas, halyards, dressing lines, electronic equipment, scientific packages, etc. The main mast shall consist of yardarms capable of supporting up to five scientific packages, each weighing 100 pounds.

A secondary lightweight and removable mast shall be provided on the foredeck (01 deck) as shown on the drawings. The location of the secondary mast shall be in a region with clean airflow and little disturbance from the vessel’s structure. The secondary mast shall be designed for ease of service for installed scientific packages and instruments.

These instruments shall be installed with means for lowering and raising the scientific packages in one hour or less. Cranes or oceanographic winches shall not be used to raise and lower such packages. The yardarms of the secondary mast shall be capable of supporting five scientific packages weighing 25 pounds each.

Connections and wiring shall be installed to allow easy connection between sensors and instruments located on the masts and the vessel’s data network.


Climber safety rails and/or tie-off padeyes shall be provided on radar stub masts, antenna platforms, obstruction lights stub masts and VHF antenna stub masts for use when personnel are performing maintenance. Service platforms shall be provided to allow access to antennas for maintenance and repair. A high and unobstructed location shall be provided for installation of a radiometer.

255

260

265

270

275

280

184 NAVIGATION SYSTEM ALIGNMENT

A set of benchmarks shall be used to create a coordinate reference system for the vessel that will establish sensor locations, referenced to a common origin. The following sensors shall be aligned to this reference system:

• GPS antennas

• DGPS antennas

• AHRS antennas

• Motion reference unit

• Scientific transducers

• Gyrocompass

• Radar antenna

• Scientific seachests

Local benchmarks shall be provided at all scientific equipment installation sites, at space and reservation sites for future sensor installations, forward and aft of centerboard, and as specified herein. Scientific system sensors selected locations and associated reference benchmarks shall accommodate the manufacturer’s system installation and alignment requirements, comply with recommended optimum sensor mounting locations, and support the orthogonal survey requirements.

Benchmarks shall be installed and aligned to the centerline (fore and aft) of the vessel to an accuracy of 30 arc-minutes. The centerboard shall also remain aligned within ±30 arc-minutes in all axes.


SECTION 200 PROPULSION PLANT

TABLE OF CONTENTS

200 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS .................................................................................................1 200.1 General..........................................................................................................................................1 200.2 Single Source Vendor (SSV) ........................................................................................................1 200.3 Propulsion Plant Configuration and Integration............................................................................3 200.4 Propulsion System Dynamic Analysis ..........................................................................................4 200.5 Propulsion System Alignment.......................................................................................................5 202 MACHINERY PLANT CENTRAL CONTROL SYSTEM....................................................5 233 DIESEL GENERATOR SETS...................................................................................................6 233.1 General..........................................................................................................................................6 233.2 Diesel Engines ..............................................................................................................................6 233.3 Electric Generating Equipment .....................................................................................................9 235 ELECTRIC PROPULSION SYSTEM ...................................................................................11 235.1 Main Propulsion Motors .............................................................................................................11 235.2 Propulsion Power Converters......................................................................................................11 235.3 Propulsion Converter Transformers ............................................................................................12 235.4 Bow Thruster Motor....................................................................................................................12 235.5 Bow Thruster Motor Drive .........................................................................................................12 235.6 Bow Thruster Converter Transformer.........................................................................................13 243 PROPULSION SHAFTING.....................................................................................................13 244 PROPULSION SHAFT BEARINGS AND SEALS ...............................................................13 245 PROPULSORS..........................................................................................................................14 245.1 Propellers ....................................................................................................................................14 256 ENGINE COOLING WATER SYSTEMS .............................................................................15 259 DIESEL ENGINE EXHAUST.................................................................................................15 262 LUBRICATION SYSTEM.......................................................................................................16


SECTION 200 PROPULSION PLANT

5

10

15

20

25

30

35


200.1 General

This section contains requirements applicable to the propulsion system engines, motors, shafting, gears, and propellers, and their ancillary machinery/equipment.

The vessel shall be powered by an integrated diesel-electric system. A total of three ship service diesel generators (SSDGs) shall supply power to a common electrical bus from which all ship loads shall be supplied.

Propulsion shall be conventional twin screw, fixed pitch propellers, driven directly via slow-speed, AC motors. Steering shall be via conventional rotary vane steering gears and twin rudders.

All propulsion system machinery and equipment shall be ABS classed, comply with USCG regulations and meet the recommendations of IEEE-45, as applicable.

Section 300 describes the electrical power distribution systems.

Section 400 describes the propulsion plant monitoring, control and alarm systems.

The main propulsion system design and installation shall comply with the requirements for an unmanned engine room. All main propulsion equipment shall be fitted with alarms, indicators and controls necessary to meet ABS classification ACCU and USCG regulations 46 CFR Part 62, Vital System Automation.

A machinery log shall be maintained up to the time of vessel delivery recording the dates and times that machinery and other equipment were operated. The log shall also include date and time entries for any transfers of oil or hydraulic fluids to and from machinery, any repair or maintenance work performed on machinery subsequent to initial start-ups, and any other information pertinent for record purposes. A separate log sheet shall be maintained of the accumulated hours on major machinery and other equipment.

200.2 Single Source Vendor (SSV)

The Contractor has selected Siemens as SSV for this project to serve as the propulsion system integrator. The SSV shall be responsible for the overall engineering, design, procurement, integration, including prime mover vendor equipment integration, regulatory body approval and testing of the main propulsion machinery plant. The SSV, either acting solely or in a teaming arrangement with other vendors, shall:

• Ensure that all electrical system equipment supply, design and installation follow the guidelines of the Power System Study, and ensure that the power requirements of the Owner are met.


• Provide three (3) water cooled alternators, 425 kW rated, AVK model No. DSG 62 M1-4, for installation on the same skids and coupled to the ship service diesel generator sets (SSDGs).

40

45

50

55

60

65

70

75

• Provide two (2) resiliently-mounted 339 kW, 200 RPM, high-torque, AC propulsion motors, Siemens Order No. 1FW4451-1HA. The motors shall be rated for vibration severity Grade B, cooling water temperature of 35°C, ambient air temperature of 46°C, and ABS Class.

• Provide two (2) propulsion motor variable speed drives, water cooled, Siemens 690V Bluedrive Single Propulsion Converter 12-Pulse.

• Provide two (2) propulsion transformers, Siemens Type 3LT 630.

• Provide one (1) bow thruster propulsion motor, air cooled, Siemens Order No. 1LA8 405-PM8.

• Provide one (1) bow thruster propulsion motor variable speed drive, water cooled, Siemens Sinamics G150 drive rated at 560 kW, supply voltage shall be 690V 3-phase, 60Hz.

• Provide one (1) bow thruster transformer, Siemens Type 3LT 630.

• Provide one (1) 480V main switchboard, Siemens Type Sivacon 8PT Marine with integrated power management system.

• Provide one (1) 208Y/120V ship service switchboard, Siemens Type Sivacon 8PT Marine.

• Provide two (2) ship service transformers 480/208Y-120V 150kVA, Siemens Type Sivacon 8PT Marine

• Provide two (2) THD line filters for ship service power.

• Provide one (1) 480V emergency switchboard, Siemens Type Sivacon 8PT Marine.

• Provide one (1) 120V emergency switchboard, Siemens Type Sivacon 8PT Marine.

• Provide three (3) emergency service transformers 480/120V, 37.5 KVA, 1-phase.

• Provide one (1) UPS, to provide emergency power to the Integrated Machinery Alarm & Control (IMAC) System.

• Develop and provide an integrated alarm, monitoring and control system as specified by the Owner and as required by ABS to receive ACCU certification, and by USCG for vital system automation in unattended machinery plants.

• Provide vessel control system integration services and act as the primary system integrator. The SSV shall:

o Act as the single point of contact for the Owner and Contractor interface.

o Provide complete documentation necessary for regulatory approvals, Owner/Contractor design review and acceptance, and shipyard installation. This includes the FMEA, DVT and PST documents.


o Obtain full regulatory approval of all systems that require regulatory approval.

o Provide full documentation and field service to support to Contractor installation work.

o Conduct factory tests and demonstration tests during Dock Trials, Builder’s Sea Trials and Acceptance Trials. This includes providing time, space, and support at the factory for sound and vibration measurements of the ship set propulsion equipment including: (2) Propulsion Motors, (2) Propulsion Drive Motor Converters, (2) Harmonic Filters, (2) Propulsion Motor Transformers. The SSV will be responsible for providing testing platform that allows motors to be tested at full load. The shipyard’s noise control consultant will be responsible for performing all noise and vibration measurements.

80

85

90

95

100

105

110

o Provide operation, repair and parts manuals to support vessel operation.

o Deliver all equipment in accordance with a delivery schedule to be developed by the SSV and accepted by the Contractor.

o Provide crew training.

o Provide spare parts and special tools.

• Provide design and integration services to interface the integrated alarm, monitoring and control system with the navigation and maneuvering system equipment in an integrated bridge system (IBS).

• Provide design and integration services to interface the integrated alarm, monitoring and control system with the communication system equipment integrated into the pilothouse.

• Provide design and integration services to interface the integrated alarm, monitoring and control system with the Scientific Network.

• Provide SCC, port/starboard bridge wing and MCS consoles.

200.3 Propulsion Plant Configuration and Integration

The propulsion power plant shall be composed of the following major components:

• Two slow-speed AC propulsion motors, each driving a fixed-pitch propeller through conventional propulsion shafting.

• Two conventional rudders controlled via rotary vane steering gear.

• Steerable bow thruster.

• Electrical power conditioning and distribution equipment.

• Integrated monitoring, alarm and control system and power management system.

• Three ship service diesel generators.

• Emergency diesel generator.


The control and monitoring systems shall conform to the regulatory requirements for unattended machinery plants and supplemental requirements addressed in Section 202.

The propulsion plant shall satisfy the vessel speed requirements set forth in Section 070 of these specifications. The vessel shall be capable of sustained operation at the speed prescribed in that section with the mean power demand on each ship service diesel generator no greater than the ISO 3046/1 standard power rating.

115

120

125

130

135

140

145

The propulsion control system shall be provided with automatic load limiting features that adjust propeller RPM to prevent momentary or transient loads (such as may be associated with maneuvering, operations in a seaway, or the coming on-line of large electrical loads) from placing a propulsion demand on the ship service diesel generators which exceeds the ISO overload power rating.

The operating voltages of electrical systems shall be 690 VAC, 480 VAC, 240 VAC and 208Y/120 VAC, both 3-phase and single-phase power. Control voltages shall be 120 VAC, and 24 and 12 VDC.

200.4 Propulsion System Dynamic Analysis

A propulsion system dynamic analysis shall be performed, predicting the transient performance of the vessel and its propulsion system during open water and slow speed maneuvering (docking) operations, operations in waves and crash reversals. The analysis shall employ representations of the salient hull characteristics (one degree of freedom), propulsion plant (generator sets through propellers), control systems, and the environment. The analysis shall be accomplished using computer simulations, test bed studies, other suitable techniques, or any combination of the foregoing that provides a reliable and realistic engineering basis for predicting the transient performance of the vessel and propulsion system as required above.

The dynamic analysis shall be used to:

• Support propulsion system detailed engineering, design development, testing and evaluation, and to identify potential problems and corrective actions.

• Aid in the orderly integration of the detailed electrical control and mechanical characteristics of selected propulsion system components.

• Predict the adequacy of control system algorithms employed to control and protect the propulsion and electrical systems.

• Predict that the vessel and propulsion system performance requirements given in these specifications will be satisfied.

• Determine the dynamic characteristics of the system with respect to crash astern and crash ahead maneuvers, and corrective actions required, if any, to meet the maneuvering and other performance requirements.

• Validate the frequency stability of ship service electricity generated.


200.5 Propulsion System Alignment

The propulsion system shall align properly when the vessel is waterborne in its fully outfitted and properly ballasted state, with all components installed, connected and supported in their respective bearings. “Proper alignment” is defined as the positioning of the system such that bearing loads, system clearances and other salient characteristics fall within the pre-established design tolerances and limits under all conditions, with due regard to thermal growth, bearing wear-down, hull deflections and other effects.

150

155

160

165

The propulsion system alignment shall be performed under the direct supervision of personnel experienced in and regularly engaged in alignment work.

Final alignment of the shafting shall be checked in both the cold and hot conditions as follows:

• Cold Alignment Check: Machinery alignments shall be measured in the cold condition to the extent that assurance can be given prior to Builder’s Sea Trials that resulting hot alignment will meet the alignment criteria. Adjustments shall be made as necessary to achieve that assurance.

• Hot Alignment Check: Machinery alignments shall be measured with the main machinery room foundations and machinery up to operating temperature, such as while undergoing or immediately upon returning from underway sea trials.

A propulsion alignment booklet shall be prepared prior to commencing installation. This booklet shall contain, as a minimum, the following:

• Alignment Criteria (for example, tolerance values and limit values) must all be checked to confirm proper alignment of the propulsion system. 170

• Manufacturers’ Data applicable to alignment and related calculations.

• Alignment Procedures detailing the procedures to be used for the shafting and reduction gear to ensure that the alignment criteria will be met. Data sheets and other forms to be used during the alignment and validation proceedings shall be appended. 175

180

185

After the final alignment has been completed, the propulsion system alignment booklet shall be revised to include the as-measured hot and cold bearing loads.

202 MACHINERY PLANT CENTRAL CONTROL SYSTEM

An Automated Centralized Control Unattended (ACCU) machinery control system for unattended machinery room operation shall be provided for the pilothouse and Machinery Control Station (MCS). To meet this requirement an Integrated Machinery Alarm and Control (IMAC) System, shall be provided to include process instrumentation, alarm handling, data logging and remote control/automation to vital and non-vital ship services where specified. A Power Management System (PMS) shall be integrated with the main switchboard and feed into the IMAC system to allow control and monitoring of the machinery plant. The system shall consist of sensors, switches and actuators that monitor


and control processes of interest. See Sections 436 and 324 for IMAC and PMS system descriptions, respectively.

233 DIESEL GENERATOR SETS

233.1 General 190

195

200

A total of three (3) ship service diesel generator sets (SSDGs) shall be provided and installed to supply the primary propulsion and ship service power requirements for the vessel. Each diesel engine and generator shall be mounted on a common skid by the engine manufacturer/provider, and shall be isolated from the vessel’s structure by double rafted resilient (vibration isolator) mounts in accordance with Section 500. The diesel generator skid assembly and accessories shall be certified to ABS Rules, AMS and ACCU.

All auxiliary system connections, control and monitoring connections, and generator (alternator) power cabling and cooling shall be installed such that the vibration isolation between the respective generator set and the vessel is maintained.

233.2 Diesel Engines

Diesel engines for the three (3) SSDGs shall be Caterpillar C18A CERT, IMO Tier II compliant, rated at 425 kW for continuous service. The following shall be provided by Caterpillar as skid–mounted, factory installed components:

Air Inlet System 205

• Aftercooler - corrosion resistant

• Air cleaner/fumes disposal, closed system

• Turbochargers, jacket water cooled

• Turbocharger inlet, 152 mm (6") OD straight connection

Control System 210

215

• Electronic governing, Adem 111

• Electronic diagnostics and fault logging

• Start/Stop panel

• Engine mounted 70-pin dedicated customer connector

• SAE J1939 data link

Cooling System

• Thermostat and housing

• Jacket water pump, gear driven

• Auxiliary water pump


• Block heater 1500 W, 120 VAC 220

• Engine driven seawater pump

• Engine mounted titanium plate and frame heat exchanger

Exhaust System

• Manifold and turbochargers, water cooled

• 152 mm (6") round flanged outlet 225

Flywheels and Flywheel Housings

• Flywheel, SAE No. 0, 136 teeth

• Flywheel housing, SAE No. 0

• SAE standard rotation

Fuel System 230

• Fuel filter, RH or LH service

• Fuel transfer pump

• Fuel priming pump

• Flexible fuel lines

Lube System 235

240

• Crankcase breather

• Oil cooler

• Oil filter, spin-on, RH or LH service

• Oil pan center sump

• Oil filler

• Dipstick, RH or LH service

• Oil pump, gear driven

Power Take-Offs

• Hydraulic pump drive, SAE A, 11 tooth

• Crankshaft pulley, (11.5"), two groove, (.63") width 245

Protection System

• Shutdown, electronic, 24 volt, energized to run

• Low oil pressure, high water temperature, and overspeed conditions

General

• Vibration damper and guard 250


• Paint, Caterpillar yellow or white

• Lifting eyes

• RH or LH service options

• Literature (also electronic format pdf files)

• Variable engine wiring 255

260

265

270

275

280

• Upper rear-facing customer wiring connector and ECAP connection

• Electronic installation kit (connectors, pins, sockets)

• Manual lube oil change sump pumps

• 8" dry exhaust elbows with weld flanges

• Alarm contactors for low oil pressure, high water temperature, and low water level

• Fuel oil coolers

• MPD instrument panels for remote monitoring, ship loose

• Air starting motors with silencers and pressure reducing valves

• Engine mounted duplex lube oil and fuel oil filters

• Load share modules, ship loose

• Installation of AVK generator ends and torsional couplings

• Custom fabricated skid bases

• Titanium plate and frame heat exchangers installed on skid bases for heat recovery

• Set of parts books, operation and maintenance manuals, and one commercial overhaul service manual (also electronic format pdf files)

• ABS engine certification

• GL/IMO technical documentation

• N C supplied start-up and sea trial using ship’s load (technician on site for 40 hours)

• Standard genset torsional vibration report

Double jacketed, high pressure fuel oil piping shall be provided. Means for measuring fuel consumption for each diesel engine shall be provided and displayed in the MCS.

Each diesel engine set shall be equipped with an industry standard J1939 CAN serial interface. All regulatory required alarm and instrumentation points shall be available to the IMAC system from the J1939 serial interface.


Stand alone local control, instrumentation and alarm shall be installed on a vibration-dampened panel mounted adjacent to each engine. This shall include, as a minimum, the following:

• Start/Stop/ speed regulation

• Start/Stop keep warm system 285

290

295

300

305

310

• Start/Stop prelube oil system

• Engine lube oil pressure and temperature (high alarm)

• Engine lube oil sump low level alarm

• Engine jacket water inlet and outlet temperature (high alarm)

• Fuel pump discharge pressure

• Fuel manifold pressure (may be combined with c. as duplex gage)

• Engine jacket water pump discharge pressure

• Engine raw water pump discharge pressure

• Air manifold pressure for turbocharged engines

• Engine r/min (alarm overspeed)

• Hour meter (rollover after 99,999.9 hours or greater)

• Pyrometer

• Crankcase pressure (minus 5 to plus 5 inches of water) (high alarm)

• Low start air pressure alarm

233.3 Electric Generating Equipment

The alternators shall be AVK Model DSG 62 M1-4 marine-rated, freshwater cooled, self-regulating, brushless, 3-phase synchronous with built-in exciter machine and electronic voltage regulator, capable of being operated with a marine-rated diesel engine.

They shall be self-excited brushless machines consisting of main stator, main field and internally implemented exciter, with an auxiliary winding for the power supply to the automatic voltage regulator.

The stator housing shall be of welded design. The stator core pack shall consist of hydraulically-pressed, low-loss dynamo laminations, pressed together with the housing via pressure plates to form a compact unit. The stator winding shall be insulated in accordance with appropriate insulation class according to IEC 60034, Part 18. The winding heads and wirings shall be supported by suitable fastening elements and firmly linked together by mechanical means to guard against electrodynamics loads caused by current forces.

The rotor shall consist of the shaft, the main revolving field, exciter rotor and rotating rectifier with rectifier protection elements. The main revolving field in salient pole design


shall be constructed with hydraulically-pressed lamination sheets or steel plates. A damper cage shall be installed, with the bars electrically connected within the pole shoes, as well as from pole to pole. The main rotor windings shall be flat copper and protected against centrifugal forces by suitable components. The rotor shall be dynamically balanced with half key in accordance with IEC 60034, Part 14.

315

320

325

330

335

340

345

Bearing plates shall be welded. The generator feet shall be integrated in the bearing plates or located as near as possible to the bearing plates in order to grant optimum vibration stiffness.

Each of the alternators shall have the following technical ratings and features:

• Three-phase, low-voltage, water cooled synchronous alternator

• Rated output power 531kVA

• Power factor 0.8

• Rated voltage 480 VAC, 3-phase

• Rated frequency 60Hz

• Rated speed 1800 RPM

• Direction of rotation counter-clockwise and facing the drive end

• Insulation class / temperature rise F

• Degree of protection IP23

• Two-bearing design

• Rated for ambient temperature of 0 to 50°C

• Bearings: roller bearings

• One (1) resistance thermometer PT 100 per bearing

• Six (6) embedded resistance thermometers PT 100 in the stator windings without lightning arresters for 4-wire connection from terminals

• Individual acceptance by classification society (essential service)

• Anti-condensation heater 220-240V (min 200V, max. 264V) approximately 2 x 250W

• Rated voltage operation range between 95% and 105% of rated voltage

• Voltage adjustment range ±5% of rated voltage for continuous operation and ±10% of rated voltage for short time, e.g., for synchronization

• Steady state voltage performance from ±0.5% to 1% at: o No load - rated load o Power factor 0.8 - 1.0

• Sinus wave voltage wave form deviation between phases at no load less than 5%, according IEC 60034


• Unbalanced load capability - alternator suitable for unbalanced load up to 20% of rated current between line-neutral, without exceeding the rated current

350

355

360

365

370

375

380

• Parallel operation - alternators suitable for parallel operation

• Sustained short circuit current 3 x rated current for 3 sec. at 3-pole terminal short-circuit

• Overload 10% for 1 hr every 12 hrs or 50% for 30 sec

• Harmonic content ≥2 % measured between phases at no load up to nominal load and power factor from 0.1 to 1.0 under symmetrical and linear loads. The winding optimized in order to keep the 5th and 7th harmonics measured between the phases as low as possible

• The alternators thermally suitable for a high content of non-linear loads, 12-/18-/24-pulse converters, up to 90% of rated load

• Electronic voltage regulator with voltage drop device for parallel operation, to be mounted in the main switchboard or delivered in a separate cabinet with auxiliaries and terminals for control and signal cables

Each alternator enclosure shall be protected by a dedicated CO2 fire extinguishing system, as discussed in Section 555.

235 ELECTRIC PROPULSION SYSTEM

235.1 Main Propulsion Motors

Two main propulsion motors shall be provided and installed. Each motor shall be a Siemens permanent magnet HT-direct motor 1FW4451-1HA rated for 454 BHP (339kW) at 200 RPM.

Each motor shall be isolated from the vessel’s structure by resilient (vibration isolator) mounts in accordance with Section 500.

Each propulsion motor shall be asynchronous, alternating current, squirrel cage, 3-phase, double winding, freshwater cooled, outfitted for marine propulsion service. The motors shall be opposite turning but otherwise identical. The motors shall operate from a pulse width modulating (PWM) frequency converter supply.

Each motor shall be totally enclosed and watertight to the bottom of the shaft. The enclosures shall be splash-proof above the bottom of the shaft.

Each propulsion motor enclosure shall be protected by a dedicated CO2 fire extinguishing system, as discussed in Section 555.

235.2 Propulsion Power Converters

A total of two (2) PWM type, 12-pulse, solid state propulsion frequency converters (“drives”), Siemens 690V Bluedrive Single Propulsion Converter 12-Pulse, shall be


provided and installed to supply power to the two (2) propulsion motors. Computer control of the drive shall provide the necessary motor current to maintain the set speed reference. It shall also limit generator load if propulsion demand exceeds the capacity of the generators operating at the time. Regenerated power associated with quick reversals and emergency stopping shall be absorbed by a braking resistor bank.

385

390

395

400

405

410

415

420

AC line and line-to-ground filters shall be provided as required to protect against line voltage spikes, switching surges and electrical noise.

Each propulsion converter unit shall be supplied as a totally enclosed, free standing, water-cooled unit. Instruments and control switches shall be mounted on front hinged doors. Removable panels shall be secured by knurled machine screws made captive in the panel. All doors and panels shall have gaskets to provide EMI shielding.

All bus work shall be copper. The bus bar connections shall be silver plated. All bus work shall be insulated, covered or physically separated to eliminate arc over and arc propagation. All bus work shall be braced for not less than 1.5 times the maximum fault current.

235.3 Propulsion Converter Transformers

Two (2) propulsion converter transformers shall be provided and installed, one for each propulsion sub-system. The transformers shall be three-winding (copper, one primary and two secondary), cast resin, indoor dry-type suitable for location in a ventilated (non-air conditioned) space, remote from the installed motors, with maximum ambient temperature of 115°F. The transformers shall be suitable for use in the marine environment and compatible with the specified drive frequency converter.

235.4 Bow Thruster Motor

The bow thruster motor shall be asynchronous, alternating current, squirrel cage, 3-phase, double winding, Siemens model 1LA8 405-6PM8, 690V, 466kW, 1200 RPM. The motor shall operate from a pulse width modulating (PWM) frequency converter supply. The motor shall be self ventilated air cooled.

The motor insulation shall meet the requirements for Class F materials as a minimum. The windings shall be vacuum pressure impregnated with epoxy resin. The finished windings shall present a smooth surface and shall not permit moisture, oil or dirt to penetrate or damage the insulation.

235.5 Bow Thruster Motor Drive

A PWM type, 12-pulse, solid state propulsion type frequency converter, Siemens 690V Sinamics G150 model 6SL3710-1GH35-8CA, shall be provided and installed to supply power to the bow thruster motor. Computer control of the drive shall provide the necessary motor current to maintain the set speed reference. It shall also limit generator load if demand exceeds the capacity of the generators operating at the time. Regenerated


power associated with quick reversals and emergency stopping shall be absorbed by a braking resistor bank if required to maintain power quality.

AC line and line-to-ground filters shall be provided as required to protect against line voltage spikes, switching surges and electrical noise. 425

430

435

440

445

450

The power converter unit shall be supplied as a totally enclosed, free standing, air-cooled unit. Instruments and control switches shall be mounted on front hinged doors. Removable panels shall be secured by knurled machine screws made captive in the panel. All doors and panels shall have gaskets to provide EMI shielding.

All bus work shall be copper. The bus bar connections shall be silverplated. All bus work shall be insulated, covered or physically separated to eliminate arc over and arc propagation. All bus work shall be braced for not less than 1.5 times the maximum fault current.

235.6 Bow Thruster Converter Transformer

A bow thruster converter transformer shall be provided and installed in the bow thruster room. The transformer shall be three-winding (copper, one primary and two secondary), cast resin, indoor dry-type suitable for location in a ventilated (non-air conditioned) space with maximum ambient temperature of 110°F. The transformers shall be suitable for use in the marine environment and compatible with the specified drive frequency converter.

243 PROPULSION SHAFTING

The main propulsion shafting system shall include shafting, thrust bearing, bearings, stern tube seals, torsional couplings and components to connect the propellers to the main propulsion motors. The propeller shafting shall be designed to allow easy removal through the stern tube without cutting either the shaft or vessel structure.

Propulsion shafting shall be Aquamet 22 with an outside diameter of 6".

A LO-REZ torsional coupling model 27-1/2 RT shall be provided and installed between the propulsion motor and the line shaft.

Shaft locking devices with means to mechanically align and engage shall be provided. Shaft brakes shall be provided if required for DPS requirements.

244 PROPULSION SHAFT BEARINGS AND SEALS

244.1 Thrust Bearings

One hydrodynamic, self-aligning thrust bearing shall be provided on each shaft. The thrust bearing shall have an integral concentric journal bearing. The thrust bearing configuration shall permit ready inspection, maintenance, repair and adjustment of axial clearances.


244.2 Stern Tube & Strut Bearings 455

460

465

470

475

480

The stern tube bearings shall be Kobelco Eagle Friction Free Bearings of the full molded type, 12" long, one per shaft located at the aft end of the stern tube. Each bearing shall be aligned to the manufacturer’s specified tolerance using set screws threaded into the stern tube. Once aligned, the void between the bearing and the shaft tube shall be filled with waterproof chockfast type material. Lubrication shall be seawater injected into the stern tube at a port in the forward shaft seal.

Strut bearings shall be Kobelco Eagle Friction Free Bearings, one per shaft, 18" long, one per shaft located in the strut. Each bearing shall be aligned to the manufacturer’s specified tolerance using set screws threaded into the strut. Once aligned the void between the bearing and the strut shall be filled with waterproof chockfast type material. Lubrication shall be naturally flowing seawater.

244.3 Stern Tube Seals

Forward stern tube seals shall be Koblelco Eagle type EVK, size 150, water lubricated stern tube seal. An additional spare seal shall be installed onto the shaft to allow quick replacement of a worn seal element.

The seal shall be split to allow for replacement of wearing elements and change of rubber components without shaft removal.

A well shall be provided under the stern tube seal to collect leakage. Means shall be provided to pump out the well.

245 PROPULSORS

245.1 Propellers

The propellers shall be 6'-6" diameter, 5 bladed, wake adapted stainless steel props in accordance with the design documented in the Deliverable DI-010-02 Speed and Power Report.

Propellers shall be manufactured in accordance with ISO Standard 484/1, “Ship-building - Ship Screw Propellers Manufacturing Tolerances - Part 2: Propellers of Diameter between 0.80 and 2.50 Meters inclusive.” Blade tolerances shall be in accordance with ISO 484/1 Class S.


Each completed propeller’s static balance shall comply with ISO 484/1. The weight of each blade shall not deviate by more than 2% from the mean weight of all blades of the same hand. In addition, the static imbalance of the assembled propeller shall not exceed the value determined by:

485

2

4000N

WU =

where: U = maximum residual static unbalance in ounce-inches W = weight of rotating part in pounds 490

495

500

505

510

515

N = maximum operating RPM of unit

A contoured fairwater cap shall be provided on the forward end of the propeller hub.

A detailed 3-D wake survey in the propeller plane was performed, and the results can be found in the Deliverable DI-010-05, Model Test Report.

256 ENGINE COOLING WATER SYSTEMS

Each diesel generator shall be provided with an independent, closed loop freshwater cooling system.

The jacket water cooling pump shall be provided by the manufacturer, engine-mounted and driven by the engine’s power-take-off system.

Each diesel engine shall be provided by the manufacturer with an electric jacket water heater to maintain engine block temperature when the engine is not operating.

Each SSDG freshwater cooling system shall be a manufacturer supplied plate heat exchanger capable of recovering waste engine heat for potable watermaking by the evaporators. The waste heat recovery system shall be fully automatic to the extent that operator assistance is not required to maintain proper diesel generator operating temperatures and recover waste heat when a generator is placed in or taken out of service. See Section 534 for details on the waste heat recovery system.

When the waste heat recovery system is not absorbing all the available heat from the freshwater cooling system(s), the heat shall be rejected to the SSDG seawater cooling system(s) described in Section 524.

259 DIESEL ENGINE EXHAUST

Each engine shall have a separate exhaust piping system between the engine exhaust manifold outlet and the top of the stack. Each engine combustion exhaust system, including the silencer, shall not impose a back pressure on the engine exceeding the recommendations of the respective engine manufacturer.


The exhaust piping shall be arranged and supported so as to safely withstand stresses induced by weight, vessel accelerations, thermal expansion and engine movement. The exhaust system shall be resiliently mounted, with mountings and hangers arranged to minimize structure-borne vibration, in accordance with Section 073.

Grade Super Critical spark-arresting type silencers shall be provided for each diesel engine, Harco model 2472VCSA8. Silencers shall be resiliently mounted and arranged with access to the carbon collectors for periodic cleaning, and shall be mounted on low-frequency isolation mounts.

520

525

530

535

540

Metal expansion joints of the bellows type shall be installed between the diesel engine exhaust manifold and the exhaust piping, and elsewhere as required by engine displacement and thermal expansion. Particular attention shall be given to the arrangement of the ship service generator resilient mounting system when selecting expansion joints.

Exhaust piping shall be air-tight, with drains provided at the low points of the exhaust piping within the main machinery room and the silencers. Exhaust weather outlets for the diesel engines shall be located at the top of the stack and shall be configured to prevent rain water from entering the exhaust piping.

The crankcase exhaust system for each diesel engine shall be independent and not combined with other systems.

262 LUBRICATION SYSTEM

The bow thruster shall have its own self-contained lubricating oil system with attached pump, electric-motor driven standby pump, lube oil cooler, duplex strainer and filter.

Each ship service diesel generator shall have its own self-contained, manufacturer supplied lubricating oil system with integral sump, circulating pump(s), prelube pump(s), cooler(s) and filters. The lube oil coolers shall be engine-mounted with engine supplied piping cooled by fresh water as described in Section 533. The prelube pump shall be interlocked with the starting sequence to prevent starting the engine without proper lube oil pressure.


SECTION 300 ELECTRIC PLANT AND CABLING

TABLE OF CONTENTS

300 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL PLANT AND CABLING.................1 300.1 General..........................................................................................................................................1 300.2 Power Quality and Characteristics ................................................................................................1 300.3 Ship Service Power .......................................................................................................................4 300.4 Harmonic Interference ..................................................................................................................4 300.5 Bonding and Grounding................................................................................................................5 300.6 Electrical Growth Reserve ............................................................................................................6 300.7 Cables............................................................................................................................................6 300.8 Cable Installation ..........................................................................................................................6 300.9 Transformers .................................................................................................................................8 300.10 Propulsion Converter Transformers ..............................................................................................9 302 ELECTRIC MOTORS AND ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT .................................................9 302.1 Motors...........................................................................................................................................9 302.2 Motor Controllers........................................................................................................................10 310 ELECTRIC GENERATING EQUIPMENT ..........................................................................12 310.1 Ship Service Diesel Generator Sets.............................................................................................12 310.2 Emergency Generator Set ...........................................................................................................12 313 STORAGE BATTERIES AND CHARGING EQUIPMENT...............................................13 314 POWER CONVERSION EQUIPMENT ................................................................................13 314.1 Uninterruptible Power.................................................................................................................13 314.2 DC Power....................................................................................................................................13 314.3 Emergency Diesel Starting..........................................................................................................14 320 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRIC POWER DISTRIBUTION

SYSTEMS..................................................................................................................................14 320.1 General........................................................................................................................................14 320.2 Laboratory Power System...........................................................................................................16 320.3 Science Van Receptacles ............................................................................................................17 320.4 Uninterruptible Power System ....................................................................................................17 320.5 Science Wireways .......................................................................................................................17 320.6 Ship Service Power System ........................................................................................................18 324 SWITCHBOARDS AND PANELS FOR ELECTRIC POWER AND LIGHTING ...........19 324.1 Switchboards...............................................................................................................................19 324.2 Distribution Panelboards.............................................................................................................24 324.3 Automatic Transfer Switches......................................................................................................25 331 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR LIGHTING SYSTEMS.............................................25 332 ILLUMINATION REQUIREMENTS....................................................................................27 332.1 General........................................................................................................................................27 332.2 Special Illumination ....................................................................................................................27

Page 300-i Regional Class Research Vessel 12 November 2008 Contractor’s Ship Specifications, Rev B DI-001_Specs\Outline Specifications\Rev B\300b.doc

SECTION 300 ELECTRIC PLANT AND CABLING


300.1 General

The vessel shall be powered by an integrated AC/AC diesel-electric system. Three (3) diesel generators, described in Section 200, shall supply 480 VAC, 3-phase power to a common bus, which shall be used to supply propulsion and scientific deck machinery, ship service and science power requirements.

5

10

15

20

25

The electrical power distribution systems shall be configured with power limiting to the propulsion system to avoid inadvertent overloading of the generators, with no operator intervention necessary.

The equipment and designs shall comply with the requirements of the American Bureau of Shipping and the recommendations of the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) Standard 45. International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) standards may be accepted as a substitute for IEEE, or other, standards as allowed by the above regulations. Electrical generating and distribution equipment shall be fitted with alarms, indicators and controls necessary to meet ABS classification ACCU.

In addition, the following requirements shall be met: The recommendations of USCG NVIC 2-89, Guide for Electrical Installations on Merchant Vessels and Mobile Offshore Drilling Units, and ABS Guidance Notes on Control of Harmonics in Electrical Power Systems.

300.2 Power Quality and Characteristics

The AC power system characteristics shall comply with IEEE 45-2002 Clause 4.5, as delineated below.

Table 300-1. Alternating Current (AC) Power Characteristics (from IEEE 45-2002)

Characteristics Limits Frequency

a) Nominal frequency 60 Hz b) Frequency tolerances ± 3% c) Frequency modulation 1/2 % d) Frequency transient:

1) Tolerance ± 4% 2) Recovery time 2 sec.

e) The worst-case frequency excursion from nominal frequency resulting from item b), item c) and item d) 1) combined, except under emergency conditions

5-1/2 sec.

Page 300-1 Regional Class Research Vessel 12 November 2008 Contractor’s Ship Specifications, Rev B DI-001_Specs\Outline Specifications\Rev B\300b.doc

Characteristics Limits Voltage

a) User voltage tolerance: 1) Average of the three line-to-line voltages ± 5% 2) Any one line-to-line voltage, including item a) 1) and line

voltage unbalances item b) ± 7%

b) Line voltage unbalance 3% c) Voltage modulation 5% d) Voltage transient:

1) Voltage transient tolerances ± 16% 2) Voltage transient recovery time -2 sec

e) Voltage spike (peak value includes fundamental) ± 2500 V (380-690 V) system 1000 V (120-240 V) system

f) The maximum departure voltage resulting from item a) 1) and item d) combined, except under transient or emergency conditions

± 6%

g) The worst-case voltage excursion from nominal user voltage resulting from item a) 1), item a) 2) and item d) 1) combined, except under emergency conditions

± 20%

Waveform Voltage Distortion* a) Maximum total harmonic distortion 5% b) Maximum single harmonic 3% c) Maximum deviation factor 5%

Emergency Conditions a) Frequency excursion -100 to +12% b) Duration of frequency excursion Up to 2 min. c) Voltage excursion -100 to +35% d) Duration of voltage excursion:

1) Lower limits (-100%) Up to 2 min. 2) Upper limit (+35%) 2 min.

The following are definitions of the above terms:

Frequency

• Nominal frequency: The designated frequency in hertz.

• Frequency tolerance: The maximum permitted departure from nominal frequency during normal operation, excluding transient and cyclic frequency variations. It includes variations caused by load changes, environment (temperature, humidity, vibration, and inclination), switchboard meter error and drift. Tolerances are expressed in percentage of nominal frequency.

30

35

• Frequency modulation: The permitted periodic variation in frequency during normal operation that might be caused by regularly and randomly repeated loading. For purposes of definition, the periodicity of frequency modulation should be considered as not exceeding 10 sec.

* For ships with electric propulsion or other adjustable speed drive loads, higher voltage distortion can be accepted on a dedicated power bus if the equipment connected to the dedicated power bus is designed and tested for the actual conditions.


Frequency modulation (%) = { }

{ } 1002 nominal

minimummaximum ××

−

fff

• Frequency transient tolerance: A sudden change in frequency that goes outside the frequency tolerance limits and returns to and remains within these limits within a specified recovery time after initiation of the disturbance. Frequency transient tolerance is in addition to frequency tolerance limits.

40

45 • Frequency transient recovery time: The time period from the start of the

disturbance until the frequency recovers and remains within frequency tolerance limits.

Voltage

• User voltage tolerance: The maximum permitted departure from nominal user voltage during normal operation, excluding transient and cyclic voltage variations. It includes variations such as those caused by load changes, environment (temperature, humidity, vibration and inclination), switchboard meter error and drift.

50

• Line voltage unbalance tolerance (three-phase system): The difference between the highest and lowest line-to-line voltages.

Line Voltage Unbalance Tolerance (%) = { }{ } 100

nominal

minimummaximum ×−

EEE 55

60

• Voltage modulation (amplitude): The periodic voltage variation (peak to valley) or the user voltage that might be caused by regularly or randomly repeated pulsed loading. The periodicity or voltage modulation is considered to be longer than 1 Hz and less than 10 sec. Voltages used in the following equation shall be all-peak or all-RMS:

Voltage Modulation (%) = { }{ } 1002 nominal

minimummaximum ××

−

EEE

• Voltage transient

o Voltage transient tolerance: A sudden change (excluding spikes) in voltage that goes outside the user voltage tolerance limits and returns to and remains within these limits within a specified recovery time longer than 1 msec. after the initiation of the disturbance. The voltage transient tolerance is in addition to the user voltage tolerance limits.

65

70

o Voltage transient recovery time: The time elapsed from initiation of the disturbance until the voltage recovers and remains within the user voltage tolerance limits.

• Voltage spike: A voltage change of very short duration (less than 1 msec).


Waveform

• Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) (of a sine wave): The ratio in percentage of the RMS value of the residue (after elimination of the fundamental) to the RMS value of the fundamental. 75

80

• Single Harmonic (of a sine wave): The ratio in percentage of the RMS value of that harmonic to the RMS value of the fundamental.

• Deviation Factor (of a sine wave): The ratio of the maximum difference between corresponding ordinates of the wave and of the equivalent sine wave to the maximum ordinate of the equivalent sine wave when the waves are superimposed in such a way that they make the maximum difference as small as possible.

Derivation factor (%) = { }{ } 100

wavesine equivalent theof ordinate maximumdeviation maximum

×

Emergency Conditions

• A situation or occurrence of a serious nature that may result in electrical power system interruptions or deviations, such as the occurrence of ship service generator failure and the emergency generator coming on line.

85

90

95

100

105

300.3 Ship Service Power

Unless otherwise specified, electric power consuming equipment shall be selected to have a frequency rating of 60 hertz and one of the following nominal voltage/phase ratings:

• 690V, three-phase, 3-wire



• 208V, single or three-phase, 3- or 4-wire (neutral included)

• 120V, single-phase, 2-wire

Direct current shall be provided in the following nominal voltages, as required:

• 24 VDC

• 12 VDC

AC power source, distribution system conductors and current carrying parts shall be ungrounded, except the neutral of wye-connected systems.

300.4 Harmonic Interference

The harmonic distortion level shall be maintained ≤5% THD, and shall be verified by an analysis of the electrical system. This analysis shall utilize a proven computer power system analysis program, such as EDSA or SKM Power*Tools (any recognized program using the principles found in IEEE 399 is acceptable), to determine the harmonic contributions, and their effects, from the propulsion system, large motors (>50 HP), UPSs,


major cyclic loads, motors with VFDs, etc. The system shall be modeled in the steady state condition using the data in the most consuming mode of operation in the load analysis. A report detailing the results of the harmonic analysis shall be delivered to the Owner prior to 6 months after start of Contract.

300.5 Bonding and Grounding 110

115

120

125

130

135

140

The installation recommendations and wiring practices, including grounding requirements, shall comply with the practices set forth in MIL-STD-1310.

Large metal items attached by a low resistance connection to the vessel’s hull are considered extensions of the vessel’s hull and are ground potential.

The following equipment shall be bonded and grounded to vessel’s ground potential:

• Equipment utilizing electrical power

• Fuel tanks and pipes

• Metallic standing rigging and masts

• Metallic cranes, hoisting gear, gantry and A-frame

• Removable metallic lifeline stanchions, liferails and ladders

• Water tanks

• Metal ducts

• Engines, rudders and rudder stocks, main propulsion shaft, in sonar trunks and seachests

• Resiliently mounted equipment shall be bonded as described herein.

The outermost metallic surface of equipment connected to electrical power of 30 volts or more shall be grounded. A third conductor in the power supply cable, a bond strap or a bracket shall be used to ground electrical and electronic equipment installed on resilient mounts. Other electrical and electronic equipment is considered properly grounded if it has areas of metal-to-metal contact or installation bolts. Slide-mounted or roller-mounted equipment shall be grounded by a conductor within the equipment cable harness.

Wherever possible, running rigging such as flag hoists shall be non-metallic. Metallic standing rigging shall be bonded to ground potential through the use of bond strapping.

In each of the preceding grounding requirements, the resistance between each item of equipment and the ground point shall not exceed a DC resistance of 0.1 ohm.

Bonding and grounding straps shall be fabricated from braided cable. Lugs shall be installed on each end of the cable to facilitate bond strap installation. Lugs shall be selected to match the mating surface. Bond strap length shall be the minimum necessary. Surfaces where bond straps and lugs are to be attached shall be prepared for installation by cleaning to bare metal. Bond straps placed in topside areas shall be weather sealed after


installation by priming and painting the lugs and areas affected by welding, or by coating the bolted lugs and associated hardware with weather sealing compound. Bond straps shall not be painted.

300.6 Electrical Growth Reserve

Electrical system design shall include an additional growth reserve of at least 10% in generating capacity and a growth reserve in the electrical switchboard distribution system of at least 20% evenly distributed among the five most frequently used breaker sizes and types.

145

150

155

160

165

170

175

300.7 Cables

The construction of cable shall be in accordance with U.S. Navy specification MIL-DTL-24643, IEEE 45, ABS, or IEC marine, low-smoke, flame-retardant cable.

Fiber-optic cables shall meet the construction/flame propagation requirements of ABS.

Unarmored cable shall be used in all locations, including in the weather, except where physical damage may occur. Armored cable shall be used in locations where damage to the cable may occur. Where armored cable is used, aluminum armor is the preferred sheathing; however, bronze armor may be used.

Cable conductors shall be sized so that the maximum AC voltage drop does not exceed 5%. Voltage drop calculations shall be submitted to the Owner for approval. No conductor smaller than #14 AWG (2.5 mm2) shall be used for general power and lighting service. Special cable may be used for electronic equipment as recommended by the equipment manufacturer, providing it is qualified for low flame propagation per IEEE 45, ABS, or equivalent.

All control cable and motor operated valve cables shall be shielded and grounded.

Portable cables shall be of the heavy duty, oil resistant, rubber covered type. Portable cables for heat-producing appliances shall be heat and flame-resistant. All portable cables shall contain an extra conductor for equipment grounding.

300.8 Cable Installation

Cables shall be run as directly as possible consistent with practical cableway groupings, hazardous locations, etc. Cables shall be concealed in bulkheads or overhead in spaces which are lined. Where possible, cableways shall be run overhead through passageways.

Of prime consideration in planning electrical distribution is the control and treatment of electrical noise. An overall plan shall be developed and submitted, for Owner approval, concerning wiring level/cable separation practices. Cableway crossings shall be as nearly perpendicular as practical with maximum practical separation. See Section 407 for electromagnetic environmental effects.


Cables that are subjected to mechanical damage shall be suitably protected by metal guards. Likewise, cables subjected to possible moisture dripping shall be provided with sheet metal drip shields.

Cables shall be supported by “open” cableways generally consisting of steel angle or square tube downcomers with angle crosstrees spaced approximately 24" apart to minimize cable sag, and retention devices (metal and/or plastic straps as allowed by the regulations) installed in accordance with IEEE 45. Cableways shall be designed to support all cabling required to pass through them in a single layer (per tier) with 20% spare capacity. Cables may be installed two layers per tier when required; however, those cables’ ampacity shall be de-rated by a factor of 0.8 per the regulations. Cableway structure shall be strong enough to withstand short circuit conditions.

180

185

190

195

200

205

210

Cables for deckhouse exterior lighting, receptacles, etc., shall be run inside the deckhouse as far as practicable. Exterior cable runs to equipment and lighting on deck shall be suitably protected.

Openings for passage of cables through non-tight bulkheads shall be edged with metal strips or plastic bushings to prevent chafing. Multi-cable transits (MCTs) shall be installed in fire-rated and/or watertight bulkheads and decks in lieu of stuffing tube nests when there is a requirement for three or more cable penetrations in any given location. The transits shall have at least 30% reserve capacity (50% for science cableways) for the future installation of cables during vessel upgrades.

When cables penetrate decks, there shall be a 9" kick pipe with nickel plated watertight gland and sealing compound molded to shed water, or equivalent arrangement.

Elsewhere, they shall be at least 6 inches high, measured from the top of the deck or deck covering to the top of the stuffing tube.

Cables to flexibly mounted equipment shall have sufficient slack so as not to constitute a noise “short.”

All cable connections shall be made within equipment enclosures or standard approved appliances with terminal blocks. Terminal blocks shall be non-combustible, moisture-proof, phenolic with barriers between terminals. Terminal lugs shall be of the solderless type. The lugs shall be of a type that will prevent turning.

Cables connected to equipment in hazardous zones shall be provided with appropriate fittings per 46 CFR 111.105 and the National Electric Code (NFPA 70).

All cables shall be tagged with their identification at each point of connection, and on both sides of bulkheads and decks, with tags of aluminum (or other non-corrosive metal) with embossed figures.

Low level signal cables shall be separated from power cables with high content of harmonics and spikes, and shall be protected from electromagnetic interference by installation in separate cableways or in conduit.


Cable separation practices shall be in accordance with IEEE 519-1992, Section 6.4.3, except that paragraph 6.4.3.7.6 does not apply. Parallel wireways for cables in power (480V and above), propulsion, and thruster circuits shall be separated from scientific and electronic circuits by a minimum of 36 inches where practicable.

215

220

225

230

235

240

245

300.9 Transformers

All transformers shall be continuous wound construction, and of energy-efficient design. Transformer banks rated below 25 kVA shall have two 5% FCBN primary winding taps. Banks rated 25 kVA and greater shall have two 2.5% FCAN primary winding taps.

All low-voltage transformers shall be rated for 115°C rise, maximum.

Transformers shall be located in well-ventilated areas, as near as possible to their service loads.

Loads shall be balanced between phases. Single-phase loads shall be distributed between phases such that the “factored load” on any one phase is within ±15% of the average load of all three phases.

Current transformers associated with the ground fault detector system shall be installed in the wiring gutters serving the transformers. A metal oxide varistor (MOV) or similar type over-voltage protection device shall be located in the vicinity of, and installed across the leads of, each current transformer.

Transformers shall be electrostatically shielded, except when the transformer is part of a commercially available item.

These requirements are not applicable to the propulsion and bow thruster isolation transformers (below).

Two (2) delta-wye, 3-phase, 60Hz, 99kVA, shielded 480/208Y-120V transformers shall be provided and installed to step down voltage from the main 480V ship service/propulsion switchboard to the 208Y/120V ship service switchboard section. The transformers shall adhere to IEC 60076 and shall be ABS classed, natural cooled, with insulation Class F, rated for 0-50ºC ambient temperature, 5% impedance voltage, K-13 factor rated for suppression of heavy non-linear loads, and an IP23 enclosure with open cable entry on the bottom. The transformers shall be Siemens type 4GB5.

Three (3) delta-delta, 3-phase, 60Hz, 480/240V, 75 kVA transformers shall be provided and installed to step down voltage between the 480V sources and 240V laboratory loads. The transformers shall be Square-D, model EE75T6H.

One (1) delta-delta, 3-phase, 60Hz, 480/240V, 45 kVA transformer shall be provided and installed to step down voltage between the 480V sources and the 240V aft working deck receptacle panel. The transformer shall be a Square-D, model EE45T6H.


Three (3) delta-wye, 3-phase, 60Hz, 208/208Y-120V, 45 kVA transformers shall be provided and installed to provide isolation between the 208V sources and 208Y/120V laboratory loads. The transformers shall be Square-D, model EE45T211H.

250

255

260

265

270

275

280

One (1) delta-delta, single-phase, 60Hz, 480/220V, 7.5 kVA transformer shall be provided and installed to step down voltage between the 480V source and the 220V interior communications ICP system. The transformer shall be Square-D.

The transformer bank for the emergency switchboard 120V section shall be three (3) 15 kVA, single-phase, 480/120V, delta-delta, as provided by Siemens.

300.10 Propulsion Converter Transformers

See Section 235.

302 ELECTRIC MOTORS AND ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT

302.1 Motors

Motors of 1 horsepower and larger shall be suitable for operation on 480 VAC, 3-phase circuits unless otherwise specified. Three-phase motors shall be of the squirrel-cage induction type. Single-phase motors shall be high starting torque, capacitor start and shall operate satisfactorily on 120 VAC, 60Hz. Three-phase motors shall be NEMA Design B, unless the characteristic of the driven machine requires otherwise.

Multi-speed motors shall be variable torque unless otherwise specified. Locked-rotor and breakdown torques and locked-rotor current shall be as called for in the NEMA standards for the design involved.

All motors shall be equipped with anti-friction sealed bearings of suitable design to take the required thrust and radial loads. All motors shall be totally enclosed and fan cooled. Insulation shall have fungus inhibitors. Each motor shall be fitted with a nameplate of corrosion-resistant materials. Motors shall be designated as hostile environment motors having a 1.15 service factor, stainless steel shaft, Class F insulation or better and an epoxy coating on the case.

Motors for use on weather decks shall be watertight and shall be equipped with sealed insulation. The stator winding shall be insulated and varnish-treated to provide a “sealed insulation system.” The varnish shall be 100% volatile-free epoxy applied by vacuum pressure impregnation (VPI) cycles. Multiple VPI treatments may be necessary to fill voids that exist in the windings, and to bond parts together. If required, the wound component may be further treated to provide a protective coating to the surface of the windings. The sealed insulation system used in the construction of the motor shall be evaluated by a test laboratory in accordance with the short-time acceptance test procedure in IEEE 429. The insulation system shall seal the windings and connections against contaminants.


Enclosures of exterior motors shall be provided with heaters within the enclosures. Provisions shall be made to automatically disconnect the heaters when the motor is in operation.

285

290

295

300

305

310

315

Motors with aluminum frames shall not be used.

Passive insulation monitors shall be provided for motors for propulsion steering, seawater, and fresh-water services, and those motors in the weather subject to moisture condensation.

302.2 Motor Controllers

Motor controllers shall adhere to the requirements of UL Standard 508, Industrial Control Equipment (with Marine Supplement), and USCG regulation 46 CFR 111.70.

Individual controllers shall have the same characteristics and shall be designed to accommodate plug-in, combination starters with internal circuit breakers. They shall be rated for the maximum short circuit current available.

Controllers for single-speed, non-reversing motors of less than 3/4 horsepower may be of the manual across-the-line type. Controllers for all other motors shall be of the magnetic across-the-line type, unless momentary voltage drop at the ship service switchboard, with a single generator supplying power to the electrical system, requires a current limiting type starter. The maximum voltage dip criteria shall be 5% for a cyclical load, such as air or air-conditioning compressors, and 15% for any single motor. Solid-state reduced voltage starters shall be used on motors of 30 horsepower and greater. The solid state starter shall meet the requirements of the motor controllers, and have the following features:

• Adjustable current limit from 150% to 425%

• Solid-state overload relay with test feature

• Phase loss protection

• Shorted thyristor converter detection

• Thermal sensor thyristor converter protection

• Easily replaceable power poles

• Plug-in logic modules

• LED (light emitting diode) diagnostics

• Rugged modular construction

Combination type motor controllers shall be provided unless specifically approved otherwise. They shall include a non-fusible disconnect switch of the flange-operated, visible blade type, or other arrangement allowed by the regulatory bodies. The disconnect handle shall be lockable in the “OFF” position. There shall be a provision to open the controller door with the handle in the “ON” position by means of a defeater screw.


Variable-speed motor controllers shall be designed to meet the speed control requirements of their respective motors. All variable speed controllers shall be supplied with filtering circuits to minimize the effects of induced harmonics to the power system.

320

325

330

335

340

345

350

355

Controllers installed in interior locations shall have drip-proof enclosures. Controllers in weather or damp or corrosive environments shall have NEMA 4X enclosures. Controllers located in hazardous zones shall be explosion-proof.

All magnetic controllers shall be NEMA Size 0 or larger and sized to the horsepower rating of the motor. All controllers shall be capable of operating when inclined at an angle of 30 degrees from the vertical in any direction. All controllers shall be built by one manufacturer if possible.

All motor controllers shall utilize NEMA rated contactors. Starters shall have external manual overload reset, and have overload relays or ambient compensated bimetallic thermal overload relays.

Motor controllers shall have all pushbuttons, switches and indicator lights required for operation mounted on the face of the controller. Remote operating stations shall be provided where control from more than one location is required, when the motor starter cannot be located near the motor, or as required by other sections of the specifications or regulatory bodies.

Motor controllers shall have provisions to allow connection to, and operation from, the IMAC system where required by the regulatory bodies.

Low voltage protection shall be provided in all motor controllers, except those specifically required to be of the low voltage release type by the regulatory bodies.

Magnetic controllers that operate from a remote (automatic) 2-wire pilot device (pressure switch, etc.) shall be provided with the additional relay necessary to provide for low voltage protection. They shall be provided also with a local manual three-position selector switch for “Hand,” “Off” and “Automatic” operation. Generally, the local selector switch shall be arranged to spring return to “Off” from the “Hand” position.

When motor and control units cannot be mounted within sight of each other, the motor disconnect device shall be capable of being locked in the open position. Where no visual indication of equipment operation exists, such as for fans, controllers shall be provided with the necessary fused circuits for energizing “power on” indicating lights.

Individual control circuit transformers shall be provided operating at 115 VAC. Control transformers shall be fused on both primary and secondary windings.

Pushbutton and switch operators shall be watertight/oiltight (NEMA 4 and 13), momentary for LVP functions and maintained (selector switch) for LVR functions.

Indicator lights shall be transformer type with low voltage bulbs. They shall have a push-to-test feature and use glass or plastic lenses with integral color. Controllers with an


AUTO mode shall have blue indicator lights to indicate when the controller is in the AUTO setting. Green indicator lights shall be used to indicate when the motor is running.

All operators and indicators shall be labeled with nameplates that mount on the circumference of the device. Label plates shall be either engraved phenolic or metal and shall indicate the purpose, function, position or condition, as required. The controller shall have an external label that shall indicate the controller name, circuit number, motor horsepower, circuit breaker rating and overload rating.

360

365

370

375

380

385

390

A fire resistant control wiring diagram shall be installed inside the access door of each controller.

Controllers required to have stop stations and remote manual control shall have 115 VAC control circuits via integral control transformers.

Enclosures of exterior controllers, local control switches, and disconnect switches shall be provided with heaters within the enclosures. Provisions shall be made to automatically disconnect the heaters for controllers when the respective motors are in operation.

Each door for a space containing a combination motor starter unit shall have control operators and run indicator lights mounted in it as described. Unless otherwise specified, operating controls shall be mounted in the front of the enclosure and push-to-test motor running pilot lights (transformer type with low voltage bulbs) shall be provided. Run indicator lights shall be green for single-speed motors, and amber for low speed and green for high speed and for two-speed motors. Automatic controllers shall be provided with blue indicator lights for automatic control, and green for motor running on Hand-Off-Auto, heavy duty, oil-tight operators and indicator lights.

310 ELECTRIC GENERATING EQUIPMENT

310.1 Ship Service Diesel Generator Sets

See Section 233.

310.2 Emergency Generator Set

An emergency diesel generator shall be provided and installed. The emergency generator prime mover shall be a Caterpillar C-9 turbo-charged, 4-cycle diesel engine of sufficient power to drive a 163 kW (minimum) continuous-rated generator. The engine shall be radiator cooled. Electric jacket water heating system, battery derived starting and residential quality exhaust silencer shall be provided.

The engine shall be close-coupled to a 480 VAC, 3-phase, 60Hz generator, continuously rated for at least 163 kW output, at 1,800 RPM, with a 0.8 power factor. The generator shall additionally be rated for 10% overload operation for 2 hours every 24 hours.


The generator shall comply with the applicable requirements of the American Bureau of Shipping and U.S. Coast Guard, the recommendations of IEEE 45, NEMA MG-1, and/or the IEC.

The generator shall be equipped with a permanent magnet generator excitation system. Both the PMG and the rotating brushless exciter shall be mounted outboard of the bearing. The system shall supply a minimum short circuit supply of 300% of the rating for 10 seconds.

395

400

405

410

415

420

425

The voltage regulator shall be solid state with no voltage build-up relay or other relays acceptable. The unit shall be encapsulated for humidity and abrasion protection. The regulator shall include true volts per hertz operation with adjustable cut-in, loss of sensing continuity shutdown, overexcitation shutdown with inverse time characteristic and three-phase RMS sensing. The voltage regulator shall be factory wired and tested with the generator.

313 STORAGE BATTERIES AND CHARGING EQUIPMENT

Lead acid batteries shall be sealed, valve regulated, gas recumbent, maintenance free type. Battery charging equipment shall be in accordance with IEEE 45.

Batteries shall be provided, as well as storage racks, interconnecting wiring, transfer switches, chargers and monitoring instrumentation to make complete and fully operational battery systems as required herein and by the regulatory bodies.

Each battery charger shall be fitted with a regulated, constant voltage, automatic float charger, sized to maintain fully charged batteries and carry full load.

Battery chargers shall be LaMarche Manufacturing, Model A41, for standard usage, and A46 (w/ USCG accessories), for engine starting (emergency generator engine only), and shall be equipped with ground detection lights, float/equalize toggle switch, rheostat adjustments, DC voltmeter and ammeter. Output ripple shall be filtered to 1% of the rated output voltage.

314 POWER CONVERSION EQUIPMENT

Power conversion and battery/UPS systems shall be provided and installed as delineated below.

314.1 Uninterruptible Power

See Section 320, Pilothouse.

314.2 DC Power

Two (2) battery/charging systems shall be installed to provide 12 and 24 VDC power to equipment, that may require it, not covered elsewhere in these specifications. Batteries and chargers shall meet the requirements outlined in Section 313.


The 12 VDC system shall consist of, at minimum, one (1) battery charger, LaMarche model A41-20-12V (w/USCG options), one (1) 8D, heavy-duty, marine, deep-cycle 12V battery, Exide Nautilus type NG-8D, One (1) 18-pole distribution panel, with 60-amp mains rating at 48 VDC, Square-D class 1640, and two (2) Navy symbol no. 601, 8-circuit fuse distribution boxes (per MIL-HDBK-290). 430

435

440

445

450

455

460

The 24 VDC system shall consist of, at minimum, one (1) battery charger, LaMarche model A41-20-24V (w/USCG options), one (2) 8D, heavy-duty, marine, deep-cycle 12V batteries, Exide Nautilus type NG-8D, One (1) 18-pole distribution panel, with 60-amp mains rating at 48 VDC, Square-D class 1640, and two (2) Navy symbol no. 601, 8-circuit fuse distribution boxes (per MIL-HDBK-290).

The battery systems shall be sized to carry the entire respective load, including charging.

314.3 Emergency Diesel Starting

A 24V engine starting system with the configuration and battery capacity to comply with US Code of Federal Regulations 46 CFR shall be provided and installed. The control circuits shall monitor starting to prevent overcrank and to assure battery reserve capacity in accordance with regulations. The batteries shall be installed in a dedicated battery box(es) and firmly secured in a position where excessive movement is prevented.

Four (4) 8D, heavy-duty, marine, deep-cycle 12V batteries, Exide Nautilus type NG-8D shall be provided and installed in the emergency generator room for emergency diesel starting. One (1) battery charger, LaMarche A46-30-24V, with ABS/USCG accessories, and internal divider to charge two battery banks, shall be provided and installed to serve the emergency diesel starting batteries.

320 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRIC POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS

320.1 General

All electrical equipment and materials shall be of types suitable for the services intended and shall operate under all expected conditions of vibration and roll, pitch and trim as specified in Section 070. Generally, equipment shall be designed and installed to operate under the following conditions:

Equipment shall be manufactured to operate at ambient temperatures of 40°C in non-machinery spaces, and 50°C in machinery spaces.

In general, except where otherwise required by these specifications, the electrical installations shall be of non-watertight construction. Non-watertight boxes, cabinets and enclosing cases shall be of drip-proof construction and shall not have knockouts. Watertight plugs shall be of the pin protected type with a metal shell completely covering the pins.


Switches installed in motor circuits shall have an UL horsepower rating not less than the motor locked rotor rating.

Equipment shall operate such that when power is interrupted and restored, no damage will result to any component or part of the equipment. 465

470

475

480

485

490

495

All electrical equipment shall be protected or shielded to prevent the equipment from being damaged by exposure to oil, water or excessive heat. The equipment shall be flush mounted when installed in sheathing and ceilings, and the electric cables shall be concealed.

Electric machinery, equipment and wiring shall be located to ensure adequate natural cooling to avoid exceeding rated temperatures. Equipment designed on the basis of the standard 40°C or 50°C ambient temperatures shall require no special design considerations for short duration shut-down of ventilation systems.

Power consuming equipment shall operate as specified with a steady state voltage tolerance of ±5%, and with a frequency tolerance of ±3%.

Temporary voltage dips or frequency excursions during motor starting or vessel maneuvering shall not cause damage or interruption of service to equipment.

Waterproof metal enclosed equipment and impervious sheathed cables shall be used in all locations subject to condensation of vapors and in locations either temporarily or permanently exposed to the weather or subjected to routine washing down by hose. This shall particularly apply to equipment on open deck locations.

Rotating machinery shall be drip-proof protected at a minimum. Equivalent ingress protection (IP) rated enclosures may be used as allowed by the regulations.

All electrical equipment and wiring, including spare parts, shall be treated and otherwise suitably protected against corrosion, moisture, salt, mold or other destructive agents to which they may be exposed under adverse climatic conditions during normal operation in either arctic or tropical areas.

The frames or cases of all permanently installed generators, motors, controllers and instruments for which the arrangement and method of installation does not assure positive grounding, shall be permanently grounded through grounding straps.

All electrical equipment requiring external wiring shall be provided with suitable terminal boards or blocks equipped with solderless terminals to which the Contractor shall make all necessary connections.

Electrical equipment and cabling located in hazardous zones (see USCG Regulation 46 CFR 111.105 and NVIC 2-89) shall be appropriately rated in accordance with the NEC (NFPA 70) and USCG Regulations 46 CFR 111.105.


Circuit breakers shall adhere to the requirements of UL Standard 489, Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches and Circuit-Breaker Enclosures (with marine supplement), and USCG regulation 46 CFR 111.54. Circuit breakers shall be rated for 50°C in the machinery spaces and galley and 40°C elsewhere, but shall comply with UL Standard 489, including the marine supplement, in all other respects. Electric circuits in general shall be protected as required by the regulatory agencies.

500

505

510

515

520

525

530

320.2 Laboratory Power System

Electrical service for each lab shall include:

• 120 VAC, single phase (receptacle strips).

• 240 VAC, 3-phase, 50 amps, (2 receptacles).

• 208 VAC, 3-phase, 50 amps, (2 receptacles).

Separate panelboards shall be provided for each laboratory. Panelboards shall be of the ratings and configurations indicated on the electrical one-line diagram, Square-D type NQ. Each laboratory shall be fed from an individual isolation transformer. Transformers are described in Section 300.9. Panelboards shall have approximately 50% spare capacity. (Spare provided shall be for circuit capacity, panel feeder size, and isolation transformer rating only).

Receptacle strips shall be provided and installed in each laboratory. The receptacle strips shall consist of 6' raceway units with single, 20-amp receptacles spaced 12" apart. These receptacle strips shall be mounted along the perimeter of each laboratory in rows of two (one atop the other), each strip a dedicated 20-amp circuit. Receptacle strips within 6' of sinks, or wet areas, shall be provided with GFCI protection, either at the strip, or the circuit breaker. Receptacle strips shall also be installed in the overhead of the main laboratory, between the rows of lights, to provide a flexible general-coverage arrangement for any main laboratory configuration. Receptacle circuits shall be fed from a dedicated power panel(s) located within the laboratory served. The strips shall be Hubbell model HBL24GB612GY. The receptacles mounted in the overhead shall be of the twist-lock type.

Two duplex receptacles shall be provided in each electronic equipment rack. Two duplex receptacles shall be provided near the space reservation for electronic equipment racks in the pilothouse and computer laboratory. Each pair of receptacles shall be fed by a 15 amp circuit breaker.

Four unassigned duplex receptacles shall be provided in the pilothouse and fed by a 15 amp circuit breaker.

Electronic equipment rack and pilothouse receptacles shall be rated for 15 amps, 125V, with NEMA 5-15R configuration. Enclosures shall meet the requirements of 46 CFR 111.81. The receptacles shall be Pauluhn 27 Series.


320.3 Science Van Receptacles

Van power requirements shall be provided as illustrated on the drawings. UNOLS standard vans will be provided (by others) for temporary installation on the vessel when required for science operations. Supplied with the vans is a length of cable with a plug matching the van receptacle on one end and wires prepared to attach a ship’s plug on the other. The Contractor shall provide and install two (2) watertight receptacles, with integrated circuit breakers, adjacent to the science van location. The receptacles shall be RussellStoll models DBRS640406000 (480V) and DBRS630706000 (208/120V). NEMA 4X-rated backboxes shall be provided and installed as required. Four (4) mating plugs, RussellStoll models DS6404MP0000 (480V) and DS6307MP0000 (208/120V), shall be provided to the Owner.

535

540

545

550

555

560

565

570

320.4 Uninterruptible Power System

Uninterruptible power supplies (UPSs), with 15-minute capacities (or as required by the regulatory agencies), shall be provided and installed for the following systems:

• Closed Circuit TV System

• Winch Monitoring System

• Satellite Communications System

UPSs shall employ IGBT PWM inverters, input harmonic elimination filters, and microprocessor controls. Means shall be provided to monitor the UPS status within the IMAC system. Voltage regulation shall be ~±1% steady state, and ~±6% for a 100% step load. Voltage recovery time shall be ~16.6ms (one cycle). Voltage distortion shall be ~1%THD for linear loads, <3.5%THD for non-linear loads. The batteries shall be firmly secured in a position where excessive movement is prevented during ice-transiting operations. UPSs shall be MGE UPS Systems, Comet, Galaxy PW, and/or Galaxy 3000 models.

UPSs/back-up battery systems required for other navigation, interior and exterior communications, and machinery equipment shall be provided by the equipment manufacturer. These include the IMAC system, engine control system (integrated in the main 480V switchboard), integrated bridge system (including ECDIS), and the propulsion control systems.

320.5 Science Wireways

Two (2) separate, dedicated cableways, one for short-term cable installations, and one for permanent runs, shall be installed to serve scientific requirements. The cableways shall be separated as far as practicable from main power cableways. These cableways shall be steel or fiberglass, and of open construction, and be not less than 6 inches deep and 4 inches wide. Provision for the easy installation and removal of temporary cabling shall be made. Watertight multi-cable transits (MCTs), Roxtec, shall be installed in fire-rated and/or watertight bulkheads and decks serving the cableways. MCT sizes shall be determined by the Contractor, and incorporate a 50% spare capacity.


The cableways shall interconnect science and instrumentation locations, laboratories, van sites, ET Shop, working deck, transducer tube(s), scientific seachest, transducer locations, forward mast, uncontaminated seawater intake location, winches, main mast, staterooms, messroom, and pilothouse.

575

320.6 Ship Service Power System

General Power Receptacles

A minimum of three ship service 120 VAC duplex receptacles shall be provided in each space and passage (except for lockers). 580

585

590

595

In machinery spaces, receptacles shall be located to reach any part of the machinery spaces with a 15m (50') extension cord.

In the workshop and ET shop, receptacles shall be located approx every 4 feet in convenient locations. Workbench receptacle circuits shall be provided with a cut-off switch at the workbench. Receptacles shall be rated for 15 amps, 125V, with NEMA 5-15R configuration. Enclosures shall meet the requirements of 46 CFR 111.81. The receptacles shall be Pauluhn 27 Series.

On the weather decks and aft working deck, receptacles shall be located to reach any part of the deck using a 15m (50') extension cord, and shall be switched. Six (6) 30-amp, 480V and eight (8) 50-amp, 240V switched receptacles shall be provided on the working deck. 480V receptacles shall be RussellStoll model DBRS340403000, with model DS3404MP000. 240V receptacles shall be RussellStoll model DBRS630706000, with Model DS6307MP000. The Contractor shall provide and install the receptacles in locations approved by the Owner, and shall provide the plugs to the Owner.

Power distribution panelboards serving the weather decks shall be located in interior spaces.

Shore Power Arrangement

Two (2) dead front, interlocked, 480V, 3-phase, 400 amp, receptacles shall be provided for shore power as determined by the maximum load from the in-port load condition shown in the required load analysis plus a 20% growth margin. Receptacles shall be watertight, and shall be arranged as shown on the plans. A control switch and a white pilot light to indicate circuit energized and labeled POWER ON shall be included.

600

605

Shore power circuit breakers shall be of the current limiting molded case type.

Each shore connection shall contain a 400 amp circuit breaker, shore power available light and automatic phase sequence relay and meter. Shore power voltmeter, ammeter and synchronizing equipment shall be provided on the 480V distribution switchboard to allow parallel operation of the two shore power connections. Two shore power cables with appropriate terminations shall be provided, with a stowage locker and cable reels, adjacent to the shore power station. Each cable shall consist of a mating plug, for the vessel’s shore


power receptacle, with a 100-foot length of THOF-500 cable, lugged for the shore connection at the free end.

610

615

620

625

630

635

640

A shore power indicator lamp shall be provided on the shore power tie.

Shore power emergency disconnect pushbuttons shall be provided at the shore power station and in the MCS. These pushbuttons shall trip the shore power circuit breakers.

A grounding lug shall be provided at the shore power station for the purpose of grounding the vessel while in drydock.

324 SWITCHBOARDS AND PANELS FOR ELECTRIC POWER AND LIGHTING

324.1 Switchboards

Switchboards shall be constructed, configured and located in accordance with the requirements outlined in IEEE 45-2002, Clause 8 and/or IEC 60092-302, and ABS Rules.

In the general design and arrangement of the switchboards, particular attention shall be given to the equipment’s overall dimensions to ensure an installation with adequate overhead clearances and deck space.

The equipment shall be designed for continuous operation at the maximum ambient temperature to which the equipment and/or any part is exposed. All parts and sub-assemblies that could require servicing, repair or replacement during the life of the equipment shall be accessible.

Potential transformers shall be used for indicators, instruments, meters and relays connected to AC circuits over 230 volts. Transformers for voltage regulators shall not be used for other purposes.

The switchboard metering shall be sized and positioned for an unobstructed view. The scales shall be of a range such that the normal value reading shall appear between 1/2 and 3/4 scale. The accuracy of all instruments and the precision of the scale graduation shall be within 1% of full scale.

The switchboard shall be designed and built to provide ready front access for inspection, maintenance and repair, and shall include hinged panels with door stops and holding devices to secure them in the open position.

Smooth non-conductive hand rails shall be mounted on the front of the switchboards. The rails shall be attached in such a manner that panels can be removed or opened without rail removal, and they shall not extend more than 4 inches from the surface of the switchboard. The switchboards shall be provided with drip shields extending at least 4 inches from the top edge.


Switchboard lighting shall be provided that adequately illuminates the switchboard without excessive glare. The lighting shall consist of a row of fluorescent lamps with lenses that are mounted integral to the drip shields and extend the full length of the switchboard. The fixtures shall be connected to emergency, battery-powered ballasts.

645

650

655

660

665

670

All indicator/pilot lights in the switchboards shall be provided with momentary push-to-test capability.

Cables entering the switchboard near the top of the switchboard shall enter the rear panel beneath the drip shield. A drip loop shall be provided in each cable in way of the penetration to the switchboard.

The generator and switchboard main distribution buses shall be provided with vacuum, air, and/or molded case circuit breakers of the quantity, frame size, interrupting capacity and trip element ratings indicated on the drawings. Fuse protection shall be restricted to instrumentation and very low current devices.

Air circuit breakers, if used, shall be separated by horizontal metal partitions from instrumentation and control equipment within the same section.

All bus work shall be hard drawn, commercially pure copper with the bars and connections provided with silver surfaced contacts. The bars and fastenings shall be braced to withstand the maximum available short circuit current as determined by the fault current analysis.

The switchboard distribution sections shall be designed and sized for at least 10% future expansion in capacity. Positions within the switchboard designated for future breakers shall include fully insulated and braced connections and all other parts/features necessary to accept the breakers. At least one spare breaker of each frame size less than 400 amps shall be provided in the switchboard.

Where space is provided for the future installation of a circuit breaker, it shall be complete in all respects with the exception of the circuit breaker and lugs. All necessary circuit breaker studs and mounting hardware shall be provided. The front panel shall be cut out and fitted with a suitable cover plate.

Switchboards, including the emergency switchboard, shall be provided by the same manufacturer.

480V Propulsion/Ship Service Switchboard

Generator control and 480V power distribution shall be integrated into a multi-section propulsion/ship service switchboard. The switchboard shall include the generator electronic control draw-out circuit breakers, bus tie arrangements and appropriate circuit breakers for propulsion drives, bow thruster, 480V ship service loads, 208Y/120V supply transformers and large power science deck gear. Needed instrumentation and controls (power management system) for local operation and connections for remote operation, both manual and automatic, shall be provided to meet ABS ACCU Rules. The

675

680


switchboard shall be constructed to withstand a peak short-circuit current of at least 165kA. The 480V propulsion/ship service switchboard configuration shall be as illustrated on the drawings and shall be as provided by Siemens.

This switchboard shall be provided with the required interfaces with the IMAC system (see Section 436).

685

Governor System

One independent isochronous load sharing network; e.g., Woodward 723, shall be supplied for each generator set. The digital control system shall be mounted in accordance with manufacturer’s specifications. Each system shall be capable of controlling a mating actuator, located on its corresponding engine and part of each diesel-generator set. All governor systems shall be configured to work as a network suitable for load sharing capabilities. In addition, there shall be a battery back-up system for the governor network in accordance with the regulations and IEEE 45-2002, Clause 31.4. The governor system shall provide the following capabilities:

690

695

• Bus frequency maintained within selectable limits through transient loads.

• Automatic balanced load sharing, with all combinations of online SSDGs.

• Soft load and unload of SSDGs, when taking SSDGs on and off line.

• Start/stop of SSDGs at low idle for checkout and maintenance.

Generating Plant Power Management System (PMS) 700

705

710

715

An integrated power management system shall be supplied for the generating plant and associated switchboard. This system shall be integrated such that it functions as a whole. The PMS shall be provided with two, redundant UPSs, with one-hour capacity at full-rated power. The redundant UPSs shall be configured so that, should one fail for any reason, the other assumes the PMS load. These UPSs shall be separate from the generator control system UPS.

Alarm and monitoring of the diesel generators shall be by serial link to the IMAC system. Power management related functions shall be by discrete I/O. Primary control and emergency shutdowns are integral to the generator control system, and shall not be compromised by the PMS.

One independent Siemens power management system, Siemens PMA 300, shall be supplied for each of the following:

• Each main generator panel (3 total)

• The 480V switchgear bus (includes bus-tie and main consumers on bus)

These individual systems shall be composed of the following:

• Siemens GENOP 71, generator protection and synchronization unit. • Siemens PMA 300, diesel control unit (main generator panels only)


• Siemens MP370 Touch Screen, operating panel • Siemens Simatic S7-315, programmable logic controller (PLC) • Isolating converter 24VDC/24VDC 720

725

730

735

740

745

750

Each system shall have the following capabilities:

• Diesel engine monitoring, control and protection as follows:

o Local, semi-automatic and automatic starting mode selection

o Automatic/manual start of engine (relay output), wire breakage monitored

o Automatic/manual stop of engine (relay output), wire breakage monitored

o Permissive interlock for allowing local engine starting

• Alternator control and protection as follows:

o Monitoring, display and alarm for all vital alternator functions

o Monitoring of overload

o Monitoring of over/under voltage

o Monitoring of over/under frequency

o Fault diagnosis indicated on operator panel

o Short circuit protection

o Overcurrent protection (delay to be greater than load shedding feature time delay)

o Reverse power protection

o Automatic synchronizing of the generators to the bus

• Power management functions shall be as follows:

o Automatic blackout start of standby generator

o Fault dependent starting of generator sets

o Synchronizing and closing of bus tie breakers

o Synchronizing and closing of shore power tie breakers, including interlock of phase rotation (bumpless power transfer)

o Dynamic power limit propulsion motor load in case of generator overload

o Load shedding in three stages of Owner-approved loads, on the low voltage switchgear, in the case of generator overload (delays to be less than generator overcurrent protection feature time delay)

o Sequential restart of shed loads.

• There shall be a power management system override function, which allows select system controls to be disabled


• System overview- main picture with generators, auxiliary engines and generator breakers

• Selection of system "semi-auto" or "auto" functionality

• Manual starting/stopping of auxiliary engines

• Manual closing/tripping of generator breakers (automatic synchronizing) 755

760

765

• Selection of auxiliary engine standby sequence

• In "automatic mode": disable automatic stop of generator on low load

• In "automatic mode": disable standby start of generator on high load

• Reading of main values (active power, reactive power, power factor, current, voltage, frequency)

• High/low voltage alarms also with digital output

• High/low frequency alarms also with digital output

• Generator breaker trip - overcurrent, reverse power, short circuit

• Load sharing faults - active power, reactive power, current

• Diesel shutdown common alarm

• Diesel start/stop fault alarms

• Diesel delayed shutdown/change over alarm from alarm system

• System alarms, general alarm also with digital outputs

Interface with Vessel Control Systems

The generating plant power management system shall provide all monitoring, alarm and control functions required by the regulations of the generating plant and main switchboards to other vessel monitoring, alarm and control systems.

770

775

780

Generator start/stop, bus tie and circuit breaker control functions shall be available through the vessel IMAC system. Any override of the generating plant power management system shall initiate a signal to the IMAC system as an alarm indication.

The generator power management system shall provide “power limiting” communications with the vessel’s propulsion control system. In the event that the propulsion power requested by the throttle control or the dynamic positioning system exceeds the power available from the generating plant, the following shall take place:

• A “power limiting” signal shall be sent directly to the thruster control system (Siemens Propulsion Control System).

• Power to the propulsion drive(s) shall be limited based on available power and load on the bus.


• Power limitation shall be smooth and continuous, such that the limitation shall be directly proportional to the power requested. 785

• Power limitation shall not prevent a single thruster, or combination of less than all thrusters, from obtaining full power assuming the power is available.

• A “Power Limit” indication shall be displayed at all propulsion control stations.

Ship Service 208Y/120V Switchboard Section

The 208Y/120V ship service power distribution system shall be supplied from a 3-phase, 4-wire switchboard. The switchboard shall meet all pertinent requirements of the U.S. Coast Guard, ABS and the general requirements outlined above. Molded case circuit breakers, with appropriate trip settings and short circuit capacities to power the loads shown on the drawings shall be provided.

790

795

800

805

810

815

This switchboard shall require interface with the IMAC system, Section 436.

The 208Y/120V switchboard shall be as provided by Siemens.

324.2 Distribution Panelboards

Power distribution panelboards shall be provided for auxiliary systems, ventilation and heaters, galley equipment, hotel services, power receptacles and lighting as required. The lighting and power distribution panelboards shall consist of thermal-magnetic circuit breakers assembled into a single interior unit which shall be mounted in a sheet-steel enclosure consisting of a box and front designed to be mounted on a bulkhead. In spaces which are lined, the panelboards shall be flush mounted. The panelboards shall be of the dead-front type.

Panelboards shall be in accordance with UL Standard 67, including the Marine Supplement. There shall be no knockouts.

Each panel shall have a door with latch. All panelboards shall be drip-proof. The panel name shall be stenciled inside as well as outside each box. Pockets shall be provided in each unit for circuit cards, printed with circuit designations and service.

All bus bars shall be made of hard-drawn commercially pure copper, and shall be sized according to the IEEE standards for panelboards. Buses shall be arranged to maintain sequence phasing throughout; that is, adjacent poles shall be of unlike polarity and rotated in sequence. Panelboards shall be provided with main-lug-only (MLO) bus configurations unless otherwise noted. Dual-voltage panelboards shall be provided with a neutral bus.

All panelboards shall have 10% spare breakers or two each, whichever is greater. Spare circuit breakers shall be sized equal to the most common size in the panel.

Panelboards rated up to 240V shall be Square-D, type NQOD, with 200% neutral busses (where required).


The 480V panelboards shall be Square-D, type I-Line.

324.3 Automatic Transfer Switches 820

825

830

835

840

845

850

Automatic transfer switches (ATSs) shall be provided for the emergency switchboard and IMAC power feeds at the rating indicated on the drawings. The ATSs shall conform to the requirements of UL1008, Standard for Automatic Transfer Switches.

The ATSs shall be provided with a microprocessor controller with membrane interface panel, be capable of adjustable voltage and frequency sensing, and have provisions for connecting to the IMAC system to monitor ATS functions.

The voltage of each phase of the normal source shall be monitored, with pickup adjustable to 95% of nominal and dropout adjustable from 70% to 90% of pickup setting. Single-phase voltage and frequency sensing of the emergency source shall be provided.

An adjustable time delay shall be provided to override momentary normal source outages and delay all transfer and engine starting signals. An adjustable time delay shall be provided on transfer to emergency, adjustable from 0 to 5 minutes for controlled timing of transfer of loads to emergency. An adjustable time delay shall be provided on retransfer to normal, adjustable to 30 minutes. Time delay shall be automatically bypassed if emergency source fails and normal source is acceptable. A 5-minute cool down time delay shall be provided on shutdown of engine generator. All adjustable time delays shall be field adjustable without the use of tools.

An in-phase monitor shall be provided to control transfer so that motor inrush currents do not exceed normal starting currents. The in-phase monitor shall not require external control of power circuits.

The ATSs shall be ASCO Power Technologies, Series 300.

331 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR LIGHTING SYSTEMS

All lighting and convenience receptacle systems (except the searchlights) shall be powered with 120VAC, 60Hz, 1-phase via distribution panelboards located throughout the vessel. High lighting levels shall be provided in all interior spaces of the vessel. Lighting levels shall generally meet the values given in IESNA Publication RP-12, Recommended Practice for Marine Lighting. Also see Section 332.

General lighting and emergency lighting with transitional-power battery units, as required by the regulations, shall be provided and installed. The general lighting fixtures shall be fluorescent, 2x35W, Pauluhn Cat. Type No. FPS235 or FSP260, for the open overheads and Pauluhn Cat. Type No. FRD232, for the finished (suspended) overheads. The emergency lighting with transitional-power battery units shall be fluorescent 2x35W, Pauluhn Cat. Type No. FPS235EM or FSP260 for the open overheads and Pauluhn Cat. Type No. FRD232EM for the finished (suspended) overheads.


Fluorescent lighting fixtures with one (1) red tube, configured to allow switching for night lighting, shall be provided. Generally, red lighting shall be provided in the approaches to the pilothouse, to accustom the eye for night vision. Three-position toggle switches, indicating ON-OFF-RED, Pauluhn Cat. No. 862BHD2OP, shall be provided and installed to control the red lighting.

855

860

865

870

875

880

885

890

All fluorescent lighting (including the transitional fixtures and “exit” lights) shall be supplied with appropriate electronic ballasts to assist in reducing harmonics.

Compact fluorescent or incandescent lighting fixtures shall be provided and installed as required around the perimeter of the weather decks to provide general night lighting. Exterior fixtures shall be flush-mount style, Pauluhn Cat. No. F729BF. Exterior lights that could cause interference with navigating the vessel shall be controlled by switches located in the pilothouse.

Compact fluorescent or incandescent explosion-proof lighting fixtures shall be provided and installed in the hazardous materials lockers. Explosion-proof, compact fluorescent fixtures shall be 32W, Pauluhn Cat. No. FEPC31B-32.

Watertight metal-halide floodlights shall be provided and installed to illuminate the working deck areas (including the mooring stations). General working deck floodlights shall be 400W, medium flood, Pauluhn Cat. No. NHIDHS4IB. Deck floodlights shall be connected to the pilothouse lighting panel. Floodlight circuit breakers shall be switch-rated.

Detail lighting such as desk, berth, and mirror lights shall be provided and installed in all staterooms. Desk lighting shall be fluorescent, 2x15W, Pauluhn Cat. No. FE215CV/2, with convenience outlet; berth and mirror lighting shall be fluorescent, 1x17W, Pauluhn Cat. No. FBL117, with convenience outlet.

Lighting fixtures shall be provided and installed in toilet/shower units. The fixtures shall be fluorescent, recessed, 2x17W, designed for damp/wet locations, Pauluhn Cat. No. FS217J.

Emergency exit lights shall be installed at all required escape route doors and other areas as required by the regulations. Exit lights shall be fluorescent, 2x8W, surface mounted (vertically or horizontally), Pauluhn Cat. No. F1703EM (with emergency ballast). Emergency exit lights shall be connected to the emergency power system.

Floodlights, to illuminate the life raft and rescue boat stations, and the water area below them, shall be provided and installed per the regulations. Survival craft floodlights shall be 500W halogen, stainless steel enclosure, Pauluhn Cat. No. QS1605. These floodlights shall be connected to the navigation bridge lighting panel. Floodlight circuit breakers shall be switch-rated.

Convenience receptacles shall be provided in the accommodations, work spaces, science support spaces (i.e., offices and workshops), storerooms, and machinery spaces in accordance with USCG regulation 46 CFR 111.79 and Section 320. Convenience


receptacles shall be rated for 15 amps, 125V, with NEMA 5-15R configuration. Enclosures shall meet the requirements of 46 CFR 111.81. Convenience receptacles in interior spaces shall be Pauluhn 27 Series. Convenience receptacles in wet spaces, as defined in 46 CFR 110.15, Locations Requiring an Exceptional Degree of Protection, shall be provided with weatherproof or watertight enclosures, Pauluhn 24, 25 or 26 Series (mating plugs required to maintain the receptacle watertight integrity shall be provided and installed on appliances intended for use in the affected spaces; i.e., portable food processors in the galley). Receptacles in wet spaces shall be provided with GFCI protection, either within the receptacle or at the circuit breaker.

895

900

905

910

Light switches (same Pauluhn Series as receptacles, depending on space environmental requirements) shall be provided and installed inside the space, near each door entering the space. Light switches for hazardous material lockers shall be explosion-proof, Pauluhn model EPCS.

Connection boxes, cabling and all required accessories shall be provided and installed to make a complete, operational lighting system.

332 ILLUMINATION REQUIREMENTS

332.1 General

Lighting shall be provided to maintain the foot-candle values specified in IESNA Publication No. RP-12, except as delineated below.

332.2 Special Illumination

Laboratory Lighting

Laboratories shall be provided with 100 foot-candles of light. Storerooms shall be provided with 70 foot-candles of general lighting.

915

Working Deck Lighting

The working decks shall be provided with 70 foot-candles of light. The deck area under the A-frame shall be provided with 70 foot-candles of light.

Weather Deck (other than Working Deck) Lighting 920

The weather deck shall be provided with 10 foot-candles of light.

Water Surface Lighting

70 foot-candles of light shall be provided along the waterline of the vessel, arranged to eliminate shadows against the hull.


Navigation Spaces 925

930

The pilothouse and all adjacent spaces shall be equipped with red illumination in addition to the standard fluorescent fixtures for use at night. Red illumination shall be switched outside each interior entrance. Chart table lamps shall be equipped with adjustable red lens. Emergency light fixtures in the pilothouse shall not be equipped with emergency battery ballasts.


SECTION 400 COMMAND AND CONTROL

TABLE OF CONTENTS

405 ANTENNAS.................................................................................................................................1 405.1 General..........................................................................................................................................1 405.2 S- and X-Band Radar ....................................................................................................................1 405.3 Communications Antennas ...........................................................................................................1 407 ELECTROMAGNETIC ENVIRONMENTAL EFFECTS (E3) ............................................3 420 DYNAMIC POSITIONING SYSTEM (DPS) AND AUTOPILOT........................................4 420.1 General..........................................................................................................................................4 420.2 Manual Mode ................................................................................................................................6 420.3 Autopilot Mode.............................................................................................................................6 420.4 Automatic Control Mode ..............................................................................................................6 421 NON-ELECTRICAL AND NON-ELECTRONIC NAVIGATION AIDS.............................7 422 NAVIGATION LIGHTS, SIGNAL LIGHTS, AND SEARCH LIGHTS ..............................8 422.1 Introduction...................................................................................................................................8 422.2 Whistle Light ................................................................................................................................8 422.3 Searchlights...................................................................................................................................8 423 ELECTRONIC NAVIGATION SYSTEMS.............................................................................8 423.1 Differential GPS Systems (DGPS)................................................................................................9 423.2 Gyrocompass.................................................................................................................................9 423.3 Voyage Data Recorder (VDR) ......................................................................................................9 423.4 Sound Signal Equipment.............................................................................................................11 423.5 Sound Reception System ............................................................................................................11 424 ELECTRONIC NAVIGATION SYSTEMS, ACOUSTICAL...............................................11 424.1 Ship Depth Finding .....................................................................................................................11 424.2 Speed Log System.......................................................................................................................12 424.3 Sonar Transducers (Including Scientific)....................................................................................12 426 SCIENTIFIC ELECTRONIC SYSTEMS (SES) ...................................................................13 432 TELEPHONE SYSTEMS ........................................................................................................14 432.1 Sound Powered Telephone System.............................................................................................14 432.2 Engineering Circuit (2JV)...........................................................................................................14 432.3 Science Circuit (7JV) ..................................................................................................................15 432.4 Fueling Circuit (3JV) ..................................................................................................................15 432.5 Dial Telephone System ...............................................................................................................16 433 PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM.................................................................................................17 434 ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM................................................................................................20 436 ELECTRICAL ALARM, SAFETY, AND WARNING SYSTEMS .....................................20 436.1 Integrated Machinery Alarm & Control (IMAC) System ...........................................................20 436.2 Fire Alarm Systems.....................................................................................................................36 436.3 In-Port Alarm and Monitoring System........................................................................................37 436.4 Machinery Ventilation Shutdown System...................................................................................37 436.5 Rudder and Thruster Angle Indicator Systems ...........................................................................38 436.6 Tank Level Monitoring System ..................................................................................................38 436.7 Bilge High Level Alarms ............................................................................................................39 436.8 Audible and Visual Indicators.....................................................................................................39 437 AUTOMATIC IDENTIFICATION SYSTEM.......................................................................39


438 INTEGRATED BRIDGE SYSTEM........................................................................................40 438.1 General........................................................................................................................................40 438.2 Main Navigation Station .............................................................................................................40 438.3 Aft Control Station......................................................................................................................41 438.4 Bridge Wing Consoles ................................................................................................................41 439 CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION SYSTEM (CCTV)........................................................41 439.1 Cameras and Equipment .............................................................................................................42 441 EXTERIOR COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS ......................................................................43 441.2 General........................................................................................................................................43 441.3 GMDSS.......................................................................................................................................43 441.4 Radio Equipment ........................................................................................................................44 451 SURFACE SEARCH RADARS...............................................................................................44 451.1 General........................................................................................................................................44 451.2 ECDIS.........................................................................................................................................45 493 SCIENTIFIC INFORMATION SYSTEM (SIS)....................................................................46 493.1 General........................................................................................................................................46 493.2 Video/Audio Network.................................................................................................................47 494 METROLOGICAL REQUIREMENTS.................................................................................47

Page 400-ii Regional Class Research Vessel 12 November 2008 Contractor’s Ship Specifications, Rev. B DI-001_Specs\Outline Specifications\Rev B\400b.doc

SECTION 400 COMMAND AND CONTROL

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

405 ANTENNAS

405.1 General

A complete system of receiving and receive/transmit antennas shall be provided for all communications and navigation equipment. The antennas shall be installed in accordance with a location plan developed to minimize interference effects. The Contractor shall adhere to the EMI requirements outlined in Section 407. All relevant vendors and the integrated bridge system (IBS) supplier shall be consulted to ensure integration and compatibility of all systems.

405.2 S- and X-Band Radar

The S- and X-Band radar units shall be positioned so there is a minimum height separation of one meter and a glaring angle difference of not more than 45 degrees with respect to each other. The more efficient, long range operation, S-Band unit shall be mounted in the higher position. Additional installation requirements include:

• The length of the waveguide or coaxial cable from scanner to transceiver shall not exceed 30 meters.

• The scanner shall be installed so that the center is at least one meter away from any magnetic compass.

• Any support or other obstacles shall be clear of the rotation of the antenna. (See specific antenna outline drawing for rotational radius.)

• The scanner unit shall not be mounted close to an active funnel, as this may result in excessive corrosion of the scanner.

• The lower edge of the antenna shall be a minimum of 500 mm above the safety rail.

A service platform shall be provided for safe service access.

405.3 Communications Antennas

The main antenna for the Single Side Band (SSB) shall be mounted in as clear an area as possible, away from flat obstructions and at least 3 meters from any round obstructions.

The MF/HF receive antenna shall be at least 6 to 8 meters away from the transmitting antenna.

The weather fax antenna shall also be around 6 to 8 meters from the transmitting antenna.

The VHF antennas shall also be around 6 meters from the SSB antennas, with at least a 2 meter separation.


The Navtex antenna shall be greater than 6 meters from the SSB transmitting antenna and greater than 2 meters from other antennas.

The Sat C antenna shall be mounted as high as possible with as clear a 360-degree view as possible. The antenna shall be out of the radar beam, preferably above it. The antenna shall be free of obstructions down to 15 degrees below the horizon. Distance to HF antennas shall be greater than 5 meters, distance to VHF antennas greater than 4 meters, distance to magnetic compass greater than 3 meters.

40

45

50

55

60

65

70

75

The Sat B antenna shall be as high as practical. Any cylindrical obstacle of 0.15 meter must be at least 3 meters away. A cylindrical obstacle greater than 0.15 meter must be greater than 3 meters away. The antenna shall be at least 10 degrees outside the radar beam.

The GPS smart antenna shall be mounted with a relative clear view of the horizon. The antenna shall not be mounted on top of a very tall mast, as this may degrade the COG and SOG calculations, particularly when in DGPS mode. The antenna shall be placed outside the beam path of transmitting radar (typically +15 degrees horizontally from the array’s center point) and INMARSAT satcom (A, B, C or M – typically +10 degrees from the array’s center point in any of the possible transmitting directions and at least 5 meters from any side lobe or back lobe direction). The GPS antenna shall be mounted below and at least 5 meters away from these types of antennas. It shall not be placed within 3 meters of a SSB or VHF radio or their antennas.

AIS transponder antennas: The GPS antenna shall be mounted with a relative clear view of the horizon. The antenna shall be placed outside the beam path of transmitting radar (typically ±15 degrees horizontally from the array’s center point) and INMARSAT satcom equipment (A, B, C or M – typically ±10 degrees from the array’s center point in any of the possible transmitting directions). The GPS antenna shall be mounted below and at least 5 meters away from these types of antennas. It shall not be placed within 3 meters of a HF or VHF radio or their antennas.

The AIS transponders are using frequencies on the high side of the marine mobile band (AIS1 = 161.975 MHz, AIS2 = 162.025MHz). The AIS1 and AIS2 frequencies are close to the duplex channels used for marine communication. The AIS VHF antenna shall be separated as much as possible from the voice VHF installations used for the main communication to avoid unnecessary interference. Best separation is achieved by installing the antennas over each other or on separate sides of the mast.

The VHF antenna shall be mounted at least 3 meters away from and out of the transmitting beam of high-power transmitters or other VHF antenna installations. The AIS VHF antenna shall be mounted with a relative clear view of the horizon. Large obstructions might shade the AIS radio communication in certain directions. The AIS is using VHF radio frequencies, the propagation of which is close to the line of sight; the higher the antenna location, the longer the range.


407 ELECTROMAGNETIC ENVIRONMENTAL EFFECTS (E3)

The ship and science systems shall be electromagnetically compatible.

Radiators and receptors of electromagnetic energy and related electronics on the vessel shall be designed and installed to ensure electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) and to avoid hazards from electromagnetic radiation to personnel. Personnel at or en route to normal operating stations, including the forward observation lab, shall not be exposed to electromagnetic energy in excess of the limits established in IEEE C95.1, IEEE Standard for Safety Levels with Respect to Human Exposure to Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Fields, 3 kHz to 300 GHz.

80

85

90

95

100

105

110

All HF transmit antennas shall be installed with non-metallic personnel guards located so as to provide a minimum distance of 1200mm horizontal and 2400mm vertical separation from any working areas, manned stations and personnel access areas. All areas within this region shall be designated as hazard areas, by painting the deck, and provided with warning signs in accordance with IEEE C95.2, IEEE Standard for Radio Frequency Energy and Current Flow Symbols. Areas outside this region that violate the safe levels as defined in IEEE C95.1 shall be identified as personnel “no loiter areas.” Warning signs shall be provided to designate no loiter areas.

Automated control systems, communication systems and scientific electronic systems shall not respond spuriously to electromagnetic interference (EMI) from radiating sources or transients on power lines. Cables interconnecting power equipment items that utilize solid-state high frequency switching devices and cables that carry high amplitude pulses shall be physically separated from more sensitive cables whose signal data would be distorted by induced interference. Table 400-1 provides minimum required cable separation distances. Cableway crossings shall be as nearly perpendicular as practical with maximum practical separation. Cables shall be routed within the vessel structure and protected from electromagnetic radiation from on-ship transmitting antennas to the maximum extent practicable. All transducer cabling shall be shielded.

Cables routed in topside areas exposed to the weather shall be shielded. Shielding shall be accomplished through the selection and use of shielded cable or by routing cable through shielding conduit. Shielding conduit shall be rigid pipe, flexible metal hose, or enclosed cableways or trunks. Armored cable does not meet these shielding requirements. The outermost overall cable shield of shielded cables shall be grounded at weather deck or weather bulkhead penetration points. Pipes, metal tubing and waveguides routed in topside areas shall be grounded at deck or bulkhead penetration points. Tubing and pipes shall be grounded by welding or by a welded flange, or shall utilize the method specified for cable shield grounding. Waveguides shall be grounded by replacing the weather flange gasket with an electrically conductive gasket.


Table 400-1. Cable Group Separation Distances (inches)

Cable Group Classification A B C D E F G H I J K L

A Propulsion Cables -- 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 B Power & Lighting 24 -- 2 4 2 4 12 18 18 18 18 24

C Power & Lighting Control

24 2 -- 4 2 4 12 18 18 18 18 24

D Receiving Antenna Cables

24 4 4 -- 2 2 12 18 18 18 18 24

E TV/VHF Antenna Distribution

24 2 2 2 -- 2 12 18 18 18 18 24

F Telephone/ Audio Distribution

24 4 4 2 2 -- 12 18 18 18 18 24

G Sonar Transducer 24 12 12 12 12 12 -- 18 18 18 18 24

H HF Transmitter/ Coupler Cables

24 18 18 18 18 18 18 -- 18 18 18 24

I HF Coupler/ Antenna Waveguide Cables

24 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 -- 18 18 24

J VHF/UHF Transmitter Cables

24 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 -- 18 24

K Radar Transceiver Coaxial or Waveguide

24 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 -- 24

L Digital Data Bus 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 -- 115

120

125

130

135

420 DYNAMIC POSITIONING SYSTEM (DPS) AND AUTOPILOT

420.1 General

A Dynamic Positioning System (DPS), Kongsberg K-Pos DP-11, shall be provided and installed. The DPS primary control shall be located in the pilothouse main console with a secondary control located in the Computer Lab. Two portable operator terminals with joystick (with full head capability), remote controller and video display shall be provided. Terminals shall be designed to be viewable indirect bright sunlight. Remote plug-in jacks for the portable terminal shall be provided at each bridge wing, aft control station, A-frame, and the vicinity of the starboard overside handling device.

Station selection shall be located at the primary control in the pilothouse. Visual indications and voice channels shall be provided at primary and secondary stations to effect and accept control transfer. Full positive control shall be maintained during control transfer. Video display of the DPS screen shall be provided to the scientific information system.

The DPS shall have an industry standard commercial operating system. The DPS application shall be programmed in a standard language code. DPS control shall include color video display monitors and keyboards in the pilothouse main console and the computer lab.

The DPS shall have a menu selectable operating and setup capability and help library. Setup features shall include the following modes: manual, autopilot, and automatic control


with local or remote input of commands. The DPS system shall have operator selectable heading, speed and tracking.

The DPS waypoints and tracks shall be capable of being uploaded from or downloaded to electronic storage media or the vessel’s data network. The DPS shall be capable of generating a survey track of multiple waypoints, including parallel courses, cross line courses, lead-in and lead-out line, and turns from 0 degrees to 359 degrees. Color video displays shall have dimming controls and shall indicate the following:

140

145

150

155

160

165

• Operating mode selected: DP mode of Station Keeping or Position Move, Course Tracking or Autopilot

• Source of command information: manual, automatic local or automatic remote

• Commanded position and actual vessel position

• Commanded heading and actual vessel heading

• Commanded track course, actual vessel track course made and present cross track error

• Next track course selected

• Distance along track, distance to end of track waypoint time to end of track waypoint, distance to last waypoint, time to last point

• Commanded speed and actual speed

• Commanded rudder angle and actual rudder angle

• Crab angle

• Tracking status - tracking or not tracking

• Individual generator status and loading

• Individual thruster and propeller shaft status and loading

• Navigation input source

• DP system shall have an ECDIS capability to display electronic navigation charts (ENC) in IHO S-57 format and project vessel’s position on chart - DP system shall display on a grid with axes calibrated in latitude and longitude, and scale of the display shall be user-selectable

• Identification of ECDIS chart installed and ready for display

• Radar targets

• Identification of radar screen selected for display

• Vessel heading

• Waypoint locations

• Any additional information needed for operation of the DPS in the various modes


The DPS shall be capable of operating in any mode with any combination of propellers, rudders and bow thruster disabled. Operators shall be capable of enabling or disabling each thruster and propeller. Any thruster disabled by DPS shall revert to manual control automatically.

170

175

180

185

190

195

200

205

The DPS shall be designed to operate continuously for long periods (up to full endurance) of on-station or trackline following work. The DPS shall accept inputs from navigation equipment and at least 3 position sensor inputs from devices such as GPS/DGPS, Wide Area Augmentation System/Differential Global Positioning System (WAAS/DGPS), other satellite GPS/DGPS inputs, multiple (2 to 3) course heading inputs, position/motion sensing input from a device such as a AHRS, wind inputs, and Doppler speed log inputs. The DPS shall be capable of interfacing with a vesselwide data network and be capable of providing non-proprietary, industry-standard format output to future installed science systems.

420.2 Manual Mode

In the manual mode, control shall be by dual axis joystick at the pilothouse main console, bridge wings and aft control station. The joystick shall include automatic heading capability. Joystick control response shall be squared curve (instead of linear).

420.3 Autopilot Mode

The autopilot shall automatically control the vessel’s heading within 2 degrees of the selected course at speeds from 0.5 knots to maximum. Propeller RPM shall be manually controlled at the propeller controls or the DPS joystick. This system shall allow course corrections without coming out of this mode.

420.4 Automatic Control Mode

The DP system design and operation shall minimize noise, vibration, and adverse effects on the operation of acoustic systems as much as possible. The DPS shall automatically control propeller RPM, steering control surface angle, and bow thruster azimuth angle and RPM to meet the following requirements:

• Position Keeping - The vessel shall be able to maintain station and work in Sea States up through 4 (1.25 – 2.5 m wave heights) at best heading.

• Dynamic Positioning - using the best possible and multiple navigation inputs, shall be possible, in both relative and absolute references in the following conditions:

o 25-knot wind

o Sea State 4

o 2-knot “beam” current

The maximum excursion allowed shall be ±5 meters (equal to navigation accuracy) from a fixed location for operations through Sea State 4 at best heading. The DPS shall sound an alarm when the vessel falls off position beyond a user-selectable limit. The DPS shall


include the ability to move from present position to a selected location in any direction while maintaining vessel’s heading and rotate 360 degrees while maintaining position.

The vessel shall follow a trackline over the bottom within ±5 meters at best heading at any speed between 2 and 12 knots with a constant towing load of up to 10,000 pounds in seas up to Sea State 4, a wind speed of 25 knots, and a 2-knot current (perpendicular to trackline). The DPS shall provide the capability of accepting multiple waypoints. Permissible lateral tracking error shall be ±5 meters.

210

215

220

225

230

235

240

Permissible maximum variation of the vessel’s heading from the track course (crab angle) shall be user-selectable up to a limit of ±45 degrees. When following a multiple waypoint trackline that requires a change in course after a waypoint, the DPS shall be capable of changing the vessel’s heading automatically to follow the new course of the next track segment. The DPS shall alert the operator that a turn is impending by sounding a local alarm at a fixed time interval before the turn. The DPS shall require an acknowledgment of the alarm before the turn is executed. The DPS shall alert the operator by sounding a local alarm when the vessel falls off track.

Straight track segments shall be maintained without large and/or frequent heading changes. In the automatic mode, the DPS shall be capable of using position information from the vessel’s Global Positioning System (GPS) and at least three additional input ports.

421 NON-ELECTRICAL AND NON-ELECTRONIC NAVIGATION AIDS

The following navigations aids shall be provided:

• One compass, magnetic plate installed in the forward pilothouse console.

• Two gyro repeater pelorus stands, located port and starboard in the pilothouse, Sperry Marine Part # 1812783.

• One bracket-mounted, 12-inch diameter, cast bronze fog bell, engraved with the vessel name, located forward of the pilothouse. The clapper shall be provided with a lanyard. The bell shall be a Kahlenberg model P492-02BE.

• Two trim and heel clinometers of the bubble-in-tube type, graduated in degrees. One of each type shall be located in the pilothouse and in the MCS. Clinometers shall be Moeller Instrument Co., Model No. 458.

• Three 6-inch, quartz movement, solid brass, flanged case, screw bezel clocks. One shall be located in the pilothouse, one in the lounge and one in the MCS.

• Two 6-inch, solid brass, flanged case, screw bezel barometers. One shall be installed adjacent to each of the pilothouse and lounge clocks.

• One recording barometer. The barometer shall consist of a R.M. Young Model 61202 barometric pressure sensor, to be located on the mast, and a R.M. Young Model 26800 meteorological display, to be located at the chart table. Data shall be slaved to the scientific information system via RS-232 or RS-485 connection.


• Charts (latest editions as of builder’s trials) of the area for tests, trials and training; the delivery route; and the expected operating areas. In addition, navigation publications as required by USCG and regulatory bodies.

245

250

255

260

265

270

275

• All navigational shapes and associated rigging as required by the USCG. Shapes shall coincide with the navigation light conditions described in Section 422.

• A set of international code flags as required by USCG, stowed in the locker in the pilothouse.

422 NAVIGATION LIGHTS, SIGNAL LIGHTS, AND SEARCH LIGHTS

422.1 Introduction

Navigation lights in accordance with the U.S. Coast Guard COMDTINST M16672.2C (’72 COLREGS as amended) and UL 1104 shall be provided and installed. These shall include forward and aft mast lights, sidelights, not-under-command (NUC), towing (tow exceeds 200 meters – see Rule 24), fishing/trawling (see Rule 26), clearance/obstruction, and restricted-in-ability-to-maneuver (RAM) lights. Navigation lights shall be Perko, 1384-1388 series, LED with incandescent back-up. Lights shall operate on 120 VAC, and be provided with all required bulbs.

A supervised navigation light switch panel shall be provided and installed in the pilothouse. The navigation light panel shall be a Hose-McCann Cat. No. 31 series.

A red, aircraft warning light shall be provided and installed on the mainmast top. The aircraft warning light shall be connected to the navigation light panel. The aircraft warning light shall be a FAA-approved, L-810, Flightlight model FL-810R11610BD1. The light shall operate on 120 VAC.

422.2 Whistle Light

The Contractor shall provide and install a whistle light of waterproof bronze construction with a clear, all-around fresnel lens, located with the whistle.

422.3 Searchlights

The Contractor shall provide and install two 1000 watt xenon searchlights located on the housetop. The searchlights shall be capable of remote pan, tilt and focus. Remote electronic controls shall be provided and mounted in the pilothouse. The searchlights shall be Francis Model FX560RC.

423 ELECTRONIC NAVIGATION SYSTEMS

Space and weight shall be reserved for a 19" electronics rack in the computer lab and in the chart room near the mast, for future science/navigation systems.


423.1 Differential GPS Systems (DGPS)

Two (2) differential GPS systems shall be provided, complete with differential receivers and NMEA RS-232/442 outputs to required navigation/monitoring equipment. Integrated displays shall be mounted at the pilothouse main console and at the aft control station, with slave displays at the chart table, and in the main and computer labs. The DGPS system shall provide the following, among other standard, features:

280

285

290

295

300

305

310

• GLONASS receiving capability.

• 24-channel “all-in-view” receiver.

• On-line monitoring and display of data.

• Compensation of ionospheric delay in DGPS mode.

• Target monitoring.

• Modular software and hardware.

The DGPS units shall be Kongsberg model DPS 700.

423.2 Gyrocompass

A master gyrocompass unit, magnetic compass with fluxgate, compass monitor, slave repeaters (locations noted below), and bearing repeaters shall be provided. The transmission unit shall be provided with on/off switches to control the repeater outputs, and sufficient quantity of outputs to allow for future expansion.

The main readout shall be located in the pilothouse main console with slave repeaters located in the aft control station, in the bridge wing consoles, and in the main lab. A bearing repeater, with column stands and gimbal bracket, shall be located beside each bridge wing station. The gyrocompass shall interface with the radar systems, autopilot, dynamic positioning system, DGPS, ECDIS, magnetic compass, and other navigation/ communications equipment as required.

A redundant, identical system shall be provided. The secondary system shall be able to utilize the primary repeater stations.

The gyrocompass system shall be a Navigat X Mk 2 (Kongsberg).

423.3 Voyage Data Recorder (VDR)

A complete, IMO-approved voyage data recorder, with features and capabilities in accordance with IMO Resolution A.861(20), shall be provided and installed. The VDR shall be capable of interfacing with the IMAC and navigation systems to record the information required by the regulatory bodies (see below). The VDR shall record 12 hours of data in a continuous loop.


In addition, the VDR system shall have the following features:

• CD drive capable of storing 4-6 hours of data.

• ABS-approved for annual certification.

• Dedicated LAN interface with navigation equipment

• VDR playback software. 315

320

325

330

335

340

The VDR shall be a Kongsberg Maritime Black Box (MBB), complete with data collection unit, replay and evaluation unit, protected storage unit (“black box”) and all other ancillary equipment required to satisfy the regulations.

The VDR shall be capable of recording the following data:

• Date and Time – Referenced from a source external to the vessel or from an internal system source (i.e., GPS).

• Vessel’s Position – Latitude and longitude, and datum used.

• Speed – Through water or over ground, including an indication of which used.

• Heading – From gyrocompass.

• Pilothouse Audio – Microphones at the main conning stations, engineer’s station, bridge wing consoles, and chart table.

• Communications Audio – VHF communications relating to vessel operations.

• Radar Data – As it appears on the master radar display during the recording period.

• Echo Sounder – Depth under keel, depth scale, and status information.

• Main Alarms – Status of all mandatory pilothouse alarms.

• Rudder Position Order and Response – Include status and settings of autopilot and DPS.

• Propulsion Motor Order and Response – Direct motor controls and feedback indications. Include status of bow thruster.

• Watertight and Fire Door Status – Include all mandatory status information required on the pilothouse.

• Wind Speed and Direction – Either relative or true, with an indication of which.

Data may be derived from the individual indicating/alarm equipment or, as practicable, from the IMAC system.

The protective memory capsule shall be located in a clear section of the housetop to allow access by a diver or ROV. The data acquisition unit shall be located in the pilothouse.


423.4 Sound Signal Equipment

The Contractor shall provide and install a heated, electric-powered, piston horn-style whistle, in compliance with IMO and USCG (’72 COLREGS, as amended) requirements, with the following features: 345

350

355

360

365

370

• Pushbutton controls from all conning stations (2)

• Automatic fog signal controller

The whistle shall be mounted in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, vibration-isolated, on the mainmast.

The ship’s whistle shall be a Kahlenberg model KPH-130, with model M-511A control unit.

423.5 Sound Reception System

A sound reception system for enclosed navigation bridges shall be installed per Safety of Life at Sea Convention (SOLAS) regulations. This system shall include a master control station in the pilothouse (mounted in the vicinity of the main conning station), supporting four (4) exterior microphones. The microphones shall be mounted in locations recommended by the manufacturer.

The sound reception system shall be a Kongsberg model VSS 111/222.

424 ELECTRONIC NAVIGATION SYSTEMS, ACOUSTICAL

424.1 Ship Depth Finding

A depth sounder system, able to plot the video displays to paper shall be provided and installed. The displays shall be capable of showing up to 30 minutes of information on separate screens with a continuous digital display indicating the water depth. The main display and controls shall be located at the chart table with slave readouts at the pilothouse main console, port and starboard bridge wings, aft control station, and in the computer lab.

The approved depth sounders shall be provided with the following, among other standard, features:

• Full-color, 150x200 mm LCD displays at all conning positions.

• Frequencies of 38, 50 and 200 kHz, selectable at main display.

• Selectable deep/shallow water limit alarms.

• 24-hour memory of recorded data.

• Single transducer configuration located in the Transducer Room. The transducer shall be capable of being replaced while the vessel is afloat.

The echo-sounders/recorders shall be Kongsberg model EN 250.


424.2 Speed Log System 375

380

385

390

395

400

405

A doppler speed log shall be provided. Displays shall be mounted at the pilothouse main console, the aft control station, chart table and in the computer lab.

The approved dual-axis doppler speed log shall be provided with:

• Single transducer configuration located in the transducer room. The transducer shall be capable of being replaced while the vessel is afloat.

• Log frequency of 540 kHz, with a beam width of 4x5.5 degrees.

• Echo sounder frequency of 270 kHz, with a beam width of 8 degrees.

• Distance display in nautical miles.

• NMEA outputs as required to supply data to the radar, autopilot, gyro, IMAC and ECDIS systems with the capability of up to 4 additional outputs.

The doppler speed log shall be a Kongsberg DL 850, complete with one seachest transducer kit.

424.3 Sonar Transducers (Including Scientific)

Sonar transducers mounted externally on the bottom of the hull shall be provided with structural fairings, blisters or domes to reduce flow noise and prevent cavitation according to the sonar manufacturer’s requirements. The installation of transducers in the fairing shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.

Transducer wells and void spaces shall include the following provisions:

• Locations fore and aft to optimize transducer operation.

• The ability to change and service hull-mounted transducers easily while the vessel is afloat. Seachests for transducers in Table 400-2 shall permit change out of transducers with the vessel afloat. The current profiling sensors seachest shall be designed to mount the sensor with the transducer electronics accessible from inside the vessel with the vessel afloat.

• Several transducer-mounting locations that can be adapted to a wide variety of transducers within a reasonable size range. Use of centerboard or other innovative methods to place transducers in location for optimum performance.

• Design for expanding transducer numbers and changing requirements and equipment to ensure the ability to change and add acoustics systems over the life of the vessel.

• Transducers, wells and scientific seachests shall be located in a common area to allow for easy access and servicing.

• Provision shall be made in the structure of the hull and/or deck for mounting temporary transducer/transponder poles on one or both sides of the vessel.


• Transducers shall be suitable for continuous operation in a seawater environment. Transducer mounting locations shall be located away from discharges and shall be subject to minimal flow disturbance.

410

415

420

425

• Transducer installations shall be free of hull interferences and not impede the ability of the vessel to be drydocked.

• Transducer locations shall be free of bubble sweepdown.

• Seachests for scientific electronic systems (SES) shall be provided with faired flush, removable outer covers.

The ADCP transducer seachests and the scientific seachests shall be identical in size and configuration. The ADCP transducer seachests shall be provided with the capability of adding a 1.5 inch thick window on the sea side for instrument protection. The window shall be flush with the hull when installed. The transducer seachests shall be located near midship and near centerline.

Sea chests for equipment in Table 400-2 shall be provided with head tanks and fresh-water system connections as required by the manufacturers.

426 SCIENTIFIC ELECTRONIC SYSTEMS (SES)

The RCRV shall be designed and constructed to readily accept FUTURE INSTALLATION of the scientific electronic systems in Table 400-2. See also Deliverable DI-010-13.

Table 400-2. Scientific Electronic Systems

Equipment Make and Model –

Alternative #1 Make and Model –

Alternative #2 Multibeam Survey System (MBSS)

Kongsberg EM302 (1 deg x 1 deg) Reson 8128 and 8160

Single Beam Survey System (SBSS)

Kongsberg EA 600 (3 transducers – 12, 38, and 120 kHz)

Sub-Bottom Profiler (SBP) Array of 16 ORE 137D transducers in 4x4 configuration in an oil-filled chamber approximately 4 ft x 4 ft by 30 inches high

Acoustic Doppler Current Profiler (ADCP)

RDI Ocean Surveyor (2 transducers – 75 and 150 kHz)

Test Hydrophones Harris Acoustic Products Corp., Model HAP-5050

430


Where two alternative makes and models of equipment are listed, the vessel shall be capable of accommodating both. The Contractor shall provide all necessary design features and supporting components of the installations including:

• Space and weight reservations in suitable locations for all components of the systems. 435

440

445

450

455

460

• Electrical power in accordance with manufacturers’ recommendations.

• Cables shall have appropriate terminations in the vicinity of SES components, with sufficient extra cable provided to make final connections.

• Air conditioning and ventilation systems shall include all heat loads imposed by SES components.

• Seachests shall be provided in accordance with manufacturers’ requirements. For SES transducers that are provided with a manufacturer-supplied seachest, space for installation shall be provided. Transducer locations shall not be inside tanks.

• Cable trunks, science wireways, trays, pipes, hangers and penetrations.

In addition, space in the transducer room shall be reserved for future installation of a parametric sub-bottom profiler and an acoustic navigation and tracking system (ANTS).

432 TELEPHONE SYSTEMS

432.1 Sound Powered Telephone System

Sound-powered telephone systems shall be provided and installed as required by the regulations and as outlined below. Sound-powered systems described shall be as provided by Hose-McCann Telephone Company.

432.2 Engineering Circuit (2JV)

An engineering sound-powered telephone system (circuit 2JV) shall be provided and installed to communicate between the following stations/spaces:

• Pilothouse, Main Control Console

• Aft Control Station

• Engine Room

• MCS

• Bow Thruster Room

• Emergency Generator Room

• Steering Gear Room

The sound-powered telephone units in the pilothouse, MCS and machinery spaces shall be Hose-McCann model SW-123J (w/Cat. #16B2 handset cord). Headsets, Hose-McCann model 15AN/4SP, shall be provided for the machinery space stations. Headsets shall be


stowed in boxes, Hose-McCann (Navy Sym. No.) 2924.1, located adjacent to the station. Provision shall be made for high ambient noise areas. In the machinery spaces, including steering gear, bow thruster and emergency generator rooms, a rotating beacon, Hose-McCann model HMC870-1206 and relay box, Hose McCann drawing No. 4901T, shall be installed to alert personnel to incoming calls. (Machinery space sound-powered telephones may be located in acoustic booths.)

465

470

475

480

485

490

495

432.3 Science Circuit (7JV)

A science sound-powered telephone system (circuit 7JV) shall be provided and installed to communicate between the following stations:

• Pilothouse, Main Control Console

• Pilothouse, Science Station

• Winch Control Stations

• Fwd Working Deck

• Aft Working Deck


• Main Lab

• Computer Lab

The science system shall consist of single-gang jackboxes (except for the pilothouse main console – see below), Hose-McCann model G15A, and headsets with push-to-talk buttons, Hose-McCann model 15AN/4SP at each station listed above. Headsets shall be stowed in boxes, Hose-McCann model (Navy Sym. No.) 2924.1, located adjacent to the jackboxes.

The pilothouse main console station shall consist of a sound-powered telephone amplifier, Hose-McCann Model AM-2210, flush-mounted speaker, handset model H203/U (w/Z-33 handset holder), and Model H-27 flush-mounted jack, grouped closely together and mounted in the console. This equipment shall be connected, in accordance with the manufacturer instructions, to allow the person at the main console to monitor the activity on the science circuit (without having to don a headset), and to interrupt (using the handset) as necessary.

432.4 Fueling Circuit (3JV)

An intrinsically safe sound-powered telephone system (circuit 3JV) shall be provided and installed to communicate between the fueling stations, tank sounding locations, and the following spaces:

• MCS

• Chief Engineer’s Stateroom


Sound-powered telephone units at the fueling stations shall be intrinsically-safe, Hose-McCann Dwg. No. 563-01 (for weather locations). Units for the MCS and Chief Engineer’s stateroom shall be Hose-McCann model 562-01. Single-gang jackboxes, Hose-McCann model G15A, shall be provided and installed at the tank sounding locations. Two (2) headsets with push-to-talk buttons (for use during tank sounding), Hose-McCann model 15AN/4SP, with stowage boxes, Hose-McCann model (Navy Sym. No.) 2924.1, shall be provided and installed in the MCS as directed by the Owner.

500

505

510

515

520

432.5 Dial Telephone System

A VoIP-based dial telephone system shall be provided, complying with the ABS requirements for voice communication defined under Rule 4-8-2/11.5.3 and configured as an emergency communications system per SOLAS.

Cabling, telephone jacks, patch panels, etc., as needed to achieve a functioning telephone system meeting the requirements of these specifications shall be provided and installed.

The PABX telephone system shall be a Hose-McCann Model ICP, and shall consist of a digital automatic dial telephone system suitable for marine installation, and shall be capable of handling inputs from approximately 50 phone extensions installed throughout the vessel.

A weathertight telephone outlet shall be provided at the head of the gangway. A watertight, portable dial telephone instrument with jack and 10 feet of cord shall be provided. Telephone handsets shall have positive restraining devices. A six-line NEMA 4X stainless steel telephone connection box shall be provided near the shore power connection, located so that it may be served from both sides of the vessel. Six lines from the shore connection shall be routed to the computer lab. A 12-conductor, 18 AWG marine cable, 50 meters in length, shall be supplied with provision to store the cable in the connection box when not in use.

Table 400-3. Dial Telephone System Equipment List

LOCATION EQUIPMENT Hold Bow Thruster Room Engine Room Propulsion Motor Room Winch Room Steering Gear Room

Bulkhead-Mounted Telephone, Hose-McCann (HMC) Model IP-9325 Acoustic Booth, HMC model No. 897 Auxiliary Relay Unit, HMC Dwg. 18-16-DS Visual Signaling Beacon, HMC model IP-HMC870-1206 (Blue)

Hold Ship Stores Laundry (7) Staterooms Transducer Room

Bulkhead-Mounted Telephone, HMC Model IP-9325

Hold MCS & Electrical Room

6-Button IP Speakerphone, HMC Model IP-9644D


LOCATION EQUIPMENT Main Deck Dry Stores Galley/Scullery ADA Stateroom Hospital Mess Lounge Main Lab (2) Computer Lab Hydro/Wet Lab ET Shop


Main Deck Van Location No. 1 Van Location No. 2

6-Button IP Speakerphone, HMC Model IP-9644D (Provide and deliver telephones to the Owner. Provide and install

watertight telephone connections at van utility connection locations.)

Main Deck Shoreside Line Terminal Box (configured for 6 lines each), HMC Series IP-865-6

01 Deck Captain’s Stateroom Chief Scientist’s Stateroom

6-Button IP Speakerphone, HMC Model IP-9644D

01 Deck Aft Control Station Incinerator Room Emergency Generator Room (7) Staterooms


03 Deck Pilothouse

(2) 6-Button IP Speakerphone, HMC Model IP-9644D

525

530

535

The system shall be integrated with the interior communications platform (ICP) described in Section 433, and with the satellite communications and cell phone systems. The system shall manage extension-to-extension call routing and shall record off-ship phone time (both at sea and in port). The primary reception phone shall be a multi-line featured phone capable of receiving incoming satellite calls and transferring the calls to the appropriate extension.

433 PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM

The Contractor shall provide and install a type-approved integrated public address/general alarm/talkback/entertainment system that complies with USCG, SOLAS and ABS regulations. The system shall be Hose-McCann ICP, complete with steel enclosure(s), shock mounts, redundant amplified systems (wattages by vendor), and wired for 220V power input. The system shall be provided with battery back-up as required for 30 minutes of operation. The main PA/GA/talkback system station shall be located in the pilothouse. A secondary PA announcing location shall be provided near the head of the gangway.


The system shall include tone generators for the general alarm as allowed by the regulatory bodies. Contact makers shall be installed in the pilothouse, the machinery control station (MCS), and the emergency generator room. The system volume shall be adjustable so that it can be made audible over the loudest ambient noise level occurring.

540

545

550

555

560

565

570

An intelligent digital control head, Hose-McCann part number IP-EPIC, shall be located in the pilothouse at the main control console. The IP-EPIC shall provide the user with a series of touch menus displayed on a high-resolution color LCD screen with resistive touch panel. PBX, alarm activation, fog signaling, public address, and talkback shall be integrated together through the IP-EPIC in an ABS-type, approved system.

The PA system shall be interfaced with the entertainment system to allow broadcast (music, etc.) to selectable zones.

FUTURE INSTALLATION: The entertainment system shall be provided with, at minimum, the following features:

• CD player (w/5 CD carousel)

• (2) DVD players

• Satellite radio receiver (MX or Sirius)

• AM/FM/SW tuner

• All-band omni-directional shipboard antenna for TV and radio reception

• All pertinent amplifiers, power supplies and ancillary devices to make a complete, operational, system

• 32" flat panel TV monitor and receiver

• Entertainment media storage

The entertainment system shall be Hose-McCann part number HMUM-SRE. In adherence to the regulations, the entertainment system shall be configured to mute during PA announcements.

PA speakers in the lounge shall be configured to serve only their respective space, and shall be integrated with the entertainment system and the television in that space.

FM/TV outlets, Hose-McCann part number HMUM-N1F, complete with connectors and cabling, shall be located in each stateroom, each office, mess, lounge, the pilothouse, aft control station, and each lab.

Final locations for the PA/GA/Entertainment system components shall be approved by the Owner.

The following table summarizes the equipment requirements and approximate quantities of the public address/general alarm/talkback/entertainment system.


Table 400-4. Public Address System Equipment List

LOCATION EQUIPMENT Mainmast (1) 60W Loudhailer, Hose-McCann model IP-HM387-2060 Hold Deck (14) Compact PA speakers, HMC model IP-HM-SFIS-C

(9) 15W interior horns, Hose-McCann model IP-HM-HSIS (4) Rotating Beacon (red – for general alarm in machinery spaces and winch

room), HMC model IP-HMC870-1206R Main Deck, Interior (28) Compact PA speakers, HMC model IP-HM-SFIS-C

(9) TV/FM outlet, HMC model HMUM-N1F Main Deck, Exterior (6) 30W exterior horns, HMC model IP-HM-HSIS, located as follows:

(2) Port and starboard side of A-frame (3) Forward end of aft working deck – facing aft (1) Side deck Provisions for extending the PA system in to the science vans shall be installed. One speaker and 50' of cable shall be provided, by the Contractor to the Owner, for each van.

01 Deck, Interior (13) Compact PA speakers, HMC model IP-HM-SFIS-C (2) 15W interior horns, Hose-McCann model IP-HM-HSIS (10) TV/FM outlet, HMC model HMUM-N1F

01 Deck, Exterior (6) 30W exterior horns, HMC model IP-HM-HSIS, located as follows: (2) Forward working deck (2) Side decks (2) Hydro/CTD Winch area (working deck)

02 Deck, Interior (2) Compact PA speakers, HMC model IP-HM-SFIS-C (stairwell) 02 Deck, Exterior (4) 30W exterior horns, Hose-McCann model IP-HM-HSIS 03 Deck, Interior (1) Digital control head, Hose-McCann model IP-EPIC (pilothouse)

(4) Compact PA speakers, HMC model IP-HM-SFIS-C (2) TV/FM outlet, HMC model HMUM-N1F

03 Deck, Exterior (2) 30W exterior horns, Hose-McCann model IP-HM-HSIS 04 Deck, Exterior (1) 30W exterior horn, Hose-McCann model IP-HM-HSIS 575

580

585

Public address speakers/horns listed above shall be divided into “groups” as follows:

• PA Group 1: Entire Vessel • PA Group 2: Entire Interior of Vessel • PA Group 3: Weather Deck Forward • PA Group 4: Working Deck Aft • PA Group 5: Machinery Spaces • PA Group 6: Accommodation Spaces • PA Group 7: Passageways, Mess, Lounge, Galley • PA Group 8: Labs, Van Locations, ET Shop

The integral talkback speaker system shall consist of Hose-McCann model IP-HM1566-TB, submerge-proof speaker horns with integral, sealed, call-in signal pushbutton (except loudhailer location – see Table 400-4 above, for loudhailer equipment).


Talkback circuits shall be located as follows: Table 400-5. Talkback Speaker Circuits

TB1 Loudhailer, Mainmast TB2 Liferaft Release Station, (P) TB3 Liferaft Release Station, (S) TB4 Rescue Boat Station, 02 Level (P) TB5 Mooring Station No. 1 (01 Level – Fwd) TB6 Mooring Station No. 2 (01 Level, ~Fr15 -Port) TB7 Mooring Station No. 3 (01 Level, ~Fr13 -Stbd) TB8 Mooring Station No. 4 (Main Deck, ~Fr27 -Stbd) TB9 Mooring Station No. 5 (Main Deck - Aft) TB10 Forward Lookout (Bullnose) TB11 Hydro/CTD Winch(es) 590

595

600

605

610

615

434 ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM

See Section 433.

436 ELECTRICAL ALARM, SAFETY, AND WARNING SYSTEMS

436.1 Integrated Machinery Alarm & Control (IMAC) System

NOTE: The system described below is a machinery control and monitoring system as provided by Siemens.

A comprehensive, computerized, integrated machinery control and monitoring (IMAC) system shall be provided and installed to monitor the data points and furnish the control functions outlined in these specifications. It shall be configured as required by ABS Rules for Building and Classing Steel Vessels Under 90 Meters (295 ft) in Length for ABS Classification ACCU (periodically unattended machinery spaces), and USCG Regulations, 46 CFR 62 (Vital System Automation), hereinafter referred to as the rules and regulations. The Contractor shall follow the Standards of IEEE 45-2002, Clause 9, when integrating the IMAC system into the overall control and monitoring system. The system shall integrate the requirements of the regulatory bodies, the ship electrical power and propulsion systems, the fire control station and the hotel and accommodation systems. The monitoring and control system design and microprocessor-based equipment shall be by Siemens, under the general description of the IMAC system, which includes hardware and software specifically designed for shipboard applications. Additional tools shall be provided that make use of the IMAC data including an information management system (IMS), providing historical and trend analysis, and a propulsion control interface, all functions being integrated to form a vessel management system (VMS). Profibus DP is the interconnect method to Siemens and non-Siemens equipment that are to be interfaced to the IMAC system. Proprietary interface equipment and software are not acceptable. The system shall also provide data acquisition and performance monitoring for logging, and output of selected data (no control) to the science information network (see Section 493).

Centralized control shall be provided for the monitoring of all vital temperatures, pressures, levels and electric load characteristics. Abnormal conditions shall be sensed and


shall activate alarms to warn of the condition, and the system shall automatically take corrective action in the case of certain serious malfunctions. 620

625

630

635

The centralized control and monitoring system shall be a computer-based system utilizing touch screen, computer mouse and/or keyboard input to acknowledge alarms, open/close valves, start/stop pumps and fans, and monitor the vessel’s machinery plant.

In addition to the requirements of the rules and regulations, the centralized control and monitoring system shall include, but not be limited to, the following:

• Centralized TLI readouts for all fuel, ballast and miscellaneous tanks.

• Centralized control of ballast operations, including tank selection, pump start/stop and all valve operations.

• Remote start/stop and paralleling of the diesel generator sets.

• High and low level alarms for fuel, waste oil, lube oil storage, oily waste and ballast tanks.

• High-high level alarms for the fuel and lube oil tanks.

Table 400-6, the IMACS Points List, provides a list of regulatory and Owner-required (non-regulatory) IMAC system points.

The Contractor shall provide, during Phase II design, a final IMAC points list, indicating all control, monitoring and alarm points required to satisfy the ACCU regulations, as well as non-regulatory requirements outlined herein.

System Configuration

The control and monitoring system shall be presented as computer type operator work stations (OWS) in the pilothouse, in the machinery control station (MCS) and in the Chief Engineer’s accommodation. The extent of monitoring and control in the individual stations may be minimized to that required by the function of the station and to suit

ACCU rules. Remote manual or automatic control from these stations shall not affect or inhibit local manual control that is required by the regulatory bodies. These work stations shall be linked within themselves and with the redundant servers via redundant Ethernet fiber optic rings (the HMI, human-machine interface, ring). Work stations shall each be a Siemens VDU Operator Interface.

640

645

650

655

In addition to the chief engineer work station referred to above, alarm monitoring stations shall be provided in the mess, quarterdeck station, and the Master’s and 1st Engineer’s staterooms. These stations shall integrate the regulatory body requirements (ABS Rules for Building and Classing Steel Vessels Under 90 Meters (295 ft) in Length, Rule 4-7-4/7), for the engineer’s assistance alarm, engineer’s call signal system, and fire alarm. The system shall have the capability to send off-ship, via SMS (short message service) to selected mobile phones, pre-programmed alerts to critical alarms in the IMAC system. A mobile wireless GSM modem, Siemens MD720-3, and quadband antenna, Siemens


ANT 794-4MR, or other as recommended by the manufacturer, shall be provided with the IMAC system for off-ship paging (SMS).

Input and output functions shall be collected in I/O stations (Siemens ET 200) located about the vessel to be close to the monitored equipment. Multiple I/O stations shall be linked to area controllers (Siemens Simatic S7 PLCs) via Profibus fiber optic rings. The controllers shall be provided and arranged as detailed below. Fiber optic type cables shall be used to the greatest extent possible to help assure system immunity to EMI/RFI.

660

The system and each I/O station and area controllers shall have capacity to increase I/O quantity by 20% after delivery acceptance of the vessel.

System Capability 665

670

675

680

685

690

Process images (screens) shall graphically present the monitored functions with, for example, simplified system diagrams and deck and/or space arrangements. Consideration shall be given for the practical number of controls and indicators for each screen, limiting size of computer type monitors and the rule for clear and intelligent presentation of information. The number of images and presentation of each shall be as mutually agreed upon between Contractor/Siemens and the Owner.

An uninterruptible power supply (UPS) shall be provided and installed to serve the system power requirements. This UPS shall be powered from the main and emergency switchboards, ensuring more than one power source, and have a capacity of at least 30 minutes of operation. This system shall supply power to all system components through a power distribution network. This network shall be independent of the functions of the IMAC system.

Equipment enclosures in the machinery spaces (including steering gear and bow thruster rooms), and emergency generator room shall be IP44 or better.

Transducers, sensors and signal generators, both analog and digital, shall be provided as required for ACCU, where described in these specifications, and on the reference drawings. Compatibility with the IMAC system is required.

The IMAC system shall be capable of characterizing an input to convert it to customary units (such as pulses to RPM or tank level to gallons), to introduce time delays (such as bilge level sensors) and to perform control algorithms for outputs to motor starters and valve actuators (such as starting/stopping a pump motor on pressure or flow limits). The system shall be capable of and configured for determining alarm points from analog signals, performing calculations (such as determining fuel consumption based on input and output meters) and performing associated actions (such as comparing fuel consumption to generator load).

Pumps and compressors installed in duplicate shall have the capability of being automatically operated sequentially, and/or the second unit’s being automatically started upon failure of the first.


Oil pumping units and ventilation fans shall be capable of being stopped upon a signal from the fire alarm panel. 695

Multiple and variable alarm points shall be available from analog inputs, such as pressure and temperature sensors and tank level gages.

A component power failure alarm shall be inhibited by an intentional off signal.

System Functions

It is intended to integrate as many of the ship vital monitoring and control functions as practical and allowed by rules and regulations. In this regard, the following, as a minimum, shall be included:

700

• ACCU Required Control and Monitoring

The IMAC system shall provide control and monitoring of ship systems as required by the rules and regulations. The controls required at the fire control station, located in the pilothouse, and monitoring and control of watertight doors shall be included in these functions.

705

• Power Management System Interface

The system shall provide full monitoring, control and set-point adjustment interface with the power management system (PMS) located in the main switchboard where electrical power is automatically controlled, utilizing control of the diesel generators and switchboard components; see Section 324.

710

• Propulsion System Interface

The IMAC system shall interface with the propulsion system, including the steering gears, bow thruster, ship service diesel generators, and emergency diesel generator. This shall include the following functions:

715

720

• Receive all alarm and monitoring outputs required by the rules and regulations.

• Receive ready-for-control indication from a propulsion control selector switch.

• Provide power limiting control signals to propulsion control system, as detailed in Section 324.

A detailed system Failure Mode Effect Analysis (FMEA) shall be performed during Phase II design, demonstrating that any single failure in the IMAC system will not have an impact on more than one propulsor.

• Firefighting Station

The IMAC system shall provide for the capabilities required by the rules and regulations for the firefighting station.

725

• Auxiliary Systems Monitoring and Control

The IMAC system shall provide for utilities in addition to those required by the rules. This includes monitoring and control of ballast tank filling; remote control of seawater pumps; tank level indications of fuel and potable systems, and summary alarms from 730


A/C chillers and refrigeration. See the points list for auxiliary systems monitoring points required by the Owner.

• Bilge Level Indication

Bilge high level alarms shall be integrated in to the IMAC system.

• Navigation Suite Interface 735

The IMAC system shall provide an interface with the vessel navigation suite. This shall include heading control inputs for control interface with the DPS, and inputs from GPS, anemometer and gyrocompass information for the DPS function.

• Information Management System (IMS)

An information management system (Data Historian) shall be provided to assist in evaluating machinery performance in real-time and in performing trend analysis and data storage for future analysis and maintenance planning. This shall include a redundant interface from the IMS server to the ship LAN system.

740

745 The IMS shall collect and store all IMAC system incoming and outgoing data (events) in a date/time sequence format. The data shall be easily formatted for reading on-screen or printing. The IMS system shall be capable of storing the specified data for five years. Historical condition data viewing/printing parameters shall be developed by the Contractor/Vendor, and delivered to the Owner for approval.

• Computer /Network

One pair of servers in redundant configuration shall be the human machine interface (HMI) work station. The servers shall have a single monitor and keyboard to interface with the system software.

750

755

The servers and data storage units shall be the interface between the HMI (work station) Ethernet fiber optic ring and the Ethernet controller fiber optic ring for vessel management. The servers (such as, Siemens/Fujitsu Primergy H200) shall be the HMI between the operator work stations and the machine controllers (PLCs). The system controllers shall be linked via the controller ring.

• Propulsion Motor Room

The propulsion motor room (2-23-0) shall have ET 200 I/O stations provided. These shall serve potable water, sanitary flushing, MSD, refrigeration systems, ventilation fans and AHUs, and motor controllers in the propulsion motor room requiring connection to the monitoring and alarm system. These stations shall be configured to handle water system pressure, pump control, refrigeration plant status and faults, and ventilation fan control. In addition, these stations shall collect signals from the fixed fire protection (CO

760

765 2) installation (Winch Room, 2-28-0). These I/Os shall be connected to the utility/HVAC controller via Profibus fiber optic ring.

• Engine Room

The engine room (2-18-0) shall be provided with ET 200 I/O stations to collect the status information and provide start/stop commands to the auxiliary machinery and ventilation fan motor controllers. Machinery to be monitored and controlled shall be 770


air compressors, cooling pumps, and ventilation supply and exhaust fans. In addition, these stations are to serve the adjacent purifier room (2-20-1). These shall be configured to collect the status information from the fuel oil day tanks level switches and the purifiers. Purifier input shall be summarized to the extent possible. These I/Os shall be connected to the controllers via Profibus DP fiber optic ring. 775

Each of the (3) main diesel generator sets’ control panels shall be provided with an engine manufacturer supplied PLC to interface with the diesel engines and generators for IMAC functions and for power management. These PLCs shall be connected to an associated PMS/propulsor controller via a serial interface.

• Machinery Control Station and Electrical Room 780

785

790

The engineer’s control console shall be located in the machinery control station and electrical room (2-16-0) and shall be the centralized control station required to comply with ABS ACCU rules. Two redundant operator work stations shall be provided with all indication, alarm and control functions. Each workstation shall have a keyboard, trackball/ mouse and 20-inch color monitors (LCD type). In addition, at least three printers shall be provided to log alarms, various system parameters and events, and, as selected, copies of the process images of monitored functions.

The work stations, including monitor, keyboard and printer, shall be integrated into the control console.

The machinery control station and electrical room shall be provided with ET 200 I/O stations for monitoring the propulsion and ship service switchboards and transformers. These stations shall be configured to allow monitoring switchboard status and to provide status and control of motors connected to local motor controllers. These I/Os shall be connected to an associated PMS/propulsion controller via fiber optic rings.

• Emergency Generator Room 795

The emergency generator room (01-24-2), containing the emergency generator set and the emergency switchboard, shall have an ET 200 I/O station to interface with the generator set and switchboard requirements. This I/O station shall be connected to an associated PMS/propulsor controller via a Profibus fiber optic ring.

• Pilothouse 800

805

810

The pilothouse (03-9-0) shall be the remote propulsion control station, the firefighting/ fire detection station, and also shall include controls of dynamic positioning and vital auxiliaries. As required by regulatory bodies, the fire detection functions shall be separate systems from the Siemens IMAC system.

Two redundant IMAC operator work stations consisting of keyboard, 23-inch color monitor (LCD type) and printer shall be located in free-standing industrial grade consoles separate from the navigation console. The pilothouse station shall be given all of the status, alarm and control functions required by regulation, but non-vital system parameters shall be presented in summary only, where practical. The Owner shall be consulted in this matter. When the MCS is manned and controlling machinery, the pilothouse station shall not receive the machinery alarms.


26 Regional Class Research Vessel 12 November 2008 Contractor’s Ship Specifications, Rev. B DI-001_Specs\Outline Specifications\Rev B\400b.doc

815

The pilothouse work stations shall be connected via the HMI redundant fiber optic ring to the MCS, servers and work stations.

The load computer shall be located in the pilothouse and shall be provided with a printer. This interface shall be connected to the server via the HMI Ethernet fiber optic ring.

• Steering Gear and Bow Thruster Rooms

The steering gear room (2-32-0) and bow thruster room (2-2-0) shall each contain an optical link module to collect the inputs from the steering gears and thruster control systems and distribute the control commands associated with the steering gear and thruster auxiliaries. Each set of signals from a single steering gear or thruster shall be connected to a Simatic S7 controller and HMI ring by means of Profibus DP fiber optic cable.

820

Table 400-6. IMAC Points List (1 of 9)

Page 400-27 825

Regional Class Research Vessel 12 November 2008 Contractor’s Ship Specifications, Rev. B I-001_Specs\Outline Specifications\Rev B\400b.doc

IMAC Points List (2 of 9)

Page 400-28 Regional Class Research Vessel 12 November 2008 Contractor’s Ship Specifications, Rev. B I-001_Specs\Outline Specifications\Rev B\400b.doc

30 Regional Class Research Vessel 12 November 2008 Contractor’s Ship Specifications, Rev. B I-001_Specs\Outline Specifications\Rev B\400b.doc

830 IMAC Points List (4 of 9)


Page 400-32 835



Page 400-33


f the Navy Page 400-35 Regional Class Research Vessel 12 November 2008 Contractor’s Ship Specifications, Rev. B I-001_Specs\Outline Specifications\Rev B\400b.doc

840


Department o

436.2 Fire Alarm Systems

An approved, fully-addressable fire detection system shall be provided and installed with a central display unit located in the pilothouse to indicate the presence and location of fire/smoke in any area, room, compartment or space on the vessel (except tanks and voids).

845

850

855

860

865

870

875

The system installation and components furnished shall be USCG approved and in compliance with SOLAS. The system and components shall be listed by Factory Mutual (FM) and Underwriters Laboratories (UL) for the intended application. The system shall employ microprocessor-based architecture served by intelligent, addressable devices.

All detection and alarm system components shall be supplied by the manufacturer of the master control/processing/display assembly. The automatic fire detection and alarm system shall be a Siemens-Cerberus Division, Model MXL-CG. The system furnished shall have the following features, functions and capabilities:

• Addressable, dynamic supervision of intelligent devices and status reporting.

• Expansion capability.

• Common detector mounting base for same series devices (interchangeability).

Programmable relay bases that do not occupy an exclusive address.

The automatic fire detection and alarm system shall consist of at least the following Siemens-Cerberus components as further described herein and in the quantities required to suit the installation:

• Master command/display panel, Model MXL, USCG-approved configuration with optional viewing window and the following modules, as required: MMB-2 main motherboard, MKB-1 annunciator/control station, MPS-6 (or 12) power supply, MOM-4 motherboard, ALD-2I analog loop driver boards, batteries (sized by Siemens-Cerberus as indicated below), MXL-CG enclosure.

• Remote command/display panels, model RCC-1, USCG approved configuration with optional viewing lens.

• Photoelectric intelligent smoke detectors (fire print readable).

• Flame detectors for compartments with fuel oil units.

• Intrinsically safe smoke detectors and shunt barriers.

• Intrinsically safe module.

• Conventional zone module.

• Line isolator module.

• Conventional thermal detectors.

• Intelligent detector base.

• Intelligent manual pull station.


• Supervision/Interface modules as required.

• Power transfer relay.

• Software as required to provide a complete functioning system. 880

885

890

895

900

905

910

• Portable programming keyboard with interfacing cables.

The master command and display panel (MXL) and the automatic power transfer relay shall be installed in the pilothouse.

A remote command and display panel (RCC-1) shall be installed in the MCS and mess.

The location of manually operated call points shall be in accordance with SOLAS II-2/7.7. That is, one manually operated call point shall be located at each exit, and call points shall be readily accessible in the corridors of each deck such that no part of the corridor is more than 65 feet from a manually operated call point.

Activation of a manual call station shall be alarmed at the master and remote command and display panels. The manual call station circuits shall not include an automatic alarm verification sequence applied to the detectors.

The system’s battery banks shall be sized by the manufacturer in accordance with regulatory body requirements for an emergency “transitional” power source of one-half hour duration. The primary power source shall be the vessel’s propulsion diesel generators and the emergency power source shall be the emergency diesel generator.

The MXL battery bank shall be oversized by 15% to accommodate future system modifications.

Automatic fire detection system alarm horn/strobe units shall be installed as required by SOLAS regulations. The alarm horn/strobes shall be activated immediately upon automatic fire detection system trouble and fire indications. The horn’s audible level shall be suitable for the ambient noise conditions of the space in which it is installed.

436.3 In-Port Alarm and Monitoring System

An in-port vessel alarm and monitoring system shall be provided for use during periods in port to simplify watch procedures. This system shall include alarms for bilge, fire, power loss and refrigeration loss. The system shall have a viewable monitoring panel in the Mess and off-ship remote paging capability.

436.4 Machinery Ventilation Shutdown System

The Contractor shall provide and install remote shutdown of the machinery ventilation systems and fire dampers as required by regulations. Ventilation shutdown shall be operable through the IMAC system and at the fire control station (pilothouse). Separate shutdowns shall be provided for the engine room and the other ventilation systems.


436.5 Rudder and Thruster Angle Indicator Systems

The Contractor shall provide and install rudder and bow thruster angle indicator systems with dial indicators at each of the following control stations:

• Pilothouse 915

920

925

930

o Centerline forward

o Starboard bridge wing

o Port bridge wing


• Machinery Control Station

436.6 Tank Level Monitoring System

Remote tank level indicating systems of a type designed for marine service shall be provided to serve the fuel oil tanks, ballast tanks, oily water holding tank, sewage holding tank, potable water tanks and all other oil tanks.

Tank level indication and high/low level alarms for all tanks shall be displayed in the IMAC system. Fuel oil storage tanks shall also have level displays and high level alarms at the transfer manifolds.

All tank level alarms and level switches shall be provided with a built-in adjustable time delay to avoid inadvertent nuisance alarms caused by tank fluid sloshing in heavy seas.

Remote tank level indicating systems of a type designed for marine service shall be provided to serve the following tanks: Table 400-7. Remote Tank Level Indicating Systems

QTY Tank Type IMAC Alarm (see Table 400-6)10 Fuel Oil Storage High-High/High/Low Levels 6 Seawater Ballast High/Low Levels 1 Oily Water Holding High/Low Levels 2 Sewage Holding High Level 2 Potable Water Storage Low Level 2 Fuel Oil Day High-High/High/Low Levels 1 Waste Oil High/Low Level 1 Lube Oil High-High/High/Low Levels

Tank level indication and high/low level alarms for all tanks shall be displayed in the IMAC system. Fuel oil storage tanks shall also have level displays and high level alarms at the transfer manifolds.

935


All tank level alarms and level switches shall be provided with a built-in adjustable time delay to avoid inadvertent nuisance alarms caused by tank fluid sloshing in heavy seas.

Level switches shall be float type, Gems series LS-800, with intrinsically-safe relays as required. Local monitoring equipment shall be Gems series 163000 digital bargraph display receiver(s).

940

945

950

955

960

965

970

436.7 Bilge High Level Alarms

A bilge high level alarm system shall be arranged to detect an excessive rise of water in the bilges or bilge wells of the compartments listed below.

• Trunk (3-6-0) • Trunk (3-8-0) • Trunk (3-16-0) • Void (3-16-3) • Void (3-16-4) • Void (3-23-3) • Void (3-23-4) • Trunk (3-25-0) • Trunk (3-28-0) • Void (3-28-1) • Void (3-28-2) • Bow Thruster Room (2-2-0) • Transducer Room (3-12-0) • Engine Room (2-18-0) • Propulsion Motor Room (2-23-0) • Winch Room (2-28-0) • Science Stores (2-28-1) • Steering Gear Room (2-32-0)

There shall be at least two water level sensors in each compartment to detect high levels of water in the bilges at various angles of heel or trim. These sensors shall be the float type, with protective covers or housings. The level sensors shall activate high level alarms in the IMAC system.

Bilge level float switches shall be Gems Sensors, Model LS-270.

436.8 Audible and Visual Indicators

Emergency alarm systems shall have permanently installed audible and visible alarms complying with NFPA 72 (1999 or 2002 edition).

437 AUTOMATIC IDENTIFICATION SYSTEM

An approved, self-contained, AIS system shall be provided. The AIS shall incorporate a standard VHF transceiver and GPS system.


The AIS shall be a Kongsberg Model AIS 200.

438 INTEGRATED BRIDGE SYSTEM 975

980

985

990

995

1000

438.1 General

The vessel shall be outfitted with a fully approved integrated bridge system (IBS), Kongsberg K-bridge, conforming to the requirements of the ABS Guide for Bridge Design and Navigation Equipment/Systems (NIBS). NIBS certification is not required.

The IBS shall integrate the propulsion machinery controls, the control/monitoring functions, and the navigation instrumentation, in an ergonomically correct configuration to maximize the effective utilization of the installed equipment, with appropriate interfaces to the IMAC system.

The IBS shall include 19" flat screen displays at each conning station to display navigation data, required steering and propulsion data, and alarms on operator selected data display graphic pages. Power supplies, internal power distribution, and UPSs shall be included as required.

The system shall be designed for redundancy and resistance to vibration, dampness and humidity in consideration of the vessel’s operating areas.

438.2 Main Navigation Station

The control console located forward on centerline in the pilothouse shall be the main navigation station. This station shall contain the following:

• Vessel controls for propulsion motor(s), steering, bow thruster, dynamic positioning and integrated (joystick) controls.

• Integrated bridge system as required for ABS NIBS notation.

• Navigation and other light controls.

• Electronic navigation systems.

• Certain interior and exterior communication systems.

• Centralized machinery control and monitoring system shall be located in the vicinity.

• Other navigation aids as required.


438.3 Aft Control Station

The Aft Control Station on the 01 deck shall be a second navigation station primarily used during science operations on the after weather decks. This station shall contain the following: 1005

1010

1015

1020

1025

• Vessel controls for propulsion motors, steering/rudder control, bow thruster, dynamic positioning and integrated (joy stick) controls.

• Winch wire monitoring system.

• Certain interior and exterior communication systems.

• Control and indication for all science weight handling equipment and science winches.

438.4 Bridge Wing Consoles

The port and starboard bridge wing stations shall contain vessel controls for propulsion motor(s), steering, bow thruster controls, gyrocompass repeaters, speed log displays, and interior communications.

439 CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION SYSTEM (CCTV)

The closed circuit television system shall be integrated with the Hose-McCann ICP system described in Section 433. All cameras shall have remote pan-tilt-zoom controls. The location of all cameras shall be approved by the Owner. Monitors and control stations shall be located at the aft control station, pilothouse and computer lab.

The system shall be equipped with channel selection, multiple channel viewing and view identification capability. The system shall have continuous-loop, 1 hour, DVR recording capability. The surveillance monitors shall be 17" flat screen, LCDs with up to sixteen screen display, or any camera single image display capability. The signal feed from the science system shall also output to the audio/video network.

Cameras shall be located to view science working spaces and weather decks. Additionally cameras shall be placed to monitor machinery spaces and vessel access points. Approximately 20 cameras are required, located to meet the following:

Exterior

• Top of pilothouse, 04 deck, CL Frame 10, view of foredeck 1030

1035

• 03 deck aft view of 02 weather deck and boats

• 01 deck Frame 28 with view of port side of vessel and boat launching/retrieval operations

• Top of A-frame, view of water

• 01 deck inboard of uptakes, view of exterior winches and overside handling system


• 01 deck starboard side Frame 19, view of gangway

• Main deck starboard side, view of overside handling system down to the water interface

• Main deck with view of aft working deck

Interior – one camera per space unless otherwise noted 1040

1045

• Steering Gear Room

• Winch Room with view of sheaves, winch drum, and levelwind head (two cameras)

• Propulsion Motor Room (two cameras)

• Engine Room (two cameras)

• Bow Thruster Room

• Emergency Generator Room.

The machinery space cameras shall enable the pilothouse and engineering crew to view the engineering spaces for patrol assistance.

Cameras shall enable vessel’s personnel to view the exterior and interior access areas and routes for security purposes. Cameras shall NOT be located in the lounge/mess or any accommodation spaces.

1050

1055

1060

1065

1070

439.1 Cameras and Equipment

Cameras shall be as provided by Hose McCann, with IP control system and built-in digital motion detectors.

Cameras shall be a color network camera directly connected to either digital or analog devices (either by setting an IP address and connect it to an ethernet terminal for monitoring and control from a personal computer or by using the analog video out to connect to a conventional monitoring system using coaxial cable). The camera shall capture natural images at entryways, near windows, and in other locations with harsh contrasts between light and dark; automatically store images in response to inputs from built-in digital motion detectors and external sensor alarms; start a surveillance recorder; operate with only 0.8 lx (0.08 fc) of available light in color mode and 0.1 Lx (0.01 fc) in black and white; have a day/night switching function that automatically switches to black-and-white recording when available light is low; support 24-hour surveillance; bed designed for monitoring over a WAN or over the internet.

Exterior camera housings shall be heated and equipped with a blower (or defroster) and sun shield, and shall be rated for the marine environment. Interior housings, if required, shall be tamper-proof. Camera housings shall have pan and tilt capability.

All equipment shall operate with 120V, 60Hz, single-phase (transformers or rectifiers may be required). Cameras may operate on power over ethernet (PoE), if applicable.


441 EXTERIOR COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS

441.2 General

All equipment that is required by the regulatory bodies and SOLAS regulations, as well as the equipment described herein, shall be provided and installed. Each piece of equipment shall be installed according to the manufacturer’s recommendations. 1075

1080

1085

1090

1095

1100

All equipment shall be FCC type approved, and located in the pilothouse unless specifically indicated otherwise.

441.3 GMDSS

An exterior communication system shall be provided and installed in accordance with GMDSS Sea Area A3 requirements, with INMARSAT equipment. The GMDSS suite shall be Furuno model RC1815. The following additional equipment shall be provided and installed as part of the GMDSS suite:

• A Navtex receiver, Furuno NX-700P, in the vicinity of the communications section of the pilothouse forward console.

• Three (3) IMO GMDSS-approved portable VHF radios, with battery chargers.

• At least one (1) 406 MHz EPIRB and one INMARSAT, L-Band (1.6 GHz) EPIRB, both with remote activation capability.

• Two (2) 9 GHz SART radar transponders, as required by regulatory bodies.

• One (1) distress panel installed at the conning position. This panel shall contain one single button which, when pressed, initiates a distress alert using all radio communication installations required on board for that purpose. The panel shall clearly and visually indicate whenever the button has been pressed. Means shall be provided to prevent inadvertent activation of the button.

• One (1) distress alarm panel installed at the conning position. The distress alarm panel shall provide visual and aural indication of any distress alert or alerts received on board and shall also indicate through which radio communication service the distress alerts have been received.

Information on the vessel’s position shall be continuously and automatically provided to all relevant radio communication equipment to be included in the initial distress alert when the button on the distress panel is pressed.

• Long range identification and tracking (LRIT) equipment to meet 33 CFR 169.


441.4 Radio Equipment

In addition to the radio equipment required for GMDSS Sea Area A3, to satisfy the bridge-to-bridge requirements of the FCC and provide flexibility in local communications (tugs, shore, etc.), the following radio equipment shall be provided and installed: 1105

1110

1115

1120

1125

1130

1135

• Two (2) 25-watt marine VHF-DSC radios, c/w 6 dB gain antennas (Furuno FM-8500).

• Two (2) commercial VHF aircraft scanners, operating in the 118-136.975 MHz frequency range, shall be provided and installed. The scanners shall be II Morrow Apollo SL40, VHF transceiver. The scanners shall be configured to interface with the vessel’s GPS system, and include National Weather Service channels, stand-by frequency monitoring, built-in, two-place voice-activated intercom, and 16-channel memory.

• One INMARSAT installation with a minimum of 128kB/s high-speed option, AFRTS RED, receiver, dual ID, and PABX (RJ-11) interface.

• A cellular telephone connection with PABX (RJ-11) interface.

• Iridium satellite telephone with SSAS option and data and PABX (RJ-11) interfaces.

451 SURFACE SEARCH RADARS

451.1 General

The radar installation shall comply with SOLAS and other regulatory agencies. Two complete radar systems shall be provided:

• One 25 kW X-Band radar system shall be a Kongsberg with ARPA capabilities, 6' antenna, turning unit, bulkhead-mounted TX/RX unit, and a 23" color flat-screen display.

• One 30 kW S-Band radar system shall be a similar Kongsberg complete with 12' antenna, turning unit, bulkhead-mounted TX/RX unit, a 23" color flat-screen display, and interswitch unit.

Scanners shall be installed in the most advantageous positions determined by the antenna arrangement. The monitors shall be mounted in the pilothouse navigation console. The bulkhead-mounted TX/RX units shall be located in the pilothouse.

The radars shall accept inputs from the gyrocompass, the speed log and the differential GPS system.

The systems shall be integrated via an interswitch unit. The navigation radar and ECDIS (described below) shall be compatible and shall be tightly integrated in functionality. Correlation of AIS and ARPA targets shall be performed by the radar and ECDIS. All targets shall have the same reference designation on both the ECDIS and the radar displays so that there is no confusion on target identification for the operator. The radar plotting


system shall have the capability of operating in both the sea and the ground stabilized mode. 1140

1145

1150

1155

1160

1165

1170

The radar systems shall also provide the following features:

• Radar control keyboards mounted within comfortable reach of the navigation station.

• Remote trackball operation from the armrests of the navigation station.

• Multiple means of data communication (NMEA, MITS or PICIES Ethernet) as required for communication with other navigation equipment.

• Outputs of ARPA tracked target data to the ECDIS and voyage data recorder.

• ARPA capability to track targets respectively at relative speeds of up to 100 knots.

• 11 range scales (0.125 – 96 nm).

• Manual and automatic clutter suppression.

• Communication link to the ECDIS for receiving and displaying chart and/or route data (radar overlay).

• Remote control of autopilot in heading, course and track control modes.

• Electrical supply from a UPS.

The ability to view slave displays of the radars shall be provided in the labs.

451.2 ECDIS

A complete type-approved (with certificate) electronic chart display and information system (ECDIS) shall be provided as part of the navigation suite. The ECDIS shall be a Kongsberg K-ECDIS station, complete with computer core, 23" color monitor (installed in the integrated bridge system console), power conditioning/UPS equipment and capability to interface with the radar, gyrocompass, autopilot, DGPS, speed log, echo sounder and anemometer. All required electronic charts for the delivery route and expected areas of operation shall be included.

The approved ECDIS chart system shall also provide the following features:

• Variable brilliance and contrast controls at each display.

• Trackball control mounted on the armrest of the navigation chair closest to the display.

• Auto sensing control switch for trackball control.

• Vessel’s information display including: wind speed and direction, vessel speed and heading, water depth, thruster steering position, DGPS position and course-made-good, and time/date.

• Universal chart manager, capable of displaying type-approved IMO ECDIS charts as well as CM-93 vector charts from C-Map and ARCS or Seafarer raster charts.


• Group alarms from the IMAC system.

• Navtex interface capability. 1175

1180

1185

1190

• Voyage recording and replay.

• Track control steering capability. The combined ECDIS and autopilot systems shall ensure that the vessel automatically follows the planned route in any type of waters by providing automatic adjustment of the steering in relation to the planned route, both on straight course and during turns from one course leg to another.

• ARPA target data receiving/display capability.

• Capability to transmit and receive data transmission on two levels (NMEA and Ethernet or equivalent).

493 SCIENTIFIC INFORMATION SYSTEM (SIS)

493.1 General

A modern and expandable audio/video network shall be provided for spaces on the vessel, including labs, deck areas, van locations, scientific instrument locations, bridge, masts, machinery control station, offices, common areas and staterooms. The number of terminals and spaces served is listed in Table 400-8.

Table 400-8. SIS Terminal Locations

Space Designation Audio/Video Terminals HOLD Accommodations (7 Staterooms) 1 each MCS & Elec. Room 1 Winch Room 1 MAIN DECK Lounge 1 Accommodations (1 Stateroom) 1 each Hospital 1 Computer Lab 4 Main Lab 4 Hydro/Wet Lab 4 ET Shop 1 Transducer Tube (serves aft working deck) 1

Van Hookups 1 per van 01 DECK Accommodations (8 Staterooms) 1 each Aft Control Room 1 03 DECK Pilothouse 2 (1 in chart area) All cable and connections shall be clearly labeled using an IT industry standard protocol. SIS audio/video system shall be integrated with the video/audio system ouotlined in Section 493.2.


493.2 Video/Audio Network 1195

1200

1205

1210

The video/audio network shall be composed of items and equipment integrated with the scientific information system (network) and interior communications platform (ICP) described in Section 433. Video is routed from the CCTV cameras, or future entertainment system, connected to the ICP nodes, through to video/audio outlets (Hose-McCann part no. N1F) located as indicated in Section 433. Audio may also be routed though the PA system or dial telephone system, both integral to ICP. Additional audio may be provided via the future entertainment system.

494 METROLOGICAL REQUIREMENTS

An approved weather facsimile and antenna system shall be provided. The facsimile shall be a Furuno FAX-410/AC Weatherfax.

The Contractor shall provide and install two (2) Young Model 85000 ultrasonic anemometers. The sensors shall be located on the yardarms and indicators located in the pilothouse (master), aft control station, computer lab, and at the chart table. The indicator/display units shall be Young Model 26800 Meteorological Displays.

The anemometer system shall be capable of displaying relative wind direction and speed in knots, MPH, km/h and m/s (selectable). The anemometer shall be capable of providing inputs to other navigation systems as required, the DP system, and the vessel’s information system.


SECTION 500 MACHINERY

TABLE OF CONTENTS

500 MACHINERY GENERAL ........................................................................................................1 500.1 Vibration and Noise Control Features...........................................................................................1 503 PUMPS.........................................................................................................................................2 503.1 Selection of Equipment.................................................................................................................2 503.2 Centrifugal Pumps ........................................................................................................................3 503.3 Positive Displacement Pumps.......................................................................................................3 503.4 Machine Guarding.........................................................................................................................3 504 INSTRUMENT AND INSTRUMENT BOARDS ....................................................................4 504.1 General..........................................................................................................................................4 504.2 Instrumentation .............................................................................................................................4 504.3 Gage Boards..................................................................................................................................5 504.4 Tank Level Indicators ...................................................................................................................5 504.5 Shaft Revolution Counters ............................................................................................................5 505 PIPING ........................................................................................................................................5 506 VENTS, SOUNDINGS AND OVERFLOWS ARRANGEMENT ..........................................6 508 INSULATION FOR MACHINERY AND PIPING .................................................................6 509 THERMAL INSULATION AND ACOUSTIC ABSORPTIVE TREATMENT FOR

DUCTS AND TRUNKS..............................................................................................................7 509.1 Sound Isolation .............................................................................................................................7 509.2 Acoustic Treatment and Insulation ...............................................................................................7 509.3 Thermal Insulation ........................................................................................................................8 512 HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) ...................................9 512.1 General..........................................................................................................................................9 512.2 Accommodation Spaces HVAC..................................................................................................10 512.3 Lab Spaces HVAC......................................................................................................................10 512.4 Engine Room Ventilation............................................................................................................11 512.5 Propulsion Motor Room..............................................................................................................11 512.6 Auxiliary Machinery Ventilation Systems..................................................................................12 512.7 Balancing Tests ...........................................................................................................................12 516 REFRIGERATION EQUIPMENT.........................................................................................12 516.1 Air-Conditioning Plants ..............................................................................................................12 516.2 Ship Service Refrigeration Plants ...............................................................................................13 516.3 Condenser/Receivers...................................................................................................................13 516.4 Controls.......................................................................................................................................14 521 FIREMAIN................................................................................................................................14 524 SEAWATER SERVICE SYSTEMS .......................................................................................15 524.1 Seawater Service Systems...........................................................................................................15 524.2 Ship Service Diesel Generator Seawater Cooling System ..........................................................15 524.3 Uncontaminated Scientific Seawater System..............................................................................16 524.4 Deck Incubator Seawater System................................................................................................16 528 PLUMBING, DECK DRAINS AND VENTS .........................................................................17 528.1 General........................................................................................................................................17 528.2 Interior Deck Drains....................................................................................................................18 528.3 Weather Deck Drains ..................................................................................................................18


528.4 Traps and Cleanouts....................................................................................................................19 528.5 Plumbing Vents...........................................................................................................................19 528.6 Science Drains ............................................................................................................................19 529 BILGE, BALLAST AND OILY WASTE SYSTEMS............................................................19 529.1 General........................................................................................................................................19 529.2 Ballasting/De-Ballasting .............................................................................................................20 529.3 Bilge System ...............................................................................................................................20 529.4 Flooding and Emergency De-Watering.......................................................................................21 529.5 Oily Waste System......................................................................................................................21 529.6 Waste Oil System........................................................................................................................21 531 SHIP FRESH WATER.............................................................................................................22 531.1 Fresh Water Overview ................................................................................................................22 531.2 Fresh Water Production ..............................................................................................................22 531.3 Fresh Water Loading...................................................................................................................23 531.4 Fresh Water Storage and Transfer...............................................................................................23 532 POTABLE WATER SYSTEM ................................................................................................23 532.1 General........................................................................................................................................23 532.2 Cold Potable Water .....................................................................................................................24 532.3 Hot Water Service Subsystem.....................................................................................................24 532.4 Sanitary Flushing Water..............................................................................................................24 532.5 Deionizer Feed Tank...................................................................................................................24 533 FRESHWATER COOLING SYSTEMS ................................................................................25 533.1 Diesel Generator Set Cooling......................................................................................................25 533.2 Emergency Generator Set Cooling..............................................................................................25 533.3 Propulsion Machinery Freshwater Cooling System....................................................................25 534 WASTE HEAT TRANSFER SYSTEMS................................................................................25 541 FUEL OIL SYSTEM ................................................................................................................26 541.1 General........................................................................................................................................26 541.2 Tanks...........................................................................................................................................26 541.3 Fuel Fill and Transfer System.....................................................................................................27 541.4 Transfer Pumps ...........................................................................................................................27 541.5 Fueling/Transfer Piping ..............................................................................................................27 541.6 Purification System.....................................................................................................................27 541.7 Service System............................................................................................................................28 541.8 Overflow Piping System .............................................................................................................28 542 LUBRICATING OIL SYSTEMS ............................................................................................28 542.1 General........................................................................................................................................28 542.2 Clean Lube Oil Storage Tank......................................................................................................28 542.3 Lubricating Oil Fill and Transfer Systems ..................................................................................29 542.4 Lubricating Oil Service Systems.................................................................................................29 551 COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEMS .............................................................................................29 551.1 General........................................................................................................................................29 551.2 Receivers.....................................................................................................................................30 551.3 Starting Air Compressors............................................................................................................30 551.4 Ship Service Air System .............................................................................................................30 551.5 Science Air System .....................................................................................................................30 555 FIREFIGHTING.......................................................................................................................31 555.1 Portable Fire Extinguishers .........................................................................................................31 555.2 Fixed CO2 Extinguishing Systems ..............................................................................................31 555.3 Water Mist System......................................................................................................................32 555.4 Galley Hood Protection...............................................................................................................32


555.5 Emergency Equipment Lockers ..................................................................................................32 556 HYDRAULIC POWER EQUIPMENT ..................................................................................32 561 STEERING SYSTEM...............................................................................................................33 562 COMBUSTION AIR SYSTEMS.............................................................................................33 562.1 Ship Service Diesel Generators...................................................................................................33 562.2 Emergency Generator .................................................................................................................33 562.3 Incinerator ...................................................................................................................................33 562.4 Combustion Exhaust Systems .....................................................................................................34 565 ROLL STABILIZATION TANK............................................................................................34 568 BOW THRUSTER....................................................................................................................35 570 VENTS, FILLS, AND SOUNDS..............................................................................................35 570.1 General........................................................................................................................................35 570.2 Sounding .....................................................................................................................................35 570.3 Vent Pipes ...................................................................................................................................36 570.4 Vent Terminals............................................................................................................................36 573 HANDLING SYSTEMS ...........................................................................................................36 573.1 General........................................................................................................................................36 573.2 Cranes .........................................................................................................................................37 573.3 Oceanographic Winches .............................................................................................................37 573.4 Over-the-Side/Stern Handling Gear ............................................................................................38 573.5 CTD Handling System................................................................................................................39 573.6 Control Stations ..........................................................................................................................39 581 ANCHOR SYSTEMS ...............................................................................................................39 581.1 Anchor Windlass.........................................................................................................................39 581.2 Anchors.......................................................................................................................................39 581.3 Hawse Pipes ................................................................................................................................39 581.4 Anchor Chains ............................................................................................................................40 581.5 Chain Lockers and Chain Pipes ..................................................................................................40 582 MOORING AND TOWING ....................................................................................................40 583 BOATS, BOAT HANDLING, AND STOWAGE...................................................................41 585 LIFERAFTS ..............................................................................................................................41 593 POLLUTION CONTROL SYSTEMS....................................................................................41 593.1 General........................................................................................................................................41 593.2 Sewage System ...........................................................................................................................41 593.3 Solid Waste .................................................................................................................................42 593.4 Incinerator ...................................................................................................................................42

Page 500-iii Regional Class Research Vessel 12 November 2008 Contractor’s Ship Specifications, Rev. B DI-001_Specs\Outline Specifications\Rev B\500b.doc

SECTION 500 MACHINERY

5

10

15

20

500 MACHINERY GENERAL

500.1 Vibration and Noise Control Features

To meet the noise and vibration requirements of Section 073, rotating, vibrating and reciprocating equipment shall be mounted on vibration isolators, as specified below. Mounts shall be selected for the equipment item following the mount manufacturer’s recommendations for that specific equipment item.

The resiliently mounted equipment on RCRV is listed in Table 500-1. The vibration isolators specified in the table shall be provided by Christie & Grey (Tonbridge UK). Table 500-1 specifies isolator selections based on equipment weight provided during Phase I. The shipyard or its noise control consultant shall confirm the equipment weight will be near 80% of the full load of the specified vibration isolator for each piece of equipment. Mount selections shall be revised if equipment weight changes.

The noise control consultant shall perform a six degree-of-freedom (6DOF) analysis for each piece of equipment listed in Table 500-1 to confirm that none of the six natural frequencies will coincide with operational frequencies of the mounted equipment.

Table 500-1. Resilient Mounting Requirements

Machinery Name

Total Qty on Vessel

Qty Mount

per Unit

Christie & Grey

Mount Type

Christie & Grey

Model Number

Sewage/Gray Water Pumps 1 4 Cushyfloat 17/1600/1/45 Freshwater Cooling Pumps 2 4 Cushyfloat 17/1600/1/45 Chilled Water Pumps 2 4 Cushyfloat 17/1600/1/45 Potable Water Supply Pumps 2 4 Cushyfloat 17/1600/1/45 Waste Heat Recovery Pumps 2 4 Cushyfloat 17/1600/1/45 Engine Room Supply and Return Fans 2 4 Cushyfloat 17/1600/1/45 Air Compressors 2 4 Cushyfloat 17/1600/1/55 Seawater Service Pumps 2 4 Cushyfloat 17/1600/1/55 Engine Room Supply Fan 1 4 Cushyfloat 17/1600/1/65 480/208V-120V SS Transformer 2 4 Cushyfloat 17/1609/1/45 Steering Gear 2 4 Cushyfloat 17/1609/1/45 208/120V SS Switchboard 1 4 Cushyfloat 17/1609/1/55 Harmonic Filters Ship Service Power 2 4 Cushyfloat 17/1609/1/55 Fuel Oil Purifiers 1 6 Cushyfloat 17/1609/1/55 Vacuum Collection Unit 1 4 Cushyfloat 17/1609/1/55 Marine Sanitation Device (MSD) 1 6 Cushyfloat 17/1609/1/55


Main Switchboard 480V 1 6 Cushyfloat 17/1657/1/55 Drive Motor Power Converter 2 4 Cushyfloat 17/1657/1/55 AC Chillers 2 6 Cushyfloat 17/1657/1/55 Propulsion Motor Transformer 2 4 Cushyfloat 17/1657/1/55 Propulsion Motors 2 6 Cushyfloat 17/1657/1/65 Ship Service Diesel Generator 3 6 Genflex H10.103.55 Ship Service Diesel Generator (SSDG) Double Stage 3 6 Genflex H10.103.70

The diesel generator mounts are further described in Section 233. Vibration-sensitive elec-trical and electronic equipment shall be installed on resilient mounts as recommended by the equipment manufacturers.

25

30

35

40

45

All piping serving equipment listed in Table 500-1 shall be mounted to ship structure with isolated pipe clamps that includes a minimum ½" thick rubber insert made from rubber with 40 to 45 Shore A Durometer. All pipe clamps shall be attached to stiffened areas of the vessel. No pipe clamps shall be located to the center of bulkhead or deck plating.

503 PUMPS

503.1 Selection of Equipment

Pumps shall be of a high commercial marine standard, built in accordance with the standards of the Hydraulic Institute and shall meet all regulatory requirements.

The number of different types of pumps shall be minimized. Pumps for the same service and capacity shall be identical.

Pumps of identical design shall have the same rotation and be to the same hand.

Pumps for fuel and lube oil shall be positive displacement type.

Pumps in seawater systems shall be all non-ferrous and non-aluminum.

All pumps handling oil or sewage shall be provided with drip pans. Drip pans shall be fabricated from 1/4-inch steel plate with a 2-inch high coaming, an approximately 6-inch wide open area around the pump base, and a 1/2-inch NPT plugged drain.

Each pump shall have a pressure gage connected on the discharge side, and a compound pressure gage on the suction side. Suitable provision shall be made for using a portable tachometer to determine the speed of motor-driven pumps.

Where possible, pumps shall be balanced hydraulically. All pumps shall be equipped with suitable thrust bearings to absorb any thrust that may occur during operation.

Pumps shall be fitted with local start/stop controls for maintenance purposes.


Relief valves for positive displacement pump discharges shall be located to protect both pump and system from overpressure. 50

55

60

65

70

75

80

503.2 Centrifugal Pumps

Pumps shall be selected to operate at or near the maximum efficiency point on the head-capacity curve and shall have non-overloading power characteristics. The motor horsepower rating shall at least equal the maximum power requirement of the pump at rated speed.

Unless otherwise specified, centrifugal pumps shall be vertically mounted and close-coupled. All coupled pumps shall be directly connected to drivers through flexible couplings for horizontal units, and flexible or rigid couplings for vertical pumps.

Close-coupled motor driven pumps shall be suitable for either horizontal or vertical installation. Each pump/motor set shall be mounted on a common shaft, fully protected against wear and corrosion. Suction piping connected to this type of pump shall be arranged so that the impeller can be removed without disturbing the suction cut-out valve.

All centrifugal pumps shall be designed and built in accordance with ASTM F998.

Attached pumps furnished with diesel engines shall be of the manufacturers’ standard marine models, suitable for the services intended.

503.3 Positive Displacement Pumps

Preferably, pumps shall be direct-coupled to motors; however, where necessary, they may be provided with reduction gears, flexible couplings and supports for drives. The entire unit shall be a rigid assembly to ensure close and permanent alignment. Where the pump is internally lubricated by the fluid pumped, wearing parts shall be of design and materials such that the pump may be operated safely when pumping liquids without lubricating characteristics.

Casings shall be designed so that operating parts may be dismantled without disturbing the suction or discharge connections. All connecting suction parts requiring alignment shall be taper-doweled.

Attached pumps furnished with diesel engines shall be of the manufacturers’ standard marine models, suitable for the services intended.

503.4 Machine Guarding

Removable guards shall be provided for all rotating machinery, power-transmission machinery, and other machinery where necessary to prevent personnel from contacting moving parts. Equipment hazards to be guarded shall include, but are not limited to, flywheels, couplings between motors and pumps, chain and sprockets, and V belt drives.


Guards shall be bolted to the machine bases or foundations utilizing corrosion resistant studs, bolts, nyloc type nuts and washers.

504 INSTRUMENT AND INSTRUMENT BOARDS 85

90

95

100

105

110

115

504.1 General

Instrumentation shall be provided for the proper and safe operation of machinery/ equipment and systems under normal and emergency operating conditions.

Instrumentation shall have scales identified using U.S. Customary Units (also known as ‘English’ or ‘Standard’ units).

Local instrumentation furnished by manufacturers integral with machinery and equipment shall be the manufacturer’s standard.

Failure of any instrument shall not cause the system to be inoperable; for example, gage piping shall have root valves and thermometers shall have thermowells. Gage piping materials and installation guidelines shall be in accordance with ASTM F721.

Instrument accuracy from source to readout shall be within ±2% of the full-scale range. Instrumentation shall be calibrated and fitted with labels identifying the date of calibration.

504.2 Instrumentation

Direct mounted dial thermometers shall have at least a 3-inch diameter dial size. Remote mounted dial thermometers shall have at least a 4-1/2 inch diameter dial size.

Remote-reading thermometers shall be installed wherever the location of a direct-reading type prevents it from being easily accessible for reading and replacement.

Remote-reading thermometers shall include a manually adjustable, red-colored pointer to be set at the maximum normal operating temperature for the applicable system. Generally, thermometers shall be selected with the system’s normal operating temperature within the middle third of the scale’s full range.

Pressure, vacuum, differential pressure, and compound gages shall have at least a 4-1/2 inch diameter dial size. Pressure gages shall have a manually adjustable, red-colored pointer to be set at the maximum (or minimum) normal operating pressure, as appropriate for the system. Generally, pressure gages shall be selected with the system’s normal operating pressure within the middle one-third of the scale’s full range.

A pressure snubber shall be included with all instruments that are susceptible to shocks and pulsations.

See Section 436 for details of the Main Control System Console (MCSC) that is located in the Machinery Control Station and Electrical Room.


504.3 Gage Boards

Gage boards shall be provided to consolidate instrumentation throughout the machinery spaces, particularly where several instruments are located in close proximity to, and associated with, a given piece of equipment. Gage board instrumentation shall have a mirrored arrangement when serving two units and an identical arrangement when serving three or more units.

120

125

130

135

All exposed and visible portions of instrumentation and gage boards shall provide a uniform and coordinated appearance. Gage boards containing electrical devices shall provide for drip-proof protection of the electrical devices. Instruments shall be clearly visible from a standing position in an access walkway.

Gage board material and installation guidelines shall be in accordance with ASTM F707.

504.4 Tank Level Indicators

A tank level indicating system shall be provided, as described in Section 436.

504.5 Shaft Revolution Counters

Shaft revolution counters shall be provided for each propulsion shaft and provide input to the machinery control system.

A shaft revolution counter shall be provided for each propulsion shaft.

Counters shall provide continuous operation with rollover at not less than 10,000,000 revolutions.

505 PIPING

Piping systems shall comply with the following requirements:

• Piping Materials

• Piping materials shall be in accordance with ASTM F1155 and the material schedule shown on the Auxiliary Systems Report, Ref. 14.

• CuNi piping shall be used for all seawater systems, except for the scientific seawater system.

140

• PVC piping shall be used for all sections of the scientific seawater system.

• Hydraulic piping, tubing and fittings exposed to weather shall be CRES, Type 316.

• Fluid Velocities

• Velocity of water in a constantly running system shall be less than 12 ft/s. 145

• Velocity of saltwater or brine shall not exceed 12 ft/s and )(5 inchesV Insideθ≤ .


• Velocity of seawater/brine at inlet nozzles & within heat exchangers shall be less than 6 ft/s.

• Fuel system velocity shall have a max velocity of 15 ft/s, except for taking on bunkers, which shall be 25 ft/s. 150

• System Components

• Pumps, heat exchangers, valves and fittings shall be non-ferrous/non-aluminum.

• Butterfly valves shall not be used.

• Pump rotating elements, valve trim and strainer baskets may be CRES.

• Overboard discharges shall be located on the port side above the deepest load waterline.

155

160

165

170

175

180

506 VENTS, SOUNDINGS AND OVERFLOWS ARRANGEMENT

All tanks shall be fitted with vents and sounding tubes. Section 570 describes the requirements for vents, soundings and overflows.

508 INSULATION FOR MACHINERY AND PIPING

In general, piping insulation shall be applied as follows:

• All piping running in the accommodation spaces in the pilothouse shall be insulated with thermal or anti-sweat insulation.

• All piping systems with surface temperatures over 125˚F shall be thermally insulated to protect personnel.

• All piping systems adversely affected by heat transfer to their surroundings shall be thermally insulated.

Unless necessary to meet one of the three requirements stated above, insulation shall be applied to the following piping systems using materials and methods approved by ASTM F683:

• Machinery Exhaust Systems. Thermal insulation on all surfaces over 125˚F. • Chilled Water System: Thermal insulation on all piping. • Firemain System: Anti-sweat insulation through the pilothouse. • Uncontaminated Seawater/Incubator Systems: Thermal insulation on all piping. • General Seawater Systems: Anti-sweat insulation through the pilothouse. • Plumbing, Interior, and Deck Drain System: Anti-sweat insulation through the

pilothouse. • Sanitary Flushing System: Anti-sweat insulation through the pilothouse. • Bilge and Ballast System: No insulation. • Freshwater Cooling Systems: Thermal insulation on all surfaces over 125˚F. • Hot Potable Water System: Thermal insulation on all piping.


• Cold Potable Water System: Anti-sweat insulation on all piping. • Waste Heat Recovery System: Thermal insulation on all piping. • Fuel Oil Systems: No insulation. • Lube Oil Systems: No insulation. 185

190

195

200

205

210

• Hydraulic Oil Systems: No insulation. • Compressed Air Systems: Anti-sweat insulation through the pilothouse. • Vents and Overflows: Anti-sweat insulation through the pilothouse. • MSD and Sewage Transfer System: No insulation. • Oily Water Separator System: No insulation. • Refrigeration Systems: Thermal insulation on all piping.

Protective sheet metal lagging shall be installed wherever necessary to protect insulation from damage. It shall also be installed where insulation can become oil- or water-soaked, and in areas of heavy traffic. A surface treatment or covering shall be installed where necessary for the protection of personnel against cuts, abrasions or from hot surfaces.

A vapor barrier shall be applied to all insulation, as necessary, to prevent penetration of moisture. Vapor barriers shall remain intact and continuous over the areas protected by means of sealed joints and edges.

For anti-sweat and refrigerant insulated piping, clamps shall be to the exterior of the insulation on a wrap of metal lagging or isolated from the pipe by 1/8-inch thick rubber sheet.

509 THERMAL INSULATION AND ACOUSTIC ABSORPTIVE TREATMENT FOR DUCTS AND TRUNKS

509.1 Sound Isolation

All ventilation fans shall be resiliently mounted so as to isolate the units from ductwork and structure. Resilient mounts shall be selected in accordance with the requirements of Section 073.

To decrease transmission of noise through ducts, and to allow for relative motion between the resiliently mounted ventilation fans and the ducts, flexible joints shall be installed at the suction and discharge of all ventilation fans and blowers. Flexible duct connections shall be flanged rubber spools of 40 durometer hardness maximum.

509.2 Acoustic Treatment and Insulation

• Medium Velocity Ductwork (<3000 fpm air velocity): Acoustic treatment and insulation treatments shall be provided in the ventilation system as required to limit noise in the accommodation spaces to the levels specified in Section 073. Internal duct lining shall consist of 1-inch or 2-inch fibrous glass insulation, as appropriate, faced with reinforced mylar exposed to the air flow. The treatment shall be

215


covered on the air side with #16 USSG perforated sheet metal. As alternates, commercial duct silencers, acoustic weather louvers, and/or approved sound trap boxes at diffuser terminals may be installed. 220

• High Velocity Ductwork (>3000 fpm air velocity): Ductwork for high velocity systems shall be dual wall, with 15mm of acoustic insulation provided between the two walls. The insulation shall consist of fibrous glass insulation faced with reinforced mylar exposed to the air flow. The inner duct wall shall be perforated.

509.3 Thermal Insulation 225

All insulation materials shall conform to the requirements of the regulatory bodies.

All parts of heating, ventilation and air-conditioning systems (including equipment, access covers, flanges and recirculation ducts) shall be covered with the type of insulation required to prevent sweating and external heat transfer, as follows:

• Air-Conditioning Systems (including return air): Insulate, vapor seal, and lag completely.

230

• All Ventilation Supply Systems (concealed or exposed): Insulate, except as noted in bullet #4, below. Ducts in spaces served and serving only the same space shall be insulated in accordance with intended vessel service.

• Ventilation Exhaust Systems (concealed or exposed, that exhaust unheated spaces 235 and pass through heated spaces): Insulate. Additionally, exhausts from heat producing spaces (concealed or exposed) shall be insulated where passing through heated or air-conditioned spaces.

• Portions of all Supply, Air-Conditioning and Recirculation Systems passing through Machinery Spaces and Hooded Areas: Insulate. Additionally, they shall also be vapor sealed and lagged where required herein. Exposed ventilation ducts serving only the space in which they are located need not be insulated unless it is deemed prudent for the intended service. Trunks and ducts in the casings and uptakes shall be insulated.

240

245

250

255

Insulation on rectangular ducts carrying conditioned air shall be fibrous glass board, with minimum density of 3 lb/ft3, and with a factory-applied aluminum foil vapor barrier. Insulation on round and flat oval ducts, and on bends, shall be the same as required for rectangular ducts, except it may be a flexible type with a minimum density of 1-1/2 lb/ft3.

Air-conditioning preheaters, ducts, cooling coils and other equipment carrying chilled or recirculated air shall be completely insulated and installed with an approved vapor seal, unless condensation can be controlled by other means.

Insulation for ventilating and heating ducts in exposed areas shall be installed the same as for chilled air and recirculating ducts.

In areas where insulation may be subject to damage, protection such as galvanized metal, or light weight aluminum sheathing, or guards, shall be provided as required.


Where both thermal and acoustic insulation is applied, credit may be taken for the thermal value of the acoustic insulation.

512 HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC)

512.1 General

All-year comfort shall be provided in the accommodation spaces, labs and pilothouse by central heating, ventilation and air-conditioning systems under the environmental conditions given in Section 070 and

260

Table 500-2.

Table 500-2. HVAC Design Criteria

Criteria Cooling Season Heating Season Seawater 90°F 28°F Preheat Temperature N/A 42-50°F range A/C Labs 75°F DB, 50% relative humidity

(maximum) 70°F

A/C Scientific Stores 80°F DB, 55% relative humidity (maximum)

70°F

All other A/C spaces (including Main Control Station)

75°F DB, 55% relative humidity 70°F

T/S and Public Toilets 4 minute rate of change in air conditioned areas, and 6 minute rate of change in ventilated areas

70°F

Galley and Scullery 85°F 70°F Dry Stores 85°F 60°F Laundry 85°F 70°F Ventilated spaces and other spaces

In accordance with SNAME T&R Bulletin No. 4-16

Minimum air quantity shall not be less than 35 ft3/min/terminal or space Replenishment Air In accordance with SNAME T&R Bulletin No. 4-16 External Boundary Temperature a. 160°F (for steel boundaries),

145°F (for vertical steel boundaries)

b. Glass solar factor of 160 BTU/hr/ft2 to be used for all A/C spaces

To be used for all spaces in accordance with SNAME T&R Bulletin No. 4-16

In accommodations and lab spaces, HVAC mechanical equipment, ducts and trunks, except for terminals and thermostats, shall be located behind bulkhead linings, suspended ceilings and in fan rooms, so as not to be visible. Whenever possible, HVAC ductwork and equipment shall not adversely affect ceiling heights. The location of weather air intakes shall be carefully considered to avoid short circuiting with exhaust air outlets; to avoid tank vents, engine exhausts and other contamination sources; and to avoid injection of rain and sea spray.

265

270


The HVAC system designs shall be in accordance with SNAME T&R Bulletin No. 4-16. Air circulation shall meet shore lab standards (OSHA Regulation 29 CFR 1910.1410).

HVAC systems and controls shall be automated (i.e., shall require a minimum of operator interaction for proper operation). However, controls shall be manually adjustable to allow the vessel operating personnel to compensate for unforeseen circumstances.

275

280

285

290

295

300

305

All heating shall be electric.

Air-conditioning shall be provided by a centralized chilled water system as described in Section 516.

Convectors shall provide spot heating in toilet/shower spaces with external boundaries. Unit heaters shall provide heat for machinery spaces, other mechanically ventilated spaces, and spaces with natural supply ventilation. Unit heaters are sized assuming the ventilation fans are secured.

512.2 Accommodation Spaces HVAC

The HVAC systems serving the accommodation spaces shall be medium-velocity, terminal reheat systems with a layout as shown on the Auxiliary System Report, Ref.14. Outside make-up air shall be mixed with recirculated air, filtered, heated or cooled to a selected temperature (by single thermostat) between 55°F and 70°F, and distributed through the ventilation systems. Individual reheaters shall be provided in the ductwork to each compartment served, with adjustable bulkhead mounted thermostats for meeting the comfort requirements of the occupants. Thermostats shall be located within the compartments they control.

All the ventilation air to the hospital shall be exhausted (i.e., no recirculation).

A separate range hood (Gaylord), dishwasher hood, single exhaust fan and a dedicated ductwork system shall be provided for the galley. The range hood shall have an integral grease extractor, grease collection and firefighting system. See Section 555 for the firefighting details.

512.3 Lab Spaces HVAC

The HVAC systems serving the Main and Hydro/Wet Lab on the main deck shall be a medium-velocity terminal reheat system. Outside make-up air shall be mixed with recirculated air, filtered, heated, or cooled to a selected temperature (by single thermostat) between 55°F and 70°F, and distributed through the ventilation system. Individual reheaters shall be provided in the ductwork to each compartment served, with adjustable bulkhead mounted thermostats for meeting the comfort requirements of the occupants. Thermostats shall be located within the compartments they control.

The ventilation systems serving labs shall provide a minimum of 9 air changes per hour of air-conditioned air.


Labs shall be served by a two-level air filtration system. Standard prefilters shall be augmented with secondary HEPA filters. The HEPA filters shall have a 99.97% efficiency when tested with 0.3 micron thermally-generated particulates. 310

315

320

325

330

335

340

A total of two (2) fume hoods shall be installed; one in the Main Lab, and one in the Hydro/Wet Lab, Labconco 4' Protector Premier with vented chemical storage space. Each fume hood shall be served by a dedicated exhaust system, with fan controls for each hood at the hood location.

Balancing of the lab HVAC system shall be accomplished with the hoods off.

512.4 Engine Room Ventilation

The Engine Room shall be force ventilated with 100% outdoor air for cooling and for providing combustion air to the diesel generators.

The supply system shall consist of a two-speed fan drawing air through screened, water-excluding louvers on the 01 deck. The two speeds of the supply fan shall be full speed and half speed. Supply air shall be distributed through the Machinery Control Station via ductwork and supply terminals as shown on the Auxiliary System Report, Ref.14.

The exhaust system shall be natural exhaust up the stack discharging air through louvers on the aft side of the stack above the 01 deck.

The fans and fire dampers shall be interlocked with the fire extinguishing system and shall automatically shutdown/close upon activation of the fire extinguishing system.

Heating shall be provided by unit heaters. Unit heaters shall be sized as shown based on the ventilation system secured.

512.5 Propulsion Motor Room

The Propulsion Motor Room shall be force ventilated and exhausted with 100% outdoor air for cooling.

The supply and exhaust systems shall consist of two-speed fans drawing air through screened, water-excluding louvers on the 01 deck. Exhaust shall be through ductwork up the stack and out the aft side of the stack on the 02 deck. The two speeds of the fans shall be full speed and half speed. Supply air shall be distributed through the Machinery Control Station via ductwork and supply terminals as shown on the Auxiliary System Report, Ref. 14.

The fans and fire dampers shall be interlocked with the fire extinguishing system and shall automatically shutdown/close upon activation of the fire extinguishing system.

Heating shall be provided by unit heaters. Unit heaters shall be sized based on the ventilation system secured.


512.6 Auxiliary Machinery Ventilation Systems

The various auxiliary machinery rooms shall be force ventilated with 100% outdoor air for cooling.

The supply systems shall consist of multiple- or variable-speed fans drawing air through plenums typically located on the 01 deck and above. The supply plenums shall be fitted with screened, water-excluding louvers. Supply air shall be distributed throughout the machinery rooms via ductwork and terminals.

345

350

355

360

365

370

375

The exhaust system shall be natural.

Where installed, the fans and fire dampers shall be interlocked with the fire extinguishing systems and automatically shutdown/close upon activation of the systems.

Typically, heating shall be provided with unit heaters. Unit heaters are sized assuming the ventilation fans are secured.

512.7 Balancing Tests

All systems shall be balanced such that the delivered quantity of air to each compartment shall be ±10% of the quantity shown on the ventilation drawing in the Auxiliary Systems Report, Ref. 14.

516 REFRIGERATION EQUIPMENT

516.1 Air-Conditioning Plants

Cooling for the vessel’s air conditioning shall be provided by means of circulating fresh water from either of two water chillers (located in the Propulsion Motor Room) to the air cooling coils located in each of the vessel’s HVAC/fan rooms.

The chilled fresh water shall be circulated by one of two resiliently-mounted chilled water pumps. The pumps shall be identical, and each shall be sized for a flow rate of 130 gallons per minute against a total discharge head of 58 feet. The pumps shall be centrifugal type, Price CD150AI 2x1.5AI, and each shall be driven by a 3 HP, 3450 RPM, TEFC/IEEE45 motor. The pumps shall be vertically mounted.

The two water chilling units shall be Carrier, model 30HXC076. The units shall be identical, and each packaged unit shall be sized to provide for the complete air-conditioning system requirements. The packaged units shall include compressor, motor, condenser, receiver and water chiller on a common base. Each unit shall also include all necessary interconnecting piping, wiring and controls. The refrigerant shall be R-134A. Each compressor shall be hard mounted to a base, and the base shall be resiliently mounted onto the vessel.

All piping, valves, and controls for the chilled water system shall be provided and installed as shown in the Auxiliary Systems Report, Ref. 14 (Carrier Model 05G-037).


516.2 Ship Service Refrigeration Plants

Two identical refrigeration plants shall be installed to provide cooling for the vessel’s walk-in refrigerator and freezer. The refrigeration plants shall be packaged, skid-mounted, water-cooled condensing units, Carrier Model 05G-037, with a capacity of 2.9 tons. 380

385

390

Each packaged unit shall include a compressor and motor, pressure control switches, a relief valve, crankcase heater, low ambient pressure control, and condenser/receiver. The compressors shall be hard mounted to their skids, and the skids shall be resiliently mounted to the vessel. Each packaged unit shall also include all necessary interconnecting piping and wiring as shown in the Auxiliary Systems Report, Ref. 14. Each package shall include gages and switches mounted on remote gage boards.

The refrigeration system shall be designed so that one condensing assembly will operate during normal conditions with the second assembly for standby service. For pull-down, the compressors shall be capable of parallel operation. The refrigeration plants shall maintain the conditions given in Table 500-3 (below).

Table 500-3. Space Design Temperatures

Compartment Design Temperature Loading Temperature Chilled Stores 35°F 50°F Frozen Stores 0°F 15°F

A red indicator shall be installed on each dial thermometer for walk-in reefers to show the maximum temperature allowance for each reefer.

The refrigeration equipment shall be provided with remote monitoring capability at the Machinery Control Station (MCS). The refrigeration system shall maintain the design conditions of the boxes with one plant offline.

395

400

405

516.3 Condenser/Receivers

Two horizontal shell and straight integral finned tube, marine type, combination condenser/receivers shall be provided (one per package). They shall be designed with a fouling factor of 0.0005 ft2-hr-°F/BTU, a maximum water velocity of 6 feet per second, and a maximum pressure drop of 1.0 psi.

The condensers shall be sized for circulating cooling water of 95°F, with a condensing temperature of 105°F. The condensers shall be oversized to act as receivers for the system. Each condenser/receiver shall have adequate capacity to provide a liquid seal and to hold the entire charge of refrigerant during system pump-down.

Condenser cooling water shall be supplied from the auxiliary freshwater cooling system.

Tubes shall be of 90-10 Cu-Ni, with a minimum diameter of 5/8 inch and 0.049 inch wall thickness. Steel shall be used for the shell with bronze or 90-10 Cu-Ni for the heads and


tube sheets. Condenser heads shall be arranged so as to avoid disturbing pipe when the heads are removed.

410

415

420

425

430

435

440

516.4 Controls

The following automatic control equipment shall be provided and installed.

• Two dual pressurestats, or two sets of separate high- and low-pressure switches that are adjustable.

• Necessary controls for unloading and reduced capacity operation.

• One oil-pressure failure switch for each compressor.

• One automatic water regulating valve for each condenser.

• One liquid line king solenoid valve for each compressor.

• One liquid solenoid valve and contact maker with thermostatic element for each piece of refrigerated equipment.

• One externally adjustable thermostatic expansion valve for each piece of refrigerated equipment.

• One suction pressure regulating valve complete with pressure gage and valve in the suction line from the walk-in chillbox(es).

• Remote reading temperature gage and low temperature alarm for the walk-in chill room and freezer.

• Local reading temperature gage for each walk-in chill and freeze room.

521 FIREMAIN

The firemain system shall be provided and installed in accordance with regulatory body requirements. The fire pump shall take suction from the seawater service supply header (see Section 524), draw water through a duplex strainer, and discharge to the firemain. The firemain shall be of the “dry” type, with all piping sloping back to the pump discharge, where a drain valve shall be installed.

The fire pump shall be a centrifugal type and shall be capable of moving 170 gallons per minute against a total discharge head of 190 feet. The pump shall be an Ampco ZCH2 2x2 Nickel Aluminum Bronze (NIAB) of construction and shall be driven by a 15 HP, 3450 RPM TEFC/IEEE45 motor. The pump shall be vertically mounted in the Engine Room.

The ballast pump, located in the Propulsion Motor Room, shall be identical to the main fire pump and shall be configured to serve as the emergency fire pump.

Fire stations shall be installed in quantity and location as required by the regulatory bodies, and shall permit reaching any weather deck area and below deck area from at least two


stations. Fire stations shall be fitted with fire hydrants, hoses, nozzles, and accessory equipment in accordance with the regulatory body requirements. 445

450

International shore connections shall be provided port and starboard in accordance with the regulations.

The firemain system shall be remotely operable from the Machinery Control Station (MCS), including all primary valve controls, low pressure alarm, and pump start/stop.

524 SEAWATER SERVICE SYSTEMS

The seawater systems for the RCRV fall under two categories; scientific uses and shipboard services. Seawater systems for scientific uses include the uncontaminated seawater system and the incubator seawater.

524.1 Seawater Service Systems

Seachests and Supply Header 455

460

465

470

475

A total of two seachests shall be provided for the shipboard services. The seachests shall be located port and starboard in the Propulsion Motor Room. The seawater service systems shall take suction from a 6" crossover header connected to the port and starboard seachests. Each seachest shall be fitted with a motor actuated isolation gate valve, duplex strainer, compressed air blowdown connection, and vent. An isolation valve shall allow the seachest crossover to be subdivided into separate systems. The seawater header provides seawater for the firemain, ballast system, evaporators, ship service diesel generator (SSDG) cooling, and the auxiliary seawater system. Each system shall take suction from the seachest crossover header downstream of the duplex strainers. The systems shall be distributed about each side of the seachest isolation valve.

524.2 Ship Service Diesel Generator Seawater Cooling System

Each SSDG engine shall be provided with an independent, seawater cooling system. The seawater cooling system shall cool only the diesel engine. The alternator shall be freshwater cooled, as described in Section 533. The seawater cooling system for each engine shall be independent, driven by an engine driven (PTO) cooling pump, and installed in accordance with the engine manufacturer’s recommendations.

Each SSDG jacket water cooling system shall be designed for waste heat recovery. The seawater cooling system shall be the secondary heat rejection sink for the SSDG engine heat. Each seawater cooling system has been sized for the full heat rejection of the respective diesel engine for periods of low waste heat demand. The seawater/jacket water heat exchangers shall be plate type and are supplied with the SSDGs.

Ice Mitigation and Re-Circulation Line

The No. 2 seachest shall be fitted with a re-circulation line where the warm seawater that has been through the SSDG engines shall be returned to the seachest. This infusion of


warm seawater shall mitigate ice formation. The recirculation line shall be opened only during operations in ice.

480

Auxiliary Seawater Service System

An auxiliary seawater service system shall be provided with two equally sized pumps, each capable of satisfying the entire service demand. Each pump shall take suction from the seachest supply header downstream of the duplex strainers, with one pump arranged on each side of the seachest isolation valve. The pumps shall be sized to move 390 GPM against a total discharge head of 92 feet. The pumps shall be Ampco ZCH2 4x3 NIAB, of centrifugal type, and shall be driven by 15 HP, 3450 RPM TEFC/IEEE45 motors. The main seawater pumps shall be horizontally mounted in the Propulsion Motor Room.

485

490

495

500

505

510

The auxiliary seawater system shall provide water to the following services:

• Main propulsion freshwater cooling system emergency crossover.

• Chlorine generator (for sewage treatment system).

• Sewage tank and line flushing.

• Oily water separator back flushing line.

• SW washdown for deck and exterior scientific equipment.

• Flume tank filling.

• Freshwater cooling system heat exchangers.

• Air-conditioning machinery cooling.

• Refrigeration machinery cooling.

524.3 Uncontaminated Scientific Seawater System

An uncontaminated seawater system shall be installed to provide seawater to the science labs. System components shall include two glass-filled epoxy pumps, PVC strainers, pipe insulation (for temperature), and non-metallic ball valves and fittings. The pumps shall be Pacer PCP 1.5x1.5 poly driven by a 2 HP, 3450 RPM, TEFC/IEEE45 motor. The pumps shall maintain a flow rate of 40 gallons per minute and shall be resiliently mounted.

The system shall take suction from an independent scientific seachest located up forward in the Bow Thruster Room. The scientific seachest shall be constructed of stainless steel, Type 316L, and include a temperature sensor and de-bubbler. Water from the uncontaminated seawater system shall be distributed to the Main Lab, Hydro/Wet Lab, and portable van locations.

524.4 Deck Incubator Seawater System

A dedicated deck incubator seawater supply system shall provide water to the working deck, 01 level foredeck, and pilothouse top areas, where on-deck incubators may be


located. The incubator system shall take suction from the uncontaminated seawater system’s seachest and distribute the seawater through non-metallic piping. 515

520

525

530

535

540

545

The incubator pump shall be sized for a flow rate of 50 gallons per minute against a total discharge head of at least 40 feet. The pump shall be designed for continuous operation and shall be driven by a 3/4 (TEFC/IEEE) HP motor. The pump shall be resiliently mounted in the Bow Thruster Room.

528 PLUMBING, DECK DRAINS AND VENTS

528.1 General

All drain pipes shall be led as directly as possible.

Drain system shall not allow sewer gas odors in any compartment, working deck area, or weather deck area on the vessel.

Drains shall be designed for proper function at all normal conditions of heel and trim and vessel motion.

The sink drain, shower, and interior deck drains shall lead, via gravity, to the port or starboard sewage/gray water tank. Gravity drains shall have maximum possible slope, but not less than 1/4 inch per foot transversely and 1/8 inch per foot longitudinally.

Toilet (black water) drains shall be kept separate from all other drains. Interior deck and sink drains shall be kept separate from exterior deck drains.

Gray water drains from sinks, showers, drinking fountains and similar fresh water-using fixtures shall be combined. The combined gray water drains from these living spaces and the drains from food service shall not be cross-connected on the same deck.

Drain pipes from sinks or interior deck drains combined with other gray water drains located at higher elevation may be joined. Where such connections are made, they shall be at least 4 feet below the lowest drain to prevent back-flooding under design conditions of list and trim, and under the rolling and pitching of the vessel. Where drains are combined with other drains, ‘Y’ branches, sweep tees, or sanitary fittings shall be used to facilitate flow.

Black water (sewage drains) shall be transported to the sewage collection manifold which shall be kept under a vacuum by the two sewage driven ejector pumps in the VCHT unit (see Section 593.2). From the sewage vacuum header, the ejector pumps shall discharge the sewage to the Marine Sanitation Device or to the sewage and gray water transfer manifold (described in Section 593).

Gray water (sink and shower drains) shall gravity drain under atmospheric pressure. The gray water from laundry and lower science berthing shall drain to a 60-gallon collection tank. The collection tank shall be fitted with high and low level switches. When the high level switch is activated, the transfer pump shall turn on and pump the contents to the


sewage tanks until the low level switch is activated and the transfer pumps turns off. All other gray water drains shall drain to the port or starboard sewage and gray water tanks directly; see Section 593.

550

555

560

565

570

575

580

Drains from the galley sinks, range hood, and dishwasher shall have self-cleaning grease traps conforming to USPHS standards for grease removal.

528.2 Interior Deck Drains

Deck drains shall be provided to prevent accumulation of water on decks under conditions of list to either side and through the possible range of trim under service conditions. Interior deck drains shall gravity drain to the port or starboard sewage/gray water tank. Deck drains shall have normal deck trap arrangements.

Deck drains shall be installed in all spaces where water may accumulate, such as the laundry room, the fan rooms, the cleaning gear lockers, any space fitted with a drinking fountain or sink, storage spaces containing liquids, galley, scullery, mess deck, high use passageways, sanitary spaces, vestibules and labs.

Spaces with openings to weather shall be provided with sufficient deck drains installed near the water source to quickly remove intruding seawater inside exterior doors and other wet areas.

All the upper interior deck drains may be connected to each other including the sink drain; however, before any drain pipe enters the sewage/gray water tank, there shall be an additional trap.

528.3 Weather Deck Drains

Deck drains shall be installed for all weather areas, including the working decks and the superstructure. Weather deck drains shall be independent of all other drains. Drains shall be located and sized to ensure that there is no standing water left on the deck. Drain scuppers shall be located fore and aft, port and starboard.

Drains from the upper deckhouse levels shall combine with drains from the lower decks where practical.

Drains from the top of the pilothouse shall not be part of a cascading drain system to the upper deck exterior walkways. Drain piping with scuppers and screwed down scupper screens shall be installed so that water from the top deck of the pilothouse and upper deck exterior walkways shall drain on the main deck at a point where the water is not directed to flow into the working areas.

Drains on the main deck shall be led to overboard discharges.


528.4 Traps and Cleanouts

A water-seal trap shall be installed for each plumbing fixture, or for a collection of no more than three fixtures. The trap shall be located as close to the fixture as possible, and the maximum vertical distance between fixture outlet and trap shall not exceed 24 inches. P-type traps shall be used. Each trap shall have a readily accessible means for cleaning. Traps shall be installed in a fore-and-aft direction. All drains shall have traps deep enough to prevent siphoning and backflow from the pitching and rolling of the vessel.

585

590

595

600

605

610

615

Cleanouts shall be provided in horizontal drain piping at each change of direction greater than 45 degrees, and not more than 50 linear feet apart. Where permitted, cleanout fittings shall be installed in accessible locations for all drains to permit cleaning of drain pipes. Cleanout fittings shall be installed in each vent pipe serving a drain from a plumbing fixture.

Clean-out connections shall not be less than 1-1/2 inch NPS, for clearing the drain pipes by use of plumber’s snake or water hose. 528.5 Plumbing Vents

Individual and combined drains shall be vented. Interior drain and sink vents may be fitted with anti-siphon valve terminals in lieu of running vent piping. Anti-siphonic vent valve terminals shall be located above ceiling levels.

528.6 Science Drains

Science drains shall be kept separate from other drainage systems. Drains from science sinks and lab deck drains shall combine to a point above the water line. Provisions shall be installed to switch these drains from gravity draining to the sewage tanks, individual buckets, or directly overboard. The science drain overboard shall be located on the port side of the vessel.

For receiving sink drains from the science vans, drain pipes with 2-inch valves, caps and chains shall be installed at a suitable location near the vans. These drains shall combine with the other science drain system. Each van shall be provided with a 2-inch diameter hose with a female end coupling and lengths no longer than necessary to provide a sloped gravity drain from the vans. The hoses shall be stowed near the vans.

529 BILGE, BALLAST AND OILY WASTE SYSTEMS

529.1 General

Bilge (Section 529.3), oily waste (Section 529.5) and waste oil (Section 529.6) systems shall be provided to collect, process, and transfer the oily waste generated onboard. The three systems shall be integrated, with crossover lines between the system pumps. The ballast system shall remain isolated in accordance with MARPOL regulations.


529.2 Ballasting/De-Ballasting

The ballast system shall be arranged to be independent of the bilge main to prevent contamination of the ballast system with oily bilge water.

620

625

630

The ballast piping system shall be arranged to permit individual dewatering or filling of each designated ballast tank by the ballast pump. The suction and discharge valving shall be arranged in manifolds. The fire pump shall be configured to provide backup ballast system capability.

The ballast system shall have both local and remote control, and monitoring via the Machinery Control Station (MCS) and pilothouse.

The ballast pump also acts as the backup fire pump; therefore, the pump selected shall be identical in make and model to the fire pump (see Section 521).

529.3 Bilge System

A bilge system shall be provided to dewater all spaces that can not be drained overboard. This includes all spaces located below the water line, and the upper deck machinery spaces that may accumulate oil on the decks such as the Emergency Generator Room and Incinerator Room.

Bilge Wells and Suction Lines 635

640

All machinery spaces shall be fitted with bilge wells and ball float type high level alarms. In some cases, the deck drain from a compartment located on the deck above may be routed to a bilge well in the space below (details given in the system diagram). Bilge suction lines and high level alarms shall also be fitted at the low points of all double bottom voids and trunks. A complete list of high level alarms is given in Section 436.

Bilge Suction Manifold

All bilge suctions lines shall be 2" diameter and shall lead to the bilge suction manifold located within the Engine Room. With the exception of the Engine Room bilge suctions, all bilge suctions shall be fitted with a foot valve. The bilge suction manifold in the Engine Room shall consist of a 3" manifold connected to nineteen bilge suction lines fitted with 2" stop check valves. The bilge suction manifold shall connect to a 3" header from which the main bilge pump shall take suction.

645

Bilge Pump and OWHT

The main bilge pump shall be an Ampco RC2 2x2B NIAB driven by a 5 HP, 3460 RPM, TEFC/IEEE45 motor. The bilge pump shall be capable of self-priming and dewatering the bilge compartments at a flow rate of 130 gallons/minute. The bilge pump shall normally discharge to the oily water holding tank, but may be used for overboard discharge in flooding situations. The oily water holding tank (3-22-0) shall be fitted with low, high and high-high level alarms, and a sounding tube.

650


529.4 Flooding and Emergency De-Watering 655

660

665

670

675

680

685

690

The main Engine Room and Propulsion Motor Room shall both have emergency de-watering capabilities.

The Engine Room shall be fitted with a direct bilge suction utilizing the bilge pump. The direct bilge suction shall draw water through a rosebox located in the Engine Room bilge, pass through the main bilge pump, and discharge directly overboard. The bilge pump and remote actuated suction and overboard discharge valves shall be operable from the Machinery Control Station (MCS) and pilothouse.

The emergency bilge suction shall provide a means for the contents of the Propulsion Motor Room bilges to be pumped directly overboard via the number one auxiliary seawater cooling pump (see Section 524). The emergency bilge suction shall consist of a rosebox located in the Propulsion Motor Room bilge and remote operated suction and discharge valves. The auxiliary seawater pump and remote valves shall be operable from the MCS and pilothouse.

529.5 Oily Waste System

The oily waste system shall be provided to process the vessel’s oily water. After the bilge system has transferred the oily water to the oily water holding tank (OWHT, 3-22-0) the water and oil shall be allowed to settle. The water settles to the bottom of the tank and the oil floats to the top. From the bottom of the holding tank, the oily water transfer pump shall take suction through a bellmouth. The oily water transfer pump then delivers the water to the oily water separator for processing.

Although normal operations have the oily water transfer pump moving water between the oily water holding tank and oily water separator, the piping system shall allow for other capabilities. The oily water transfer pump shall have the capability to take suction off of the bilge suction manifold, and be able to discharge overboard.

The oily water transfer pump shall be an Oberdorfer N990RJ AB driven by a 2 HP, 1750 RPM, TEFC/IEEE45 motor.

The oily water separator processes oily water for overboard discharge. The oily water separator shall be equipped with an oil content monitor and shall discharge water with an oil content of not more than 5 parts per million. Discharge effluent with an oil content higher than 5ppm shall be re-circulated back to the OWHT. The oily water separator shall be back flushed to the waste oil tank (Section 529.6).

The oily water separator shall be an RWO Skit/S.Deb Type 0.1, capable of processing 0.1m3/hr.

529.6 Waste Oil System

The waste oil system shall collect and hold the waste oil from the engines and machinery. The waste oil system includes the waste oil tank (3-22-2), waste oil pump, and shore


connections. Fixed 1/2" diameter piping shall connect the SSDG lube oil sumps and the waste oil tank. The waste oil pump may either take suction off of the lube oil sumps, or depending upon oil level and temperature, the lube oil may gravity drain to the waste oil tank. 695

700

705

710

715

720

725

The waste oil tank shall be fitted with low, high and high-high level alarms, a sounding tube and remote tank level indicator. The waste oil tank shall have the capacity to hold 169 gallons.

The waste oil pump shall take suction off of the bottom of the waste oil tank and pump it up to either the shore connection on the main deck, or up to the incinerator room sludge tank. Waste oil will either be burned in the incinerator or pumped ashore for proper disposal at a shoreside facility.

The waste oil pump shall be identical in make and model to the oily waste transfer pump as described in Section 529.

The piping systems shall include crossover lines between the waste oil pumps and oily waste transfer pumps suction and discharge lines. The piping shall be configured so that either pump may be used for either the waste oil or oily waste system.

531 SHIP FRESH WATER

531.1 Fresh Water Overview

The ship fresh water uses are divided between the potable water supply system, the closed loop air-conditioning chilled water system, the waste heat hot water system, and the ship service cooling water systems. The potable water system is described in detail in Section 532. The chilled water system is described in Section 516 and the waste heat system is described in Section 534. The vessel’s freshwater cooling systems are described in Section 533.

Make-up water to the chilled, waste heat and cooling water systems shall be supplied by the cold potable water supply system. Backflow preventers or air gaps shall be used in the connections between potable and freshwater chilled or cooling systems to prevent cross-contamination.

The potable water system shall take suction off of the potable water storage tanks, which shall be supplied from the watermakers (Section 531) or from shore connections (Section 531).

531.2 Fresh Water Production

A watermaking plant shall be provided to meet the fresh water requirements of the vessel. The plant shall consist of two plate type evaporators, with a combined capacity of 5284 gallons per day while the vessel is underway. The seawater feed to each evaporator shall be from the ship service seawater system using the attached pumps. The heating medium shall be the hot water circulated in the waste heat system (Section 534).


Each evaporator shall be skid mounted and supplied complete with manufacturer standard accessories, including seawater supply (ejector) pumps, potable water distillate pumps, valves, sightglasses, and instrumentation. Pumps shall be resiliently mounted in accordance with Section 500. Each evaporator unit shall be provided with a system for injecting acids into the feed water and brine piping for the purpose of descaling the unit.

730

735

740

745

750

755

760

765

Each evaporator shall be provided with a salinity cell that automatically alarms and dumps the product water to the bilge should the salinity be above USPHS requirements or when the electrical current to the salinity cell is interrupted. Product water shall be pumped through distillate cooler and delivered to the potable water tanks supply header (see Section 532.1).

The evaporators shall be designed for unattended automatic operation after being started manually. They shall be Alfa Laval JWP-16-C50 Evaporators.

531.3 Fresh Water Loading

Potable water camlock hose connections shall be provided on the port and starboard sides of the main deck. This provides a means for the vessel to load or offload water while docked. The potable water deck connections shall tie into the potable water tanks supply header.

531.4 Fresh Water Storage and Transfer

Two tanks shall be provided to store potable water. The port tank (3-9-2) and starboard tank (3-9-1) shall each hold 4220 gallons of water. The tanks shall have remote tank level indicators, high level alarms, and low level alarms. For a complete list of tank level indicators, refer to Section 436.

The tanks shall be filled from a potable water tank supply header. The supply header shall have an ultraviolet filter to sterilize incoming water before it is stored in the potable tanks. The ultraviolet filter shall be an Alfa Laval UVK-1. Water to the supply header shall be provided from the vessel’s watermaking plant or from the main deck hose connections. The supply header shall direct water to either potable water tank or to both tanks simultaneously.

The water in each potable water storage tank may be transferred from tank to tank and from each tank back to the main deck hose connections using the cold potable water pumps.

532 POTABLE WATER SYSTEM

532.1 General

The potable water system shall provide continuous hot and cold potable water supply to sinks, showers, galley equipment, labs, drinking fountains, deck washdowns, and other service points throughout the vessel. The potable water system shall also supply cold make-up water to the waste heat, chilled water and freshwater cooling systems.


532.2 Cold Potable Water

Two identical cold potable water circulating pumps and a hydro-pneumatic pressure tank shall be configured to supply the system. The pumps shall be centrifugal type and resiliently mounted. The pumps shall be configured for lead/lag operation, based upon the pressure transmitter readings on the potable water hydro pneumatic tank. The pumps shall be Ampco KC2 1.5x1.25 SS driven by a 5 HP, 3450 RPM, TEFC/IEEE45 motor.

770

775

780

785

790

795

The system shall be subdivided into main branches, forward and aft, with isolation of each branch possible for maintenance without disrupting service to the other branch. Backflow preventers or air gaps shall be used in the connections between potable and non-potable systems to prevent contamination. The cold potable water shall supply make-up water to the closed loop freshwater systems in the machinery spaces. Potable water shall also supply sanitary flushing (532.4) and deck freshwater washdown.

The system shall serve showers, sinks, lavatories, galley equipment, labs, drinking fountains and deck washdown. Each plumbing fixture shall be fitted with cutout valves in the supply and return lines so that water service can be secured at the fixture for maintenance, repair or replacement of the fixture.

Cold water branches on the main deck, 01 deck and 1st platform shall supply water to the hot water heaters (Section 532.3) on those decks.

532.3 Hot Water Service Subsystem

The hot potable water subsystem shall consist of at least three quick-recovery, electric-type hot water heaters set to supply water at 120°F. Each hot water heater shall have its own circulating pump and circulating hot water loop system so that each service point has ready access to hot water. The hot water heaters are Hubbel Marine Water Heaters, Model MSH-80-O-35-SL-T4.

532.4 Sanitary Flushing Water

The flushing water for the vacuum flush toilets shall be supplied from the cold potable water system. Each toilet will draw off of the nearest cold potable water branch. Each water closet shall be equipped with a flushing water shutoff valve.

532.5 Deionizer Feed Tank

A 70-gallon stainless steel tank shall be provided in the Main Lab to supply feedwater to a future-installed deionizing system. The tank shall be located to feed by gravity to a bench top location near a sink. The tank shall have the capability to be filled from both the potable water system and directly from the vessel’s evaporators.


533 FRESHWATER COOLING SYSTEMS

533.1 Diesel Generator Set Cooling 800

805

810

815

820

825

830

See Section 256.

533.2 Emergency Generator Set Cooling

The emergency generator set shall be provided with an independent, closed loop freshwater cooling system in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. The entire cooling system shall be mounted on the emergency generator skid. The cooling system shall utilize an engine-driven jacket water pump, a skid-mounted radiator and engine-driven radiator fan to cool the engine jacket water. A jacket water heater shall be provided to maintain engine block temperature when the engine is not operating.

533.3 Propulsion Machinery Freshwater Cooling System

The main propulsion machinery shall be cooled by a closed loop freshwater cooling system. The system shall serve the following machinery and equipment:

• No. 1 SSDG alternator



• No. 1 Propulsion power converter

• No. 2 Propulsion power converter

• No. 1 Propulsion motor freshwater / air cooler

• No. 2 Propulsion motor freshwater / air cooler

Two equally sized circulating pumps shall be provided for the system. Two freshwater/seawater plate type heat exchangers shall transfer the heat to the auxiliary seawater cooling system. The plate type heat exchangers shall be suitable for seawater service, and capable of transferring 125 KW of heat from the fresh water to the seawater. The freshwater pumps shall be sized for a minimum flow rate of 75 GPM, with a total discharge head of 31 feet, and a 1.5 HP motor.

534 WASTE HEAT TRANSFER SYSTEMS

A waste heat system shall be provided to gather heat from the SSDGs jacket water and use it as the heating source for the evaporators. The system shall have a plate type heat exchanger (Alfa Laval M3) for each of the three SSDG engines. The waste heat system’s circulating water shall pass through the heat exchanger to collect heat from the jacket water. If the load on the diesel engine is low and the jacket water is not supplying the desired amount of heat, then downstream of each heat exchanger the waste heat circulating water may pass through a supplemental heater. The supplemental heater shall be a 32KW instantaneous electric water heater Eemax EX320T3.


The waste heat is collected from SSDG jacket water as described in Section 256. The two waste heat circulating pumps shall be Grundfos UP26-96BF AB driven by a single-phase, 1-1/2 HP motor.

835

840

541 FUEL OIL SYSTEM

541.1 General

Diesel oil systems shall be designed for transferring and processing ASTM D975 Grade 2-D; ISO 8217, F-DMA; and DFM (North Atlantic Treaty Organization (NATO) Code F-76) diesel oil. Built-in containment coamings shall be provided for all oil equipment foundations. In addition, drip pans shall be permanently installed beneath such items as strainers and filters.

541.2 Tanks

Storage Tanks 845

850

855

The fuel oil storage tanks were sized to meet the minimum range requirements of Section 070 without exceeding the 95% full level in any tank. The capacities of the storage tanks are listed below:

• FO Storage Tank (2-2-1) - 2508 gallons

• FO Storage Tank (2-2-2) – 2508 gallons



• FO Storage Tank (3-16-1) –7451 gallons




Day Tanks

Two fuel oil day (service) tanks shall be provided. The capacity of the port day tank shall be 1534 gallons. The capacity of the starboard day tank shall be 2212 gallons.

Emergency Generator Fuel Oil Tank 860

A dedicated 350 gallon fuel tank shall be provided for the emergency generator. The tank shall be integral with the vessel’s structure and shall have a sounding tube, vent, tank level indicator, and low, high and high-high level alarms.

Overflow Tanks

Two fuel oil overflow tanks shall be provided and arranged port and starboard between Frames 22 and 23. A flow sensor shall be provided in the fuel storage tank overflow lines

865


leading to the overflow tanks. Whenever flow is detected in the overflow lines an alarm shall sound. The capacities of the overflow tanks are listed below:

• FO Overflow Tank (3-22-1) – 1189 Gallons

• FO Overflow Tank (3-22-2) – 1189 Gallons 870

875

880

885

890

895

541.3 Fuel Fill and Transfer System

The fuel fill and transfer system shall permit the following fueling operations:

• Fill each storage tank from shore via main deck fueling station.

• Transfer from each storage and day tank to shore via main deck fueling stations.

• Transfer among all storage, overflow and day tanks.

• Fill the emergency generator tank.

541.4 Transfer Pumps

Transfer operations shall be performed using a positive displacement fuel oil transfer pump. The pump shall be a gear type pump of cast iron construction and shall be horizontally mounted in the Purifier Room. The pump shall be capable of moving 10 GPM against a total discharge pressure of 67 feet, and shall be driven by a 0.25 HP motor.

541.5 Fueling/Transfer Piping

Fueling/transfer system suction and discharge valves shall be manifolded.

Fueling shall be accomplished using shoreside pressure.

The main deck fill/discharge station shall terminate in a gate valve, and shall include a connecting fitting suitable for joining to the fuel facilities’ hose, a compressed air hose fitting for fueling hose blow-back, a test valve for sampling the fuel and bleeding off pressure after fuel hose blow-back, and a gage to monitor fuel pressure at the station.

541.6 Purification System

A purification system shall be provided to remove water and dense contaminants from fuel being transferred between the storage tanks and day tanks. The system shall:

• Incorporate one self-cleaning Alfa Laval PU-150 centrifugal purifier capable of processing a flow rate of 14.5 GPM.

• Continuously circulate fuel oil to/from a fuel oil day tank through the purifying unit. Once the fuel level has reached the top of the day tank, the purification system shall overflow back to the designated storage tank.

• Drain waste and/or water from the purifying units to the waste oil tank.


The purifier shall have an attached pump and is sized to enable it to meet operational demands for purifying with all engines on-line. 900

905

910

915

920

925

930

541.7 Service System

The fuel oil service systems shall consist of two day tanks, an emergency generator day tank, an incinerator fuel supply tank, and supply/return piping systems serving the ship service diesel generators (SSDGs), emergency diesel generator, and incinerator.

The service system shall be arranged to permit the SSDGs to be supplied by either day tank. Fuel oil service return piping to the day tanks, incinerator tank, and emergency generator tank shall terminate within the tanks in a manner that minimizes fuel aeration.

A fuel oil return cooler shall be provided to maintain the temperature of the day tank. This cooler shall be a plate type Alfa Laval CB-14.

The supply piping serving the ship service diesel generators shall include dedicated full flow, 10 micron coalescing triplex filter assemblies, with one assembly serving each diesel generator.

The supply piping serving the incinerator shall include a duplex basket type strainer with a fine mesh.

541.8 Overflow Piping System

The service and storage tanks shall overflow into the overflow tanks. The interconnecting overflow headers shall have check valves in each branch to prevent backflow and flow switches that alarm to the Machinery Control Station (MCS).

542 LUBRICATING OIL SYSTEMS

542.1 General

It is intended that the number of different oils used on the vessel be kept to a minimum. Where different hydraulic or lubricating oils are required for smaller machinery, that type of oil shall be stored in portable storage containers. The SSDGs shall have a fixed lube oil transfer system. All other machinery shall be filled from bottles, buckets or barrels.

Built-in containment coamings shall be provided for all oil equipment foundations. Drip pans shall be permanently installed beneath such items as strainers and filters.

For SSDG engine lube oil systems see Section 262. For the SSDG clean lube oil storage tank see Section 542.2.

542.2 Clean Lube Oil Storage Tank

A clean lube oil storage tank (2-22-4) shall be provided for the SSDG engine lube oil. The SSDG engine lube oil storage tank shall be structural and shall be located within the


Engine Room. The lube oil storage tank shall have a capacity of 169 gallons. The tank shall have high and low alarms, a sounding tube and a sightglass.

A separate, independent clean lube oil tank with a minimum capacity of 20 gallons shall be provided in the Emergency Generator Room. The tank shall be mounted high enough on the bulkhead to allow gravity filling of the engine sump. The tank shall be filled by a portable pump and shall be vented as high as possible into the space.

935

940

945

950

955

960

542.3 Lubricating Oil Fill and Transfer Systems

The diesel generator engine lubricating oil fill and transfer system shall be designed to permit the following fill and transfer operations:

• Fill the ship service diesel generator clean lubricating oil storage tank from the main deck via a permanently installed piping system.

• Transfer clean lubricating oil from the storage tank to the diesel generator’s oil sump via a dedicated transfer pump.

• Discharge clean oil to the shore connections.

The main deck filling stations for the storage tank shall be arranged for pressurized filling. The filling stations shall have shutoff valves, pressure gages and containment coamings.

The lube oil transfer pump shall be a gear type pump of cast iron construction, and shall be horizontally mounted. The lube oil pump shall be rated for a flow rate of 10 GPM against a total discharge head of 67 feet.

Transfer pumps shall be equipped with a fine mesh, simplex, suction strainer with magnets. The simplex strainer basket area shall be generously sized to accommodate the transfer of cold viscous oil.

The emergency generator engine sump shall be filled manually via a portable container.

542.4 Lubricating Oil Service Systems

See Section 262.

551 COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEMS

551.1 General

A compressed air system shall be provided to supply compressed air for starting the diesel generator engines, supplying the service air branches and for the labs.

Air shall be compressed to 125 psig by two air compressors set up for lead/lag operation. The compressed air shall fill two air receivers, which have been sized to provide storage for multiple engine starts in accordance with the ABS Rules. Moisture separators, cut-out valves, low pressure alarms, and pressure relief valves placed shall be installed in the


system. All pressure relief valves located in the Engine Room shall have their exhaust/relief path piped to the bilge.

965

970

975

980

985

990

995

Measures shall be taken to reduce noise and minimize vibration in the system. Flexible connections shall be placed on the system piping connecting to the air receivers, and double leg flexible hoses shall connect the piping to the air compressors and engine starting motors. Air compressors shall be resiliently mounted.

Built-in containment coamings shall be provided for all compressor foundations.

551.2 Receivers

Two Hanson 30-VA-200-R air receivers shall be provided and installed. Each air receiver shall have the capacity to hold 200 gallons at 200 psi. The ship service air receivers shall be identical and vertically mounted.

One science receiver suitable for 100 psig working pressure shall be installed in the engine room. The science air receiver shall hold 100 gallons. Two refrigerated air dryers shall be installed to supply all science spaces on the vessel with dry air. The refrigerant air dryers shall be Quincy QPNC 100.

All receivers shall be ASME and ABS certified.

551.3 Starting Air Compressors

Two electric motor-driven air compressors shall be provided. The compressors shall have an air intake filter and silencer, an automatic unloader, an automatic start-stop pressure switch, a self-contained lubricating system, a belt guard, and accessories. Automatic pressure controls shall be set for intermittent operation with appropriate cut-in and cut-out pressure settings.

The air compressors shall be Quincy QR-25, model D310, 2 HP units. Compressors shall be rated at 6.3 ACFM at 175 psig. Air shall be delivered from the compressors at 125 psig. The air compressors shall be resiliently mounted in accordance with Section 500.

551.4 Ship Service Air System

Ship service air shall be supplied at 125 psig, and reduced locally wherever lower pressure supply is required. Ship service air shall supply various on-deck and machinery space quick-disconnect locations with air for pneumatically powered tools. The ship service air system shall also supply compressed air to the seachest blowdowns, ship’s whistle and hydro-pneumatic tanks.

551.5 Science Air System

Compressed air shall be specially treated before being supplied to the onboard science labs. The branch for lab air shall pass through a moisture separator and a reducing station which shall take the 125 psig air and reduce the pressure to 100 psig. Further downstream, the air


shall pass through one of two refrigerant air dryers before being fed to a dedicated science air receiver located in the engine room.

1000

1005

1010

1015

1020

1025

1030

Standard lab-type outlets for compressed air shall be provided along lab bench tops at not less than 8 foot intervals. Compressed air for lab use shall be provided by the ship service air system, reduced to 100 psig, dried to 50oF dew point through refrigerated air dryers and oil separation filters. The lab outlets shall be sized for a consumption of 4 CFM per outlet with 0.30 use factor.

Van locations shall have connections for both ship service 125 psig compressed air and 100 psig science air.

555 FIREFIGHTING

555.1 Portable Fire Extinguishers

Approved portable fire extinguishers shall be provided and mounted in accordance with the regulations. Spare charges shall be provided in accordance with the regulations.

Each extinguisher shall be equipped with a discharge and recharge instruction plate.

The mounting of all portable extinguishers shall comply with required access clearances. Where an extinguisher is recessed into a joiner bulkhead, the recess structure shall not compromise the integrity of the bulkhead.

555.2 Fixed CO2 Extinguishing Systems

Fixed CO2 extinguishing systems shall be installed to protect the following compartments:

• Engine Room

• Purifier Room

• Flammables Locker

• Acid Storage Locker

• Emergency Generator Room

• Hazardous Materials Storerooms

• Incinerator Room

Each system shall be sized and installed in accordance with the ABS, USCG and SOLAS rules. The CO2 for all systems may be stored in a common set of cylinders sized for the room with the most demand (Engine Room). All other spaces shall have separate piping from the same set of CO2 bottles, but only connected to the number of bottles required for that specific space. Alternatively individual CO2 systems may be installed for each compartment served.


CO2 release to any space shall actuate a siren in the room, shall automatically shut down the ventilation fans and the generator engines, and shall automatically close all fire dampers, in conjunction with a time delayed discharge.

Individual fixed CO2 systems shall be installed to protect each of the three (3) SSDG alternator enclosures. Each CO

1035

1040

1045

1050

1055

1060

1065

2 system shall be sized and arranged in accordance with the regulatory requirements. Activation of the CO2 system shall automatically trip the alternator off-line and shut down the diesel engine.

Individual, fixed CO2 systems shall be installed to protect each of the two (2) propulsion motors and the bow thruster motor. Each CO2 system shall be sized and arranged in accordance with the regulatory requirements. Activation of the CO2 system shall automatically trip the motor off-line.

555.3 Water Mist System

In addition to the fixed CO2 system protecting the entire main engine room, each SSDG shall be provided with and protected by a dedicated local water mist fire extinguishing system. The water mist system shall be sized and arranged in accordance with SOLAS regulations. The water mist systems may be combined if allowed by the regulatory bodies. Activation of the water mist system shall automatically shut down the diesel engine served.

555.4 Galley Hood Protection

The galley ventilation hoods over the deep fat fryer and griddle shall be equipped with an approved wet chemical solution extinguishing system unit fire protection system. These systems shall provide protection for all equipment under the hood. Each hood shall be protected independently. The system shall spray an aqueous, potassium-based liquid through spray heads installed under the hood. The system shall have a fusible link pressure release mechanism that operates at 360°F installed under the hood. The system shall also be equipped with a manual operating mechanism for local control of the fire extinguishing agent.

The system shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.

555.5 Emergency Equipment Lockers

Emergency squad equipment lockers shall be provided and equipped in accordance with regulatory requirements.

556 HYDRAULIC POWER EQUIPMENT

Individual, self-contained hydraulic packages shall be provided for the deck cranes and anchor windlass by the equipment manufacturer. The hydraulic packages shall be integrated into their respective equipment foundations whenever possible.

A remote hydraulic system shall be provided and installed to extend and retract the A-frame assembly located on the stern of the vessel (See Section 573). The hydraulic system


shall be located in the steering gear room and consist of a single hydraulic reservoir, with two electric motor-driven variable displacement pumps providing high pressure fluid to two double-acting cylinders. Flow splitting valves shall be used to automatically balance the flow evenly to the two cylinders during both cylinder extension and retraction. The hydraulic system shall be provided with local and remote controls in the Aft Control Station.

1070

1075

1080

1085

1090

1095

1100

Quick disconnect fittings and hoses shall be installed in the hydraulic system to allow the A-frame assembly to be removed from the vessel with minimal disruptions to the piping system.

561 STEERING SYSTEM

The steering system shall be selected to meet noise, maneuvering and DPS requirements, and shall be configured to accept control from the DPS. The steering gear system shall be configured for both independent rudder control (for dynamic positioning) and combined (i.e., synchronized) control during normal operation.

Two rudder assemblies shall be provided and installed. Each rudder assembly shall consist of steering gear, steering gear pedestal foundation, rudder, rudderstock and steering control/monitoring system.

Each rudder shall be controlled via a Tenfjord SR series rotary vane type steering gear. Each rotary vane steering gear shall be powered and controlled via dual-redundant, variable-frequency drive motors.

562 COMBUSTION AIR SYSTEMS

562.1 Ship Service Diesel Generators

The SSDGs shall draw combustion air directly from the Engine Room. Each engine combustion air system shall not impose a back pressure on the engine exceeding the recommendations of the engine manufacturer.

562.2 Emergency Generator

The emergency generator shall draw combustion air directly from the Emergency Generator Room. A large supply louver with motorized fire damper shall be configured to open upon the emergency generator receiving the “crank” signal. The fire damper shall be powered by the emergency generator starting batteries. Under normal operating conditions, the fire damper on the supply louver shall be closed.

562.3 Incinerator

The combustion air for the incinerator shall be drawn directly from the Incinerator Room. Filters shall be provided as required by the equipment manufacturer.


562.4 Combustion Exhaust Systems

Ship Service Diesel Generator Engine Exhaust System

The combustion exhaust and crankcase exhaust systems for the main generators are discussed in Section 259. 1105

Emergency Generator Diesel Engine Exhaust System

The emergency diesel generator engine shall have a single combustion exhaust piping system between the engine exhaust manifold outlet and the top of the stack. The piping run shall be as short and simple as possible. The engine combustion exhaust system, including the silencer, shall not impose a back pressure on the engine exceeding the recommendations of the engine manufacturer.

1110

1115

1120

Metal expansion joints of the bellows type shall be installed between the diesel engine exhaust manifold and the exhaust piping, and elsewhere, as required by engine displacement and thermal expansion.

Exhaust piping shall be air-tight, with drains provided at the low points of the exhaust piping within the emergency generator room and the silencer. The exhaust weather outlet shall be located at the top of the stack and shall be configured to prevent rain water from entering the exhaust piping.

A spark-arresting type silencer shall be provided for the engine. An industrial grade silencer shall be provided for the emergency generator.

The crankcase exhaust system for the engine shall be independent and not combined with other systems.

To meet IMO Tier II requirements, the crankcase exhaust vent shall be run into the combustion exhaust pipe high in the stack.

Incinerator Exhaust System 1125

1130

1135

The incinerator shall have an exhaust piping system installed that terminates at the top of the stack. The exhaust piping run shall be as short and simple as possible. Metallic expansion joints of the bellows type shall be located as necessary to accommodate thermal expansion of piping. The exhaust system shall be designed and installed in accordance with the recommendations of the incinerator manufacturer.

565 ROLL STABILIZATION TANK

A roll stabilization tank shall be provided and designed to meet the sea keeping criteria of Section 070. The roll stabilization system shall be a Flume, passive, closed tank system. The system shall use saltwater for its medium. The tank shall be filled from the seawater system. The tank shall be fitted with emergency overboard valves remotely controlled from the pilothouse in case it is necessary to drain the tank quickly at sea.


568 BOW THRUSTER

One (1) Elliott White Gill Model 32T3S-QR bow thruster shall be provided and installed. The bow thruster design shall be optimized for acoustic performance. The bow thruster shall be configured with a minimum 3 RPM 360-degree azimuthing steering control, 860 RPM input speed, fixed pitch impeller, vertically mounted electric motor, and thrust deflector. The bow thruster and support systems shall be rated for 100% continuous duty cycle.

1140

1145

1150

1155

1160

1165

1170

The bow thruster suction and discharge openings shall be faired into the hull to minimize hull resistance and to present a smooth hull surface.

The bow thruster assembly and accessories shall be certified to American Bureau of Shipping Rules for Building and Classing Vessels, AMS, ACCU. The thruster shall be designed to operate under static and dynamic angles of inclination in accordance with ABS rules for classing propulsion and auxiliary machinery.

570 VENTS, FILLS, AND SOUNDS

570.1 General

The chain locker and all tanks, except hydraulic, lube oil and freshwater tanks, shall be sounded. All tanks and compartments fitted with filling, flooding, pumping, or drainage and void spaces through which pressure pipe runs, shall be vented.

570.2 Sounding

Sounding pipes of not less than 1-1/2 inches inside diameter shall be provided for the chain locker and all voids and tanks (except hydraulic, lube oil and freshwater tanks). Each sounding tube shall be located to lead approximately 2 inches above the lowest point in the tank or void, and to then rise vertically straight to its upper terminus, as much as practicable.

Sounding pipes terminating on the main deck or above shall be labeled with the name and number of the tank or compartment they serve and the maximum sounding of the space. Striker plates shall be fitted at the bottom of all sounding pipes to prevent damage to the plating by sounding rods. A tee wrench, or similar, shall be provided and mounted near each grouping of flush deck plates. All deck plates shall use the same size wrench in order to standardize the use of wrenches.

All sounding pipes terminating below the main deck shall be fitted with self-closing gate valves at the upper end and shall be in accessible locations. They shall be labeled with label plates located in a readily readable position on the adjacent structure where practicable; otherwise, the label plates shall be securely attached to the self-closing valve. Sounding pipes shall not terminate in staterooms, or in locked or inaccessible spaces.


570.3 Vent Pipes

Vent piping runs shall slope, whenever possible, to prevent accumulation of moisture in the piping.

Vents for small independent tanks in the machinery spaces shall terminate in the space where they are located and away from machinery.

1175

1180

1185

1190

1195

1200

1205

Potable water tank vents shall terminate 6 feet above the main deck in order to prevent contamination from other fluids. Vent piping shall be of corrosion resistant materials.

The sewage/gray water storage tanks vents and the MSD plant vent shall terminate in the weather above the 03 deck in the stack. Due to the aromatic and somewhat corrosive nature of the effluent in the tank, these vents shall not be terminated in the space where the tanks are located.

A common vent system shall be installed for the fuel tanks. Individual vent line(s) for each of the fuel tanks shall come off the top of the tank and run to weather. Separately, an overflow line shall run from each tank and be connected to a common header leading to the fuel overflow tank(s). The individual tank vent lines and the overflow lines shall be sized such that, in the case of an overfill condition, the fuel will drain to the overflow tank through the overflow piping instead of backing up the vent pipe and spilling on the weather deck. The vents for the overflow tanks shall be terminated in the weather above containment coamings, sized per the regulations.

570.4 Vent Terminals

Vent terminals above the weather deck shall terminate in the atmosphere at least 36 inches above the deck, and with approved gooseneck fittings. Terminals shall be located on the pilothouse side or under the bulwark cap. The number of vent terminals above the weather deck shall be kept to a minimum.

Vent terminals and lines, fill and discharge lines for the fuel oil over flow tanks, lubricating oil tanks, oily water tanks, and waste oil tanks shall terminate in containment stations. Containment coamings shall be sized in accordance with regulations. No vent, fill, or discharge connection from any hazardous system shall be located within 36 inches of any opening into living quarters, or any ventilation system intakes or discharges.

Automatic ball float valves shall, in general, be fitted to all vent pipes from spaces below the main deck unless otherwise approved. Flame screens shall be fitted only where necessary.

573 HANDLING SYSTEMS

573.1 General

Handling equipment shall be marinized and ABS certified. Offshore cranes shall be certified in accordance with the ABS Guide for Certification of Lifting Appliances. Plastic


non-skid gratings shall be provided around winches and exterior control locations (except on working deck).

Overside handling gear shall meet the breaking strength requirements of 46 CFR 189. 1210

573.2 Cranes

Main Deck Crane

One (1) knuckle boom crane shall be provided that can reach all working deck areas, and is capable of offloading vans and equipment weighing up to 16,000 pounds to a pier in port. The crane shall be able to deploy buoys and other heavy equipment up to 8,000 pounds and up to 12 feet over the starboard side at sea. The crane shall be an Effer Model 80000-3SL, and shall be provided with a standup control bank at the crane base and a portable, plug-in chestpack control unit.

1215

1220 The crane shall be person-rated for a basket directly attached to the end of the boom for access to the A-frame and other vessel equipment. The crane shall be supplied with a winch in the “horse head” configuration (on top of the boom).

Portable Deck Crane

One (1) portable crane capable of handling weights up to 4,000 pounds, 12 feet beyond the side of the vessel, shall be provided. The crane shall be articulated for work at deck level and at the sea surface. The crane shall be an Effer Model 155M-1S. 1225

1230

The portable crane shall be provided with a base plate compatible with the deck bolt grid system. Three (3) installation locations shall be provided: forward, amidships and aft. The portable crane shall be supplied with local controls and a portable, plug-in chestpack control unit.

This crane shall also be provided with a relocatable crutch as an over-the-side, cable fairlead for vertical work and light towing.

573.3 Oceanographic Winches

Traction/Trawl Winch System

One (1) Markey Type DUTWC-11-48 single storage drum traction system shall be installed in the Winch Room on the vessel. The winch shall have the following characteristics:

1235

1240

• Traction winch safe working load of 20,000 lbs.

• Traction winch maximum line pull of 25,000 lbs.

• Rated performance of 20,000 lbs. line pull at 0 to 200 ft/min.

• Maximum speed performance of 9,722 lbs. at 300 ft/min.

• Storage winch safe working load of 1,500 lbs.


• Storage winch maximum line pull of 1,865 lbs.

• Storage drum capacity of 10,000 meters of 0.562" 3 x 19 wire rope.

The traction drums shall be driven by two variable-frequency AC motors to provide variable speed control. The storage drum shall be driven by a single variable-frequency AC motor. Motors and controllers shall be provided with dynamic braking and sufficient cooling for continuous, full torque capacity stall.

1245

Sheaves in the sizes, number and locations shown on the drawings shall be provided and installed to support running the trawl cable through the A-frame.

CTD Winches 1250

1255

Space, weight and electrical power reservations shall be provided on the exterior deck for two (2) Owner-furnished hydrographic-type winches, each capable of handling 5,000 meters of 0.393 fiber optic cable. The space reservations shall be located to serve the starboard side and the future CTD system. The winches shall be integrated into the handling system, including suitable deck strengthening and winch control and display systems.

Winch Controls

The Aft Control Station and other remote control stations shall include readouts of line speed, tension, line out and station-in-control indication, and control transfer acknowledgments. Large winch status displays of line speed, tension, and line out shall be provided near deployment locations and be viewable from at least 25 feet away to provide status information to personnel on deck. Displays shall be LED or electroluminescent for nighttime viewing. Winch control and power system design shall be integrated with other components of over-the-side handling systems to maximize the safety and protection of equipment in heavy weather operation and to maximize service life of installed wires. Winches shall be provided with slip rings (may be optical) and be connected to the winch wire and the vessel’s power and data network. Power for slip rings shall be provided from the scientific conditioned power system as required.

1260

1265

573.4 Over-the-Side/Stern Handling Gear

A-Frame 1270

1275

The vessel shall be provided with a removable stern A-frame that provides a height of 24 feet from the attachment points for blocks to the deck and has a clear width between the legs of at least 15 feet. The inboard and outboard reach shall be a minimum of 12 feet and shall be able to safely launch long towed bodies, 3 meter diameter mooring buoys, and other large packages. Hydraulic cylinder rams shall be retracted when the stern frame is in the stowed position. Stern weight handling appliances shall have a dynamic safe working load of 20,000 pounds and shall meet the breaking strength requirements of the regulations. The A-frame shall be controlled hydraulically as described in Section 556.


573.5 CTD Handling System

A space, weight and electrical power reservation shall be provided on the starboard side for an Owner-furnished CTD handling system, including suitable deck strengthening and interface with winch control and display systems.

1280

1285

1290

1295

1300

1305

1310

573.6 Control Stations

The overside handling equipment, except both cranes shall be controlled locally and in the Aft Control Station.

581 ANCHOR SYSTEMS

A complete anchoring system shall be provided and installed. The anchoring system shall be approved by ABS and ABS certification obtained. The ABS equipment number is 360.

OE

Two anchors shall be stowed against the hull plating (1 per side). Heavy doubler plates shall be provided in way of the shell where the anchors are stowed. Edges of doubler plating shall be chamfered at a slope of at least 1:4.

Dogged steel covers shall be provided for the deck bolsters and chain pipes. Chain pipe covers shall be provided with gaskets.

581.1 Anchor Windlass

Two ABS-approved anchor windlasses, Coastal Marine Equipment CME Model 1V11831-126-00, with one 15" diameter cathead fitted to the shafting, shall be provided and installed. The wildcats shall be properly sized for the anchor chain to be handled. The anchor windlass shall be sized to recover the anchors and chain at a rate of at least 30 feet per minute at a maximum motor speed of 1200 RPM. All electrical components on the windlass shall be rated at least waterproof and shall be provided with internal heaters. The windlass brakes shall be spring set and electric coil release. Local pedestal mounted pushbutton controls shall be provided with ability to hoist, lower and stop the windlass.

581.2 Anchors

Three identical stockless anchors shall be provided, one port and one starboard, connected to the anchor chain. The third anchor is a spare and will not be carried on the vessel. The anchors shall be 2800 lb stockless type.

581.3 Hawse Pipes

The forward end of the hull shall be fitted with hawse pipes with deck and shell bolsters for stockless anchors, one port and one starboard. The bolsters shall be designed for a load no less than the breaking strength of the chain applied at any angle. All surfaces that may come in contact with the chain shall have a radius of seven times the chain wire diameter and shall be hardened.


581.4 Anchor Chains

Port and starboard anchor chains shall be provided. Each chain shall be 1-3/16" Grade 2 chain. A total of 14 shots (210 fathoms) of chain shall be provided to meet the minimum length stipulated by ABS requirements. Each chain shall include a swivel shot and detachable links, together with chain stopper, devil’s claw, bitter end connections, and other fittings necessary to make a complete and workable arrangement.

1315

1320

1325

1330

1335

1340

1345

Stoppers shall be located in line with the lead of the chain and shall be capable of passing the chain swivels.

581.5 Chain Lockers and Chain Pipes

Port and starboard chain lockers shall be provided, each sized to accommodate the shots of chain with sufficient head room remaining to facilitate the self-stowage and paying out of the chain. Access shall be provided to each chain locker. Recessed hand-holds and foot-holds shall be provided in each locker for vertical access.

Chain shall stow on a steel grating designed to support the chain under all conditions. A chain locker sump shall be provided.

The bitter end of each chain shall be secured by a pin designed to carry away in shear at a load less than the breaking strength of the chain, but greater than the proof lead of the chain, without failure of any other member and without damage to the hull structure.

Chain pipes shall terminate over the center of each chain locker. Ends of chain pipes shall be provided with a bellmouth. Chain pipe diameter shall be at least 8 times the chain wire diameter.

582 MOORING AND TOWING

Cleats, bitts and chocks shall be arranged as shown on the drawings to simplify handling arrangements and to clear interferences. Bitts and chocks shall meet the Panama Canal transit regulations. Chocks shall be provided for proper line handling. Chocks shall be designed to permit an eye splice or bight with two parts of the largest size line used to pass through the opening.

Bitts and chocks shall be fitted directly to the deck plating. On the working deck area, they shall be bolted in place using dedicated bolt sockets as required to meet the Panama Canal strength requirements.

ABS recommended hawsers shall be provided. The hawsers shall be polyester.

Mooring line stowage shall be provided.

Powered gypsy heads shall be provided forward and may be integral with the windlass(s).


583 BOATS, BOAT HANDLING, AND STOWAGE

One 16-foot foam collar boat with integral fuel tank and twin 40 HP, four-stroke gasoline engines shall be provided and located as shown on the drawings.

The vessel shall also have the capability to carry and deploy a scientific workboat, 16 to 22 feet in length, which may be located at one of the two van location options or on another available deck space.

1350

1355

1360

1365

1370

1375

1380

One USCG approved rescue boat with a 40 HP, four-stroke engine shall be provided. The rescue boat shall be fully equipped with lifting slings and USCG required equipment, and shall be certified by USCG to meet rescue boat requirements. A USCG/SOLAS approved cradle assembly and davit shall be provided to store and launch the rescue boat.

Boat motors shall be identical.

585 LIFERAFTS

Two (2) 16-person USCG and SOLAS approved inflatable liferafts shall be provided and installed on each side of the vessel (4 total) as shown on the drawings. Liferafts shall be outfitted with SOLAS A packs. One Jacob’s ladder per liferaft launching location (2 total) shall be provided. Additionally, one Jacob’s ladder per main deck embarkation location (2 total) shall be provided for boarding the liferafts. Liferaft painters shall be attached to the vessel near the liferaft foundation. Copies of the liferaft certifications shall be provided to the Owner. The liferafts shall be purchased as late in the construction schedule as possible to give the Owner the maximum amount of time prior to having to recertify the rafts.

593 POLLUTION CONTROL SYSTEMS

593.1 General

The pollution control systems include storage or treatment options for sewage waste, gray water drains, oily bilge water, waste fuel, used hydraulic, and soiled lubricating oils. Storage tanks, systems and equipment shall be provided to collect, store, treat and discharge wastes in accordance with regulatory body rules and regulations and envi-ronmental laws. Provision shall be provided to minimize the accidental discharge of wastes.

593.2 Sewage System

A sewage system including storage tanks, pumps, an EVAC marine sanitation device, and an EVAC vacuum flushing system shall be provided. The system shall be an EVAC Model 1122 and ORCA IIA-70.

The sewage/gray water storage tanks shall have the capacity to collect and hold all sewage (black water), waste water (grey water) and food waste, generated within a 72-hour period,


with no overboard discharge during this period. The port tank (3-12-2) shall hold 3596 gallons and the starboard tank (3-12-1) shall hold 3596 gallons.

A complete vacuum collection, holding and transfer (VCHT) system, including waterclosets, sewage powered ejectors, discharge pumps, atmospheric holding tank, valves, remote indication, controls and piping shall be provided for the sewage drains. Waterclosets shall be provided with a bulkhead-mounted flush device.

1385

1390

1395

1400

1405

1410

1415

1420

The VCHT ejector pumps shall discharge to a type II Marine Sanitation Device (MSD) or to the sewage and gray water transfer manifold. The transfer manifold shall be configured to direct untreated sewage to the storage tanks, port/stbd deck connections, or the overboard discharge located on the port side of the vessel. The VCHT pumps shall be resiliently mounted and provided with flexible piping connections.

Any discharges or transfers of black or gray water shall be made through the sewage and gray water transfer manifold. The manifold shall have a pressure gage and cleanout port, and shall connect to eight branches, each fitted with a ball valve. The branch connections shall include two discharge lines to the port and starboard sewage/gray water tanks. There shall also be two separate discharge lines led to the deck connections and overboard discharge. The manifold can be supplied from the vacuum ejector pumps, MSD treated discharge lines, or from the gray water/black water transfer pump. The manifold also has a feed line for seawater flushing supplied by the auxiliary seawater system.

The Type II MSD shall discharge treated effluent to the sewage and gray water transfer manifold. A powered vent system shall be installed between the MSD sewage tank and the top of the stack. A sewage cleaning gear locker shall be provided adjacent to the MSD unit. A flushing connection, using seawater from the auxiliary service system (see Section 524.1) shall be provided near the MSD unit to flush the discharge piping or rinse the storage tanks.

Incoming gravity drains to the sewage tanks and forward gray water holding tank shall be provided with vented deep traps to provided added protection against dry traps. These traps shall have a 20-inch minimum water seal, take-down joints, and a cleanout plug.

593.3 Solid Waste

A garbage grinder shall be provided in the galley for food waste disposal. The piping system serving the garbage grinder shall permit selective discharge overboard or to the VCHT.

593.4 Incinerator

An oil-fired incinerator in accordance with IMO requirements shall be installed in the Incinerator Room on the 01 deck. The incinerator shall be a ThermTec model M4, and shall be capable of burning all shipboard waste including galley garbage, plastic, metal cans, etc. The incinerator shall burn diesel fuel from a 130-gallon incinerator storage tank located in the space. The incinerator shall also be capable of burning waste oil from the vessel’s waste oil tank. Waste oil burning shall be accomplished with a diesel oil mixture


and a separate sludge preparation tank. For details on the incinerator exhaust piping refer to Section 562.3.


SECTION 600 OUTFIT AND FURNISHINGS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

600 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS .................................................................................................1 600.1 General..........................................................................................................................................1 600.2 Interior Décor................................................................................................................................1 602 HULL DESIGNATIONS AND MARKINGS...........................................................................1 602.1 General..........................................................................................................................................1 602.2 Warnings, Caution, Operating and Instruction Plates ...................................................................2 602.3 Anchor Chain Markings................................................................................................................2 602.4 Builder’s Name Plate ....................................................................................................................2 602.5 Vessel’s Name ..............................................................................................................................3 602.6 Stack Logos...................................................................................................................................3 602.7 Compartment Markings ................................................................................................................3 602.8 Door, Hatch and Manhole Markings.............................................................................................3 602.9 Markings of Equipment ................................................................................................................3 602.10 Notice Frames ...............................................................................................................................3 602.11 Whiteboard and Bulletin Boards...................................................................................................4 602.12 Directional Signage.......................................................................................................................4 602.13 Service System Markings..............................................................................................................4 602.14 Piping and Mechanical System Identification and Valve Label Plates .........................................5 602.15 HVAC System Identification ........................................................................................................5 602.16 Electrical System Markings ..........................................................................................................5 602.17 ADA Markings..............................................................................................................................6 603 DRAFT MARKINGS .................................................................................................................6 603.1 General..........................................................................................................................................6 603.2 Calculative Draft Marks................................................................................................................6 603.3 Appendage Draft Marks................................................................................................................7 603.4 Load Line Marks...........................................................................................................................7 603.5 Thruster Marks..............................................................................................................................7 604 LOCKS, KEYS AND TAGS ......................................................................................................7 604.1 General..........................................................................................................................................7 604.2 Grouping of Locks ........................................................................................................................8 604.3 Master Keys ..................................................................................................................................8 604.4 Numbering ....................................................................................................................................8 611 HULL FITTINGS .......................................................................................................................8 611.1 Padeyes .........................................................................................................................................8 611.2 Eyebolts ........................................................................................................................................9 611.3 Unistruts........................................................................................................................................9 612 LIFERAILS, LIFELINES AND STANCHIONS.....................................................................9 612.1 General..........................................................................................................................................9 612.2 Liferails .........................................................................................................................................9 612.3 Lifelines ......................................................................................................................................10 613 FLAG HOISTS, FABRIC COVERS AND CURTAINS........................................................10 613.1 Covers .........................................................................................................................................10 613.2 Curtains.......................................................................................................................................10 613.3 Flag Hoists and Rigging..............................................................................................................11 621 NON-STRUCTURAL BULKHEADS AND PARTITIONS..................................................11 621.1 Joiner Bulkheads, Linings and Ceilings......................................................................................11


621.2 Toilet, Shower Spaces, Hydro Lab, and Galley ..........................................................................13 621.3 Labs and Workshops above Main Deck......................................................................................13 621.4 Accommodation Spaces ..............................................................................................................13 622 FLOORPLATES, LADDERS, HANDRAILS, AND HANDGRABS ...................................14 622.1 Floorplates...................................................................................................................................14 622.2 Ladders........................................................................................................................................14 622.3 Handrails .....................................................................................................................................15 622.4 Handgrabs ...................................................................................................................................15 622.5 Gratings.......................................................................................................................................15 624 DOORS, HATCHES, SCUTTLES, AND MANHOLE COVERS ........................................16 624.1 Doors...........................................................................................................................................16 624.2 Hatches and Scuttles ...................................................................................................................17 624.3 Manhole Covers ..........................................................................................................................17 624.4 Watertight Doors.........................................................................................................................17 624.5 Weathertight Doors—Main Deck and 01 Deck ..........................................................................18 624.6 Weathertight Doors—02 Deck and Above .................................................................................18 624.7 Fire Doors ...................................................................................................................................18 624.8 Joiner Doors ................................................................................................................................18 624.9 Refrigerated Space Doors ...........................................................................................................19 624.10 Galley Rollup Doors ...................................................................................................................19 624.11 Acoustical, Fume-Tight Doors....................................................................................................20 624.12 Miscellaneous Doors...................................................................................................................20 624.13 Quick-acting Scuttles ..................................................................................................................20 624.14 Manholes and Bolted Plate Access Openings .............................................................................20 624.15 Watertight Hatches......................................................................................................................20 625 WINDOWS, FIXED PORTLIGHTS AND AIRPORTS .......................................................21 625.1 Windows, General.......................................................................................................................21 625.2 Fixed Lights ................................................................................................................................21 625.3 Pilothouse Windows and Wipers ................................................................................................21 631 PAINTING.................................................................................................................................22 631.1 General........................................................................................................................................22 631.2 Electrical Equipment...................................................................................................................23 631.3 Other Surfaces.............................................................................................................................23 631.4 Surface Preparation .....................................................................................................................24 631.5 Coatings ......................................................................................................................................25 631.6 Galvanized Sheet Steel Lining ....................................................................................................25 631.7 Glass-Cloth Faced Insulation ......................................................................................................25 631.8 Tank Interiors..............................................................................................................................25 631.9 Safety Marking............................................................................................................................26 633 CATHODIC PROTECTION...................................................................................................26 633.1 General........................................................................................................................................26 634 DECK COVERINGS................................................................................................................27 634.1 General........................................................................................................................................27 634.2 Surface Preparation .....................................................................................................................27 634.3 Underlayment..............................................................................................................................27 634.4 Deck Coverings...........................................................................................................................28 634.5 Carpet:.........................................................................................................................................29 634.6 Rubber Tile: ................................................................................................................................30 634.7 Paint ............................................................................................................................................30 634.8 Walk-Off Mats: ...........................................................................................................................30 634.9 Heavy Use Abrasive Sheet Vinyl Flooring: ................................................................................30 634.10 Polyurethane Seamless Coating – Interior ..................................................................................31 634.11 Floating Floor..............................................................................................................................31


634.12 Cove Molding .............................................................................................................................31 634.13 Safety Treads ..............................................................................................................................32 634.14 Stair Tread Nosings.....................................................................................................................32 634.15 Electrical Safety Sheet Covering and Matting ............................................................................32 635 INSULATION ...........................................................................................................................32 635.1 General........................................................................................................................................32 635.2 Anti-Sweat Protection .................................................................................................................33 635.3 Vapor Barriers.............................................................................................................................33 635.4 Structural Fire Protection ............................................................................................................33 635.5 Thermal Insulation ......................................................................................................................34 635.6 Acoustical Insulation...................................................................................................................34 637 SHEET METAL SHEATHINGS AND LININGS.................................................................37 637.1 General........................................................................................................................................37 637.2 Sanitary Sheathing ......................................................................................................................37 637.3 Protective Sheathing ...................................................................................................................37 638 THERMAL INSULATION FOR REFRIGERATED SPACES ...........................................38 638.1 Walk-In Chill and Freeze Rooms................................................................................................38 638.2 Shelving ......................................................................................................................................38 638.3 Grating ........................................................................................................................................38 640 REQUIREMENTS FOR LIVING ACCOMMODATIONS SPACES .................................38 640.1 General........................................................................................................................................38 640.2 Staterooms...................................................................................................................................39 640.3 Lounge ........................................................................................................................................39 640.4 Accessible Stateroom..................................................................................................................39 644 SANITARY SPACES, PLUMBING FIXTURES, FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES .......42 644.1 Plumbing Fixtures and Fittings ...................................................................................................42 644.2 Lavatories....................................................................................................................................43 644.3 Showers.......................................................................................................................................43 644.4 Water Closet................................................................................................................................43 644.5 Accessories .................................................................................................................................44 644.6 Drinking Fountains .....................................................................................................................44 644.7 Service Sinks...............................................................................................................................44 644.8 Eye Wash Stations ......................................................................................................................44 644.9 Emergency Washdown Showers.................................................................................................45 644.10 Public Heads ...............................................................................................................................45 651 FOOD SERVICE SPACES ......................................................................................................45 651.1 General........................................................................................................................................45 651.2 Materials, Fabrication, and Installation.......................................................................................46 651.3 Hardware.....................................................................................................................................47 651.4 Tops ............................................................................................................................................47 651.5 Counters and Cabinets ................................................................................................................47 651.6 Sub-bases ....................................................................................................................................48 651.7 Shelves ........................................................................................................................................48 651.8 Sinks............................................................................................................................................48 651.9 Galley Equipment .......................................................................................................................49 652 HOSPITAL................................................................................................................................50 655 LAUNDRY SPACES ................................................................................................................51 662 MACHINERY CONTROL STATION FURNISHINGS.......................................................51 663 PILOTHOUSE AND CHARTROOM FURNISHINGS........................................................52

Page 600-iii Regional Class Research Vessel 12 November 2008 Contractor’s Ship Specifications, Rev. B DI-001_Specs\Outline Specifications\Rev B\600b.doc

664 WORKSHOPS ..........................................................................................................................52 664.1 Repair Parts.................................................................................................................................52 664.2 Lifting Gear.................................................................................................................................53 664.3 Electronic Technician (ET) Shop................................................................................................54 664.4 Bosun’s Storeroom(s) and Bosun’s Workshop ...........................................................................55 665 LABS..........................................................................................................................................55 665.1 General........................................................................................................................................55 665.2 Lab Services................................................................................................................................55 665.3 Computer Lab .............................................................................................................................57 665.4 Scientific Van Sites.....................................................................................................................57 670 STOWAGE REQUIREMENTS ..............................................................................................57 671 SPECIAL STOWAGE..............................................................................................................58 671.1 Gasoline Storage .........................................................................................................................58 671.2 Sewage Treatment Locker ..........................................................................................................58 671.3 Immersion Suit Stowage .............................................................................................................58 671.4 Linen Lockers .............................................................................................................................58 671.5 Hazardous Materials Locker .......................................................................................................58 671.6 Medical Locker ...........................................................................................................................59 671.7 Pyrotechnics Locker....................................................................................................................59 671.8 Damage Control Locker..............................................................................................................59 672 STOREROOMS........................................................................................................................60 672.1 Dry Stores ...................................................................................................................................60 672.2 Aft Bosun Stores .........................................................................................................................60 672.3 Fwd Bosun Stores .......................................................................................................................60 672.4 Deck Gear Stores ........................................................................................................................60 672.5 Cleaning Gear Stores ..................................................................................................................60 672.6 Repair Parts Stores ......................................................................................................................60 672.7 Scientific Stores ..........................................................................................................................60 672.8 Hazardous Materials Stores.........................................................................................................60

Page 600-iv Regional Class Research Vessel 12 November 2008 Contractor’s Ship Specifications, Rev. B DI-001_Specs\Outline Specifications\Rev B\600b.doc

SECTION 600 OUTFIT AND FURNISHINGS

5

10

15

20

25

30

35


600.1 General

All outfit materials and furnishings shall be of commercial marine quality, in full compliance with the specifications and suitable for the intended use. All outfitting materials shall be USCG and SOLAS approved, and shall be non-combustible. Unless explicitly stated otherwise, all materials and furnishings shall be new and unused (except for factory testing), of current manufacture and currently supported by spare parts. In general, outfitting materials and furnishings shall be supplied by Jamestown Metal Marine Sales.

600.2 Interior Décor

The final selection and colors shall be approved by the Owner before the Contractor orders material.

602 HULL DESIGNATIONS AND MARKINGS

602.1 General

The vessel shall be provided with label plates. Label plates for any specific purpose shall be uniform in size, of the same material with the same style lettering. A symmetrical and well-balanced arrangement of letters and lines shall be used.

Label plates shall be located to ensure visibility and shall not be located where they can be obscured by furniture, pipes or other fittings.

Label plates installed in the weather or areas exposed to seawater shall be sealed to prevent seepage behind the plates.

Valve label plates shall be circular metal stamped with valve service, and located on the center of the valve wheel.

Piping and ducting shall be labeled as to service and directional flow every 10 feet (at least once) in each compartment.

Electrical cable shall be labeled in accordance with IEEE 45.

All equipment and components shall be labeled as to service and function. All remote operating gear shall be labeled. All bulkhead and ceiling access plates shall be labeled as to the service concealed. Exterior vents and outlets shall be labeled.


602.2 Warnings, Caution, Operating and Instruction Plates

Warning, caution, operating and instruction plates shall be installed in accordance with USCG regulations.

Non-corroding commercial label plates that are provided by the equipment manufacturer, and which contain the required information, are acceptable. Commercial label plates that are deficient in any portion of the required information may be used and augmented by Contractor installed label plates as required.

40

45

50

55

60

65

602.3 Anchor Chain Markings

The anchor chains shall be painted and marked to identify the length of chain paid out as follows:

• One link on each side of the 15 fathom detachable link shall be painted white.

• Two links on each side of the 30 fathom detachable link shall be painted white.

• Three links on each side of the 45 fathom detachable link shall be painted white.

Marking shall continue in this fashion to the bitter end of the chain. The last shot of anchor chain shall be painted red and the second to last shot painted yellow.

Detachable links shall be painted as follows:

• 15 fathom detachable link: red.

• 30 fathom detachable link: white.

• 45 fathom detachable link: blue.

• 60 fathom detachable link: red.

Subsequent detachable links shall be painted in colors that continue this color sequence.

The first link at each side of the 15 fathom detachable link shall have one turn of galvanized or CRES wire tightly wound around the stud. The second link at each side of the 30 fathom detachable link shall have two turns of galvanized wire tightly wound around the stud. The third link at each side of the 45 fathom detachable link shall have three turns of galvanized wire tightly wound around the stud. Wire marking shall continue in this fashion to the bitter end of the chain.

602.4 Builder’s Name Plate

The Builder’s name plate, of an Owner-approved design and legend containing the name of the vessel, the Owner, the Naval Architect and the Builder, shall be provided.


602.5 Vessel’s Name

The vessel’s name shall be placed on both sides of the bow and on the transom in block letters 24 inches high. The hailing port shall be placed on the transom in 12 inch high letters. All letters shall be outlined with a weld bead and painted.

602.6 Stack Logos 70

75

80

85

90

95

100

Logos for the operating institution and the National Science Foundation shall be provided. Enameled steel insignia plates shall be fabricated and mounted on the sides of the stack. The Owner will provide the design and dimensions of the insignia.

602.7 Compartment Markings

Label plates, of engraved phenolic or corrosion-resisting metal, shall be provided and installed on the frame above the door at each entrance to each compartment on the vessel. The label plates shall identify the compartment name and location designation (deck number, frame number, side) in 1/2-inch high letters.

At the entrance to the main machinery room, and at the entrance to any other space where the noise levels exceed 84 dB(A), signs shall be posted reading “DANGER - HIGH NOISE LEVEL.”

602.8 Door, Hatch and Manhole Markings

All oil-tight and watertight doors, hatches and manholes shall have label plates of engraved phenolic or corrosion-resisting metal, designating the compartment name and location to which access is made.

602.9 Markings of Equipment

Lifesaving equipment, fire extinguishing systems, fire doors, fire stations, fire dampers and other equipment shall be marked as described in SOLAS and USCG regulations.

602.10 Notice Frames

Glazed frames of corrosion-resisting metal, hinged if necessary and finished to suit their locations, shall be provided for all required notices, including the following:

• American Bureau of Shipping Classification Certificate • American Bureau of Shipping Load Line Certificate • Admeasurement Certificate(s), Domestic and International • U.S. Coast Guard Stability Letter • Vessel Fire Control and Safety Plans • Certificates of Licensed Officers • Pilot Rules • Light Rules • Station Bills


• Emergency Signals • Life Preserver Notices • Ship’s Radio License

602.11 Whiteboard and Bulletin Boards

A white marking board (dry-erase) approximately 24 inches by 36 inches and cork-surfaced bulletin board, 24 inches by 36 inches with glazed frame of corrosion-resisting metal, shall be provided and installed in the mess.

105

110

115

120

125

130

135

A white marking board (dry-erase), approximately 24 inches by 36 inches, shall be provided and installed in the lounge.

602.12 Directional Signage

SOLAS approved low-location lighting consisting of photoluminescent escape route marking strip, photoluminescent escape route symbols, and photoluminescent firefighting equipment markings shall be provided and installed throughout the vessel in accordance with the requirements of this section and the guidelines of IMO Resolution A.752(18). Such markings and symbols shall be provided throughout the vessel to facilitate emergency egress of all persons on board, and to ensure ready identification of firefighting equipment throughout the vessel.

Low-location photoluminescent strip markings shall be provided and installed in all accommodation and work areas, and all stairwells and passageways leading from these spaces to the muster station. Small compartments, such as cabins, do not need photoluminescent markings; however, large spaces such as labs, mess and lounge shall be fitted with such markings.

All photoluminescent strip, markings and symbols shall be made of rigid PVC plate and installed in aluminum framing having top and bottom glide channels to hold the PVC plate. Aluminum end caps shall be installed at the end of the glide channels.

Markings and symbols shall be mounted on flat vertical surfaces (e.g., bulkheads and doors), except for specific locations where other mounting schemes are proposed by the material supplier.

602.13 Service System Markings

System and component identifying labels or nameplates shall be provided and installed throughout the vessel. Lettering shall be not less than 3/16 inch in height. Primary information shall be in letters of larger size than secondary information.

For all machinery and equipment not otherwise labeled by the manufacturer, a label plate listing the function of the component and other pertinent data shall be provided and installed.


A label shall be provided and installed for all instruments, indicating the purpose of the instrument.

602.14 Piping and Mechanical System Identification and Valve Label Plates

All piping systems shall be color coded and stenciled to indicate the medium contained and normal direction of flow. Each pipe shall be marked at least once between takedown joints, on each side of bulkhead penetrations, and at 10 foot intervals (maximum) in each compartment through which the pipe passes or is contained. Valve handwheels and pipe stencils shall be painted in accordance with a list of colors to be proposed by the Contractor and approved by the Owner.

140

145

150

155

160

165

170

Valves shall have label plates of approved non-metallic material clearly stating their purpose. In general, label plates shall be black plastic with letters and numbers etched or engraved in white. All remote control valve operators, tank fills and sounding tubes shall be clearly identified with labels stating their purpose.

Operating gear instruction and other operating and cautionary instruction plates required for safe operating of the vessel, similar to the valve plates, shall be provided where necessary.

Valves shall be labeled, where appropriate, indicating “normally closed” (NC) or “normally open” (NO).

Where valves are located behind ceilings and lighting, access panels and labels shall be provided on the joiner work.

602.15 HVAC System Identification

Label plates shall be provided and installed to identify clearly each fan, controller, heater, motor, access plate, thermostat, damper, weather supply, and exhaust outlet, and other major components of the system.

602.16 Electrical System Markings

All electrical equipment shall be fitted with identifying label plates, unless its function is readily apparent. Any special instructions or precautions shall be included on the label plate or on a separate plate on or adjacent to the equipment. Blank nameplates shall be provided for spare feeder switches and circuit breakers. Switchboard and distribution panel busses shall be stamped in a readily visible location with their polarity or phase identification.

Using embossed corrosion-resisting metal cable tags with embossed letters and numbers, all cable shall be identified with: Their cable number and cable type; all points of connection, penetrations to equipment, through bulkheads and decks (both sides); all other locations where both sides of the penetration are not readily visible for cable tracing.


Floaters shall be provided for individual conductors and all terminal points, and shall uniquely identify the conductor using the cable circuit for a base.

All operators and indicators shall be labeled with nameplates that mount on the circumference of the device. Label plates shall be either engraved phenolic or metal and shall indicate the purpose, function, position, or condition, as required. The controller shall have an external label that shall indicate the controller name, circuit number, motor horsepower, circuit breaker rating, and overload rating.

175

180

185

190

195

200

Size of nameplates shall, in general, be selected to conform to the relative size, type, and prominence of the equipment for which they are used.

The size of the lettering shall be selected to give predominance to circuit designation, with smaller letters being employed for secondary information.

Cables shall be identified at control consoles and junction boxes for signal and/or control cables. Cables shall be permanently labeled at the time of initial installation on board the vessel.

602.17 ADA Markings

ADA markings shall be provided in accordance with UNOLS ADA Guidelines for Vessels.

603 DRAFT MARKINGS

603.1 General

Draft marks shall cover the draft of the vessel under all probable conditions of loading and corresponding trims.

The centerline of each set of draft marks shall be in a plane perpendicular to the vessel’s centerline plane and to the molded base plane.

Draft marks shall be painted figures outlined by weld bead. Draft marks in areas forward of sonar shall be outlined by punch marks.

603.2 Calculative Draft Marks

Draft marks shall be provided and installed on the port and starboard sides at each end of the vessel. All draft marks shall be in vertical columns. Draft numerals shall be six (6) inches in projected height. Draft figures shall be painted in accordance with Section 631. The range of numerals shall be such as to encompass the extremes in operating drafts. Calculative draft marks shall be aligned to the vessel-based coordinate system.


603.3 Appendage Draft Marks

Appendage draft marks shall be 6 inches in vertical projected height. Appendage draft marks shall be provided, port and starboard, above the appendage location. The letters PROJ shall be installed in six inch high block letters, with the bottom 6 inches above the top of the uppermost draft marks.

205

210

215

220

225

230

235

603.4 Load Line Marks

Load line marks shall be provided in accordance with regulatory body requirements. Plimsoll figures shall be painted in accordance with Section 631.

603.5 Thruster Marks

Thruster marks shall be provided above the bow thruster location. Thruster figures shall be painted in accordance with Section 631.

604 LOCKS, KEYS AND TAGS

604.1 General

Locks and keys shall be provided for closures (except for escape scuttles), providing access to the interior of the vessel from the weather and for interior closures where required for security, such as storerooms, lockers, staterooms, labs, workshops and operating spaces. Escape scuttles shall be provided with a latching device operable from below, only.

Door locks throughout the vessel shall be fitted with keys in accordance with the number of room occupants plus two spare keys, or in non-living spaces with two keys and one spare. Each door requiring a lock shall be provided with a minimum of three keys. The keys for each lock shall be different from the keys to other locks, except where there is more than one door to the same compartment, in which case these doors shall be keyed alike.

Key lockers fitted with hooks and names or numbers for distinguishing the keys shall be provided in the Master’s and Chief Engineer’s staterooms for the proper stowage of all keys coming under their supervision. Each key locker shall be provided with a lock and key.

Joiner doors shall be fitted with built-in mortise-type locks. All parts shall be of solid metal. The front and cases shall be of brass or bronze, with working parts of brass or bronze and spindles of steel. Locks and latch sets shall have features suitable for the use of the space, and shall be in accordance with a lock list approved by the Owner. Doors shall have lever handles.

All watertight doors, weathertight doors, access doors, hatches, manholes and scuttles to compartments for the stowage of equipment or stores, which are not fitted with mortise type locks, shall be provided with safety type hasps, staples and cylinder type padlocks. Hasps and staples shall be welded and fitted so that when the closure is opened or closed,


padlocks cannot be caught between the closure and the frame. In addition, crew’s and scientists’ locker doors shall be fitted with padlocks. Padlocks shall be 1-3/4 inch size, of a heavy-duty marine type, with brass casing and brass or bronze pin tumblers. Brass keeper chains shall be fitted to all padlocks.

240

245

250

Doors to semi-private toilet/shower modules shall be provided with locks that can be locked from inside, to ensure privacy.

The doors for the public toilets shall be provided with a lock on the inside.

Hardware including handles, hinges and locks for exterior doors, shall be Type 316 CRES. All locks and latch sets shall be made by a manufacturer thoroughly familiar with marine requirements.

604.2 Grouping of Locks

Door locks of the same type shall be master keyed in the following groups, as appropriate to their service:

D Deck Department

E Engine Department

S Steward Department

M Scientific Spaces

N Navigation

604.3 Master Keys

Three master keys shall be furnished for each of the groups, and three grand master keys for all groups. Padlocks shall be similarly grouped and master keyed, with three sets of keys provided.

255

260

265

604.4 Numbering

Keys shall be numbered and have a tag of heavy fiber or plastic with the name of the department, space and vessel inscribed thereon. A key tag index book, in loose-leaf form, shall be prepared identifying the key tag number, the key serial number, and the compartment or item secured by the key.

A lock, key and tag index for spaces and equipment shall be prepared.

611 HULL FITTINGS

611.1 Padeyes

Padeyes shall be provided in number, location and capacity, as necessary for convenient and rapid handling of stores to and from storerooms. Padeyes and lifting fittings shall be provided over machinery, as may be necessary for lifting parts of the machines and


transfers to the workshops or over-the-side. Padeyes shall be located and installed in order that the load will be applied in the plane of the eye or shall be designed for side loading when required by the handling arrangement. 270

275

280

285

290

295

300

611.2 Eyebolts

Eyebolts, ringbolts, deck screw removable eyebolts, cleats and other fittings necessary for the attachment, working, belaying and securing of all parts and appliances shall be fitted. Deck screw reversible eyebolts of equal size shall be interchangeable. Deck screw reversible eyebolts and other portable fittings on deck shall be arranged to leave the deck flush when the portable parts are removed and stowed.

Sockets and supporting structure shall be designed to safely withstand the largest load that can be applied to the eyebolt. Sockets on the weather deck shall be Type 316 CRES.

611.3 Unistruts

Galvanized steel channels, Attwood Unistrut, shall be provided and installed on 24-inch centers, running vertically on bulkheads and longitudinally in overheads in the following compartments:

• Main Lab

• Hydro/Wet Lab

• Computer Lab

• Science Stores

Channels shall be attached to the framing for, and shall be essentially flush with, bulkhead sheathing and ceiling panels. On smooth, unsheathed bulkheads, channels may be welded directly to bulkheads. The Unistrut shall be aligned with the bolt sockets/grid in the decks.

612 LIFERAILS, LIFELINES AND STANCHIONS

612.1 General

Deck edges shall be provided with life rails or lifelines, except where bulwarks are provided. Liferails shall be installed, except where lifelines are required. Removable lifelines and removable lifeline stanchions shall be installed where a clear deck edge is required for overside handling or other operation.

612.2 Liferails

Liferails shall be fitted in three courses to a minimum height of 39-1/2 inches. The stanchions and upper course shall be of 2 inch pipe, and the intermediate courses of 1-inch pipe. Minimum stanchion spacing shall be 5 feet. All exterior pipe rails and stanchions shall be steel. Life rail stanchions shall be set on doubler plates.

Hand grabs of wood shall be provided and installed in way of all electrical switchboards.


Guard rails shall be provided and installed around moving parts of machinery, which are not enclosed.

Interior multi-course handrails shall be provided and installed at all perimeter boundaries of differing height grating levels in machinery spaces and at all stairways. 305

310

315

320

325

330

335

612.3 Lifelines

Lifelines shall be three courses high of 1/2-inch diameter, with CRES or anodized aluminum end fittings, turnbuckles and sister hooks.

Lifeline stanchions shall be located no more than 8 feet apart. Removable lifeline stanchions shall use bolt-down sockets with Type 316 CRES attachment fittings.

Lifelines shall be fitted in three courses to a minimum height of 39-1/2 inches. Stanchions shall be reinforced to prevent bending by loaded wire.

Where chain rails are used in portable sections, 5/16-inch diameter galvanized close-link chain shall be used and the stanchion shall be braced where necessary. Galvanized turnbuckles and pelican hooks shall be used in setting up the chain.

Removable wire rope lifelines and pipe stanchions shall be provided and installed across the stern ramp opening. The removable stanchions shall be welded to base plates with reinforcing brackets, and have at least two dedicated bolt-down fittings for each stanchion base plate.

Removable chain or wire rope lifelines shall be provided and installed across openings for mooring fittings, at the top of all vertical ladders, in way of boats and other openings.

613 FLAG HOISTS, FABRIC COVERS AND CURTAINS

613.1 Covers

Covers shall be provided for items of topside hardware requiring weather protection when not in use, such as signal searchlights, anchor windlass, winches and other deck machinery. Grommets and fittings used on covers shall be CRES. Storage bags of synthetic fabric, each with stenciled identification markings, shall be provided for these covers.

Covers for small equipment requiring 10 ft2, or less, of material shall be blue Herculite 60. Covers for larger equipment requiring more than 10 ft2 shall be blue Herculite 80. Each cover shall have stenciled markings to indicate its use and location. Covers shall fit neatly, and shall be fitted with accessories to secure them in place. Covers shall be reinforced in areas where sharp edges of machinery may cause damage.

613.2 Curtains

Curtains shall be provided in accordance with Section 640. Blackout curtains shall be installed to prevent light from entering the pilothouse from adjacent spaces at night.


Blackout curtains shall be black, and shall be fitted to exclude light emission from, or into, the space, and shall permit sliding to an open or closed position. Straps shall be provided to retain curtains in the open position.

613.3 Flag Hoists and Rigging

Signal flag hoists and retrievers shall be provided on the signal yardarms. A hoist shall also be provided on the after part of the mast for the national ensign. Flag hoists shall be provided on the jack and ensign staffs.

340

345

350

355

360

365

370

All necessary rigging and associated fittings shall be provided and installed for the mast, radio antennas, etc., to produce a thoroughly workable installation complete for the intended service.

Wire rope shall be stainless steel.

Fiber rope shall be Dacron or an Owner approved equivalent. Thimbles shall be spliced into eyes where necessary.

Rigging fittings shall be constructed so that shackle or clevis pins are close fitting and subjected only to shearing stress.

Two signal halyards shall be provided of 1-inch circumference Dacron line with bronze snap hooks at each end.

All loose gear and running rigging, including fittings, shall be tested to demonstrate function and suitability.

621 NON-STRUCTURAL BULKHEADS AND PARTITIONS

621.1 Joiner Bulkheads, Linings and Ceilings

Ceilings, joiner bulkheads and linings shall be provided in accommodation areas, common areas, pilothouse, labs and the passageways in these areas. All steel bulkheads shall be lined on the stiffened side in labs and accommodation spaces. Linings may be provided on the unstiffened side of steel bulkheads if required for noise attenuation. Joiner linings will not be provided in compartments below the main deck, except in accommodations spaces and MCS. Joiner linings need not be provided in lockers and storerooms with structural bulkheads.

The construction of joiner work shall be of such design as to conceal insulation and bulkhead stiffeners, electrical cables, electrical connection boxes, ventilation and air conditioning ductwork, and piping. Finished ceilings shall be provided and shall be integrated with lights, speakers, and air terminals.

Joiner bulkhead and lining panels that surround spaces with terrazzo, or slip-resistant deck covering, shall be provided with six-inch high CRES coamings made watertight by continuous weld. Joints of these panels shall be caulked.


All joiner work shall be installed securely to prevent rattling, and where access is required for maintenance, inspection or repair, hinged and latched panels shall be provided and labeled to indicate the item concealed.

In the labs, linings shall be installed between and flush with the Unistrut mounting channels on stiffened and unstiffened sides of steel bulkheads. 375

380

385

390

395

400

405

Concealed framing, molding, hangers and furring used in the erection of bulkheads and linings shall be of steel. Steel trim shall be provided at the intersection of linings and joiner bulkhead with overheads. Exposed framing, moldings and trims shall be finished to blend in with the color of the bulkhead finishes.

Heavy items that need to be secured to bulkheads, such as berths and lavatories, shall be secured to structural members or to specially reinforced joiner bulkheads.

Joiner linings and bulkheads shall extend up beyond the continuous B-class ceiling to maintain the structural fire integrity as required by the regulatory bodies. Draft stops shall be provided between compartments as required by the regulatory bodies.

Continuous, B-rated ceiling systems shall be provided in all interior spaces above the main deck, except in science spaces with Unistrut, machinery uptakes; utility spaces; wire, plumbing and ventilation trunks; machinery rooms (e.g., fan rooms); storerooms and lockers. A continuous, B-rated ceiling system shall also be installed in the MCS, staterooms, and accommodation spaces on the 1st platform deck.

Continuous ceiling systems shall be identical to the extent practical, except as noted below. The ceilings shall have the following characteristics:

• Ceilings shall have sufficient suspension attachments to preclude any sagging, vibration, or buckling.

• Ceilings shall be installed squarely to ensure proper fit of ceiling panels for ease of installation and future access.

• All lighting fixtures shall be installed flush with the ceilings without any exposed edges.

• Ventilation terminals and grilles shall be finished to blend with the ceilings and joiner work colors.

• Access to overheads shall be provided in all spaces.

• Where required by Section 635, ceiling panels shall have an inlay of acoustic insulation. The insulation shall be firmly attached to the ceiling panels.

• All components, such as lights, fire detectors, access panels and public address speakers shall be fully integrated with the ceiling system.

In the compartments with Unistrut, the ceilings shall be installed flush with and intercostal to the Unistrut.


Minimum clear ceiling heights shall be as follows:

• Living, walking and working areas: 6'-9".

• Storerooms: 8'-0".

Deviations from these height requirements shall be on a case-by-case basis where these minimum headroom requirements are demonstrated to be impractical.

410

415

420

425

430

435

440

621.2 Toilet, Shower Spaces, Hydro/Wet Lab and Galley

In way of the joiner bulkheads and linings for the galley, hydro/wet lab, toilet/shower modules, and other wet spaces, a 1/4 inch by 6 inch flatbar coaming shall be provided and seal welded all around the deck. The joiner linings shall be lapped over the coaming, stopped short of the deck, and sealed watertight.

Toilets and shower spaces shall be built-in or prefabricated enclosures. Built-in enclosures shall be made of joiner panels and ceilings.

Toilet/shower spaces shall have the exterior sides treated with a lining and covering matching both color and material of the adjacent space (i.e., staterooms or passageway). The finish of the interior toilet/shower space shall be waterproof, scratch resistant, readily repairable and integrated with seamless floors.

The galley shall be lined with Type 304L or 316L stainless steel sheet.

621.3 Labs and Workshops above Main Deck

A 7/8-inch solid core joiner system shall be provided and installed throughout the labs and workshop compartments. Joiner linings shall be fire rated to B-0 and shall have color and finish of exposed bulkheads and linings match the approved color boards. The joiner system in the labs and workshops shall be installed flush with and intercostal to the Unistrut system described in Section 611.

621.4 Accommodation Spaces

A softcore bulkhead and lining system shall be provided in the accommodation spaces. Softcore bulkhead and lining system partitions shall conform to the following:

• Physical dimensions: minimum 600 mm wide by 50 mm inches deep (bulkheads) (25 mm deep for linings) with no visible horizontal joints

• Materials:

o Cladding: 150 micron flame-proof class 1 PVC foil o Surface: 0.6 mm aluminum o Color: To match color boards

• Core material: Mineral wool, 150 kg/mm3 minimum density

• Fire rating: B-15 (bulkheads)


• Acoustical: 32 dB

• Weight: 19.2 kg/m2 (bulkheads), 13.8 kg/m2 (linings)

• Thermal insulation: 1.15 W/m2 (bulkheads) (0.66 W/m2 linings)

622 FLOORPLATES, LADDERS, HANDRAILS AND HANDGRABS

622.1 Floorplates 445

450

455

460

465

470

475

Machinery space floorplates shall be provided for personnel access. Machinery space floorplates shall be diamond pattern steel plates secured with CRES countersunk machine screws. Self-tapping screws are not permitted. All plating shall be installed with backing tape. Hinged plates shall be provided for access to valves, strainers, manifolds and spaces below the floorplates and shall be provided with means to secure in the fully open position. Coaming bars shall be fitted along the edges and at permanent openings. Each floorplate panel shall weigh less than 60 pounds. Floor plates and supporting structure shall be designed to carry a load of 200 pounds per square foot.

622.2 Ladders

Climber safety rails located in the weather shall be CRES. Means of access, such as vertical ladders or rungs, shall be provided to tanks, voids, top of pilothouse, mast and other areas where access is required for maintenance.

Ladders shall lead fore and aft whenever possible. In spacing ladder and stair treads, the following formula shall be used: 2R + T = 24 inches, where R = riser height in inches, T = projected tread depth in inches. Inclined ladders shall be removable, and provided with slip resistant cap treads.

Vertical ladders and ladder rungs shall be constructed of steel in accordance with ASTM F840 and ASTM F783. Vertical ladders shall be removable where needed. Width, rung spacing and toe clearance shall conform to ANSI A14.3. Where conditions do not permit installation of a vertical ladder, ladder rungs shall be welded to the structure. Swaged bulkheads shall be provided with foot holes in lieu of rungs.

Portable ladders shall be provided in storerooms where upper shelves are not accessible from the deck. Means shall be provided to secure the ladders when in use by personnel.

An aluminum accommodation ladder shall be provided with a davit, bottom-landing and brow, and stowed in a location that permits deployment under all operating conditions and which permits handling by the vessel’s cranes. Deck edge openings and attachment fittings shall be provided near the head of the gangway.

Slopes and width of inclined ladders and stairways shall be in accordance with U.S. Coast Guard requirements, but in no case may they be steeper than a 50 degree slope, measured to the horizontal.


Where ladders are attached to deck coamings, arrangements shall be made to eliminate any tripping hazard. Exterior ladders shall have bolted, open grating treads that can be easily removable for replacement should they be damaged.

Three-course steel tubing handrails, with 1-1/4-inch diameter top course and 3/4-inch second and third courses, shall be provided on each side of the ladders with a hand clearance of at least 2-1/2 inches. Ladders shall be attached in a manner permitting relative motion of decks and bulkheads and shall be removable. Inclined ladders over stowage spaces, over other inclined ladders or where otherwise appropriate shall have steel shielding underneath. Ladders shall have a minimum head clearance of 6'-3". Exterior handrails shall be steel.

480

485

490

495

500

505

The base of the ladders shall terminate above the deck in a return bend to the deckhouse sides. A 5/16-inch diameter, galvanized close-link chain with snap fittings at one end shall be provided at the top of each exterior vertical ladder so that when closed it forms a continuation at the top courses of the guard railing.

622.3 Handrails

All interior passageways shall be provided with handrails (i.e., storm rails). Railings shall be installed on all stairways and ladders. All deck openings and other areas where falling and personal injury is a danger shall be fitted with guard rails. Pipe handrails shall be secured to stanchions or bulkheads on each side of inclined ladders. Grab rails shall be provided along the bulkheads at the top and bottom of stairways and inclined ladders.

Handrails on ladders shall be readily removable in way of hatches.

A transverse handrail shall be provided in the overhead of the pilothouse that spans the width of the pilothouse.

622.4 Handgrabs

Handgrabs shall be secured to the vessel’s structure, and shall be installed where they will assist personnel who are ascending, descending, stepping down from ladders to ingress or egress through a scuttle or hatch, and wherever required for the safety of personnel.

622.5 Gratings

Machinery space walkways and platforms shall be provided with removable steel gratings as necessary for ventilation and visibility purposes.

SES transducer locations shall be provided with removable/hinged gratings for access to transducers.

Each grating panel shall weigh less than 60 pounds.


Chain locker gratings shall be galvanized steel fitted with the bars spaced so that their distance shall be one-half the diameter of the wire of the chain, but no greater than 1-1/2 inches.

510

515

520

525

530

535

540

545

Aluminum or glass reinforced plastic (GRP) removable gratings shall be installed in storerooms and refrigerated spaces. Gratings shall be raised one inch above the deck by supports at 12-inch intervals, in a direction that provides drainage and air flow.

Grating shall be installed as necessary for convenient access to and operation of all machinery apparatus and controls, and for entrance to and escape from all of the machinery spaces.

Gratings and supporting structure shall be designed to carry a load of 200 pounds per square foot unless otherwise noted.

Particular care shall be taken to provide portable or hinged grating giving access to operational equipment below the grating level. Slotted hand grabs shall be provided for lifting the plates. Raised portions of floor grates, if fitted, shall be provided with steps and railings between levels. Localized access cuts for reach rods and valve handles shall be provided.

Open gratings shall be steel with a slip-resistant safety tread pattern. Where special shapes or cutouts are necessary, the edges shall be finished with a bonding bar for rigidity and to eliminate protruding members. Supports for abutting sections shall not extend above the grating surface. Stainless steel fastenings shall be provided for firmly holding the gratings to the supporting structure. Fasteners and clips shall not protrude above the grating level.

Handrails and stanchions throughout the machinery spaces shall be of 1-1/4-inch NPS steel pipe, and where attached to bulkheads shall have a minimum of 2-1/2 inches hand clearance. Where necessary for access and machinery removal, the handrails shall be bolted in place.

Removable stiles with open tread grating and handrails shall be provided where necessary to allow safe movement over the shafting and mechanical drive components.

624 DOORS, HATCHES, SCUTTLES AND MANHOLE COVERS

624.1 Doors

Interior doors shall be steel, hollow joiner-type in accordance with ASTM F821, except where other types are required for structural fire protection, acoustic properties, tightness, security and damage resistance, or as otherwise required by the compartment function. The clear height above the finished deck for all doors shall not be less than 6'-6". The clear width of interior doors in living and working spaces shall not be less than 32 inches for offices, control spaces, accessible stateroom, and public spaces; 26 inches for staterooms, and 24 inches for sanitary spaces and miscellaneous lockers. In general, doors shall open into rooms from passageways except for small lockers where outward opening doors conserve interior space. Doors in refrigerated spaces shall open outward.


All doors shall be fitted with bumper stops and holdbacks acceptable to the regulatory bodies. Fire doors and doors between air-conditioned/non-air-conditioned spaces shall not be fitted with friction type holdbacks. Magnetic holdbacks (with activation from the pilothouse) are acceptable. Automatic door closures shall be fitted to doors at air-conditioned/non-air-conditioned boundaries and stairtowers. Joiner doors to staterooms shall be provided with kick-out panels large enough to permit emergency ingress/egress.

550

555

560

565

570

575

580

Door thresholds shall be CRES.

Doors, hatches, scuttles and manhole covers shall have the same degree of tightness as the surrounding bulkheads. Doors that open into passageways (except lockers) shall be provided with portlights. Doors shall be provided with lever action handles. The exterior working deck access to the hydro/wet lab shall be weathertight doors without sills (removable sills permitted) or ramps. If roller curtain doors are provided, removable protective battens, nominal 2-inch thick wood, exterior to the door, to a height of 5 feet above the deck shall be provided. Exterior doors shall be lever-actuated, quick-acting, weathertight with a minimum of four dogs. Doors without overhead deck protection shall be provided with eye-brows above the doors.

624.2 Hatches and Scuttles

Watertight hatches and scuttles in walking and working areas shall be flush. Scuttles shall be quick-acting. Hatches for personnel access shall be quick-acting. Each hatch shall be provided with a wrench or other tool for undogging the closure. The wrench shall be stowed adjacent to the hatch.

Hatches and scuttles shall be provided with a means of securing the closure in the fully open position. The securing device shall be located and designed to be accessible and operable in a seaway. Handgrabs shall be installed on hatches and scuttles to assist personnel in opening and closing the closure. Handgrabs installed on flush hatches and scuttles shall be hinged, and provided with a recess within the closure for stowage. Hatches shall be provided with removable stanchions and lifelines.

Emergency escapes scuttles shall be marked on the interior to indicate exit route.

624.3 Manhole Covers

Manholes shall be provided for access to tanks and void spaces and have a clear opening of 15 x 23 inches. Oil-tight and watertight manhole covers shall be fitted with gaskets and secured with CRES Type 316 fasteners and nuts with anti seize compound. Manhole covers shall be labeled with the tank number.

624.4 Watertight Doors

The sliding watertight doors shall be electro-hydraulically actuated with all controls supplied pre-mounted on the door frame. The sliding watertight doors shall be USCG Type III approved doors.


The sliding watertight doors shall be operable from each side of the bulkhead and remotely from the deck above. The positions of the various sliding watertight doors shall be indicated in the MCS and pilothouse. The doors shall be remotely closable from the MCS and pilothouse. All sliding watertight doors shall have a clear opening of 36 inches wide by 78 inches high.

585

590

595

600

605

610

615

624.5 Weathertight Doors—Main Deck and 01 Deck

Approved weathertight doors shall be provided and installed for access from the 01 deck and main deck. The doors shall be fitted with a minimum of three hinges and six dogs. The weathertight doors for normally accessed areas of the vessel shall be quick acting, and shall be provided with a 12-inch diameter deadlight with cover. The watertight doors providing access to individual compartments located on the weather decks need not be quick acting and need not have a deadlight.

Doors giving access to the living spaces shall be insulated and lagged.

The weathertight door giving access to the wet lab from the working deck shall be a flush (i.e., no sill), 4 dog weathertight door, in accordance with Section 624.6. This results in the door between the wet lab and the passageway being a weathertight door with sill.

624.6 Weathertight Doors—02 Deck and Above

USCG-approved weathertight doors shall be provided and installed for access to weather from the 02 deck and above. Weathertight doors shall be steel, flush, square cornered, insulated doors, with four dogs, three hinges and mortise lock with lever closing hardware. The dogs shall be quick-acting and tied to the lever operator. Weathertight doors shall have rectangular lights of 1/2-inch safety glass.

624.7 Fire Doors

Fire doors of appropriate A-class construction shall be provided and installed in all A-class bulkheads as required by the regulatory bodies. Fire doors shall be provided with USCG and SOLAS (IMO) certificates. Fire doors shall be fitted with regulatory body approved closures, where required.

Hose ports shall be provided in fire doors as necessary to support the fire station spacing.

Rectangular lights of approved safety glass shall be provided in fire doors where allowed by the regulations.

624.8 Joiner Doors

Metal joiner doors shall be provided and installed for interior access to quarters areas as shown on the plans. Joiner doors shall be of the appropriate B-class construction for the bulkheads in which they are installed. B-class fire doors shall be provided with USCG and SOLAS (IMO) certificates.


All inside doors shall be not less than 1-1/4" thick, sound deadened hollow steel, flush type. Doors shall be reinforced for butts, locks and other hardware. Kick-out panels shall be provided where there is no secondary means of escape. Doors to toilet/shower modules shall be 1" thick hollow steel.

620

625

630

635

640

645

650

Joiner doors shall be undercut or provided with louvers as required to meet the ventilation system requirements. Louvers and undercuts shall be in accordance with regulatory body requirements.

Doors shall be fitted to allow clearance through the swing, but particular attention shall be paid to details to avoid noise on entry into spaces. The doors to staterooms shall fit tight all around, and louvers shall be fitted with noise traps.

All interior door sills shall be CRES.

624.9 Refrigerated Space Doors

Refrigerated space doors, frames, and hinges shall be stainless steel, Type 304 or 316.

Each door shall be factory assembled and aligned, complete with frames, hinges, hardware, gaskets and thermal breaks, so that it can be secured aboard the vessel in steel bulkheads without distortion to the plane of the frame or disturbance to the gasket seals. Each door shall be filled with insulation to be equivalent in R value to the bulkhead in which it is located.

Each door shall be operable from both sides. A padlock locking device and an emergency lock release, operable from within the refrigerated space, shall be provided. The emergency lock release on the inside shall open the door even when it is padlocked on the outside. A label plate, containing directions for operating the emergency lock release, shall be mounted in a suitable location adjacent to the release.

Doors shall be designed to allow full swing. Each door shall be square, shall not follow camber, and shall be provided with a hold-open hook with rubber bumper.

All hardware shall be stainless steel and fastened to tapped steel inserts secured to structure behind the sheathing and insulation.

Thermal strip heaters shall be provided for the door frames.

624.10 Galley Rollup Doors

Two (2) A-class fire-rated galley serving windows shall be provided and installed between the galley and mess, one for food service and one for the scullery. The windows shall comply with the A-class fire door requirements. The serving window curtains shall be “normally open” and equipped with a holdback device with local manual override switch to automatically close the curtain in the event of fire. A positive locking device shall be provided in order to secure the galley and scullery when not staffed. Construction of the


curtain shall satisfy the requirements of the U.S. Public Health Service and the World Health Organization “Guide to Ship Sanitation.” 655

660

665

670

675

680

685

The doors shall be the manual push-up type

624.11 Acoustical, Fume-Tight Doors

Hollow steel, flush, insulated, joiner type, fume-tight, acoustical doors with fixed light shall be provided and installed at the entrances to the machinery spaces and electrical equipment rooms. These doors shall be fitted with automatic closures, fume-tight gaskets of acoustical quality, and have acoustic fill. The STC (Sound Transmission Class) for these doors shall be at least 45.

624.12 Miscellaneous Doors

Miscellaneous small doors, of design and construction suitable to their intended purpose, shall be provided and installed as shown on the drawings.

624.13 Quick-Acting Scuttles

The quick-acting scuttles shall be steel, 18-inch diameter, hinged, flush and spring balanced. The scuttles shall line up with the escape ladders and shall be provided with hold-back hooks.

624.14 Manholes and Bolted Plate Access Openings

Oil-tight or watertight manholes, hinged or bolted and suitably gasketed, shall be provided and installed as appropriate, providing access to all tanks. Where hinged manhole covers open against the bulkhead, latches to hold them shall be provided. Nuts on drop bolts of hinged manholes shall be of stainless steel. Handholds and rungs/steps shall be installed as necessary to provide proper access to manholes.

Manholes in the decks of accommodations or passageways shall be recessed and covered by light galvanized steel covers flanged down so as to hold them at the height of the top of the deck covering. Elsewhere, bolted manholes shall be raised.

Large rectangular bolted access plates shall be provided and installed in the various decks to provide access for removal of winch drums. Construction shall be similar to the manholes. The aft main deck hatches shall be fitted with exterior bolt down fittings, see Section 611. Access plates shall be insulated to match the surrounding structure.

624.15 Watertight Hatches

Watertight hatches shall be provided and installed as shown on the plans. All watertight deck hatches shall be installed flush to the deck, hinged, spring balanced and fabricated from steel, unless noted otherwise. The hatches shall be designed to withstand a hydrostatic head as required by the regulations. The strength rating of the watertight


hatches shall not be less than the strength rating of the deck in which they are installed. The hatches shall be insulated to match the surrounding structure.

625 WINDOWS, FIXED PORTLIGHTS AND AIRPORTS 690

695

700

705

710

715

720

Airports, fixed portlights and windows shall be watertight, and shall have brass or CRES frames. Glass shall be thermally tempered and easily replaceable. All spaces on the main deck and above with exterior bulkheads (excluding machinery spaces and lockers) shall have portlights or windows every 8 feet.

Portholes and fixed portlights shall be 16 inches in diameter, and shall be equipped with deadlight covers.

625.1 Windows, General

Windows, of the size and quantity shown on the plans, shall be provided and installed. In general, windows shall be thermo-pane construction. All windows shall be centered 5 feet above the finished interior deck, unless indicated otherwise on the drawings. Hinged deadlight covers complete with securing and stowing arrangements shall be provided and installed for all windows required by the regulatory agencies. Drapes shall be provided and installed for all windows in staterooms and offices.

625.2 Fixed Lights

Fixed lights 12 inches in diameter shall be fitted in doors giving access to weather decks. Deadlight covers shall be fitted to fixed lights in all exterior bulkheads and in doors providing access to weather decks.

625.3 Pilothouse Windows and Wipers

Windows shall be provided in the pilothouse and aft control station exterior bulkheads to maximize viewing area and be arranged to provide clear visibility in all directions. Windows forward and aft in the pilothouse and aft control station shall be sloped 10 degrees inward at the bottom. Glass for the pilothouse windows shall have 1-inch laminated safety glass.

In areas which are not accessible from outside, alternating hinged opening windows shall be provided in the pilothouse and aft control station to provide access for maintenance/access to window wipers, heating elements, washing system and nozzles, and for easy cleaning of the outside of the windows. Two heated clearview screens shall be installed on the forward face of the pilothouse; one port, and one starboard. The pilothouse centerline window shall be heated. Four additional heated windows shall be provided port and starboard. One aft facing, aft control station window shall have a heated clearview screen.

Marine grade, heavy duty, multi-speed, heated, electric wipers shall be provided and installed in the pilothouse and aft control station. Wiper speed settings shall include high, low and intermittent variable speed options. Wipers shall be parallel sweep with interior


mounted motor housing and maximum blade length. Heaters shall be sized to maintain the windows in an ice-free condition under an ice accretion rate of 6 inches per hour. Each window wiper shall be provided with a washing system capable of providing an antifreeze solution or freshwater spray.

725

730

735

740

745

750

755

631 PAINTING

631.1 General

This section describes the coating systems to be used, the surface preparation required and other work to be accomplished with respect to coating and surface protection.

Paints and other coating systems shall be International Paint Company, Inc.

All metal surfaces on the interior and exterior of the vessel shall be completely painted unless specifically stated otherwise for particular items. Nameplates, working surfaces, rubber gaskets, resilient mounts, hoses, flexible connections, working threads and warning plates shall not be painted.

A paint schedule shall be prepared that identifies each surface of the vessel, type of paint to be applied, mil thickness, number of coats to be applied to the surface, and maximum and minimum time between coats. Coatings shall be Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) compliant in accordance with the Southern California Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) requirements.

Coating systems shall be applied in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s recom-mendations and utilizing the latest product information, data sheets, preparation and application guides, and related information available through the manufacturer’s authorized field service representative.

Dry film thicknesses (DFT), where prescribed herein, are the minimum DFT in mils to be applied. Where both film thickness and number of coats are given, both requirements must be fully met. A minimum of two coats shall be applied to satisfy the (DFT).

Equipment, devices, and materials (including but not limited to nameplates, labels, valve stems, fire hoses, bright work, glass and trim) which could be damaged by abrasive blasting, dust associated with the process, or other surface preparation techniques, or which could have their function and appearance degraded by paint overspray, shall be carefully masked and protected. Affected spaces and surfaces shall be cleaned free of grit and residue immediately after grit blasting.

All surfaces shall be dry, clean, and free of rust and foreign matter at the time of appli-cation of any coating and throughout the curing period.

Prior to the application of any follow-on coat, any bare or lightly covered spots in the previous coat shall be thoroughly cleaned and built-up to the required thickness.


Where any coating has been damaged by welding, burning, or other cause, the damaged area shall be repaired by mechanical preparation of the surface, cleaning the surface in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and applying a full coating system in way of the damage. Care shall be exercised to ensure that edges are feathered and that no sanding swirls or other marks will remain after the final coat is applied.

760

765

770

775

780

785

790

Solvents used for thinning and cleaning shall be in strict accordance with the coating manufacturer’s recommendations, and shall be handled, stored and disposed of in strict accordance with current laws, rules or regulations, whether local, state, or federal, pertaining to toxic and/or hazardous waste.

Each coat of primer, anti-corrosive and anti-fouling, shall be of a color that contrasts with that which it is covering.

Finish colors shall be approved by the Owner.

All piping and non-galvanized ducting shall be coated similar to the space where they are located.

Provisions shall be made to coat surfaces that are inaccessible during certain stages of the construction work.

For painting purposes, the painted waterline is defined as a line 6 inches above the full load displacement waterline of the vessel over the entire waterline length.

Organic-tin based anti-fouling systems shall not be used.

631.2 Electrical Equipment

Components, cable hangers, wireway straps, connection boxes, and junction boxes that have not received a finish coating by the manufacturer, or are in exterior locations, shall be painted to match surroundings.

Finished or polished portions of fixtures, glassware, lamps, switches, globes and receptacle cover plates shall be carefully masked or covered during painting.

631.3 Other Surfaces

Any equipment, furniture, or structure that has the coating scratched or damaged shall be touched up prior to delivery of the vessel. The bilge shall be painted with at least two coats of white epoxy to 3 inches above the highest plate or grating level.

Inaccessible voids, such as bilge keels and skeg, shall be treated by the fill-and-drain method using a rust preventative treatment. Fill and drain holes shall be threaded and provided with bronze plugs.

Fuel tanks shall not be painted.


Sewage tanks shall be painted in accordance with paint manufacturer’s recommendations, or as ballast tanks in absence of recommendations.

631.4 Surface Preparation 795

800

805

810

815

820

825

830

At a minimum, surface preparation and application of paints shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. All surfaces shall be prepared to a near white blast in accordance with SSPC SP 10 as defined by the Ship Structures Painting Council, and coated with a two-component, weld-through primer prior to fabrication. Care shall be exercised to ensure that primers are compatible with the other required coating systems. The type of primer intended for use shall be submitted to the Owner for written approval prior to treatment of the steel.

Blast grit shall be checked for cleanliness and shall not exceed 150 microsiemens per square centimeter in accordance with ASTM D4940. The surface profile on these areas shall be angular and at least one third the DFT thickness of the first primer coat. The surface profile on welds shall be angular and not less than 25 microns. Surface contamination shall be checked on all surfaces prior to painting and shall be less than 5 micrograms chlorides per square centimeter. All edges shall be radiused to a minimum of 3 millimeters. All welds in the underwater hull, freeboard, superstructure (including masts and kingposts), decks, and all tanks shall have welds prepared to NACE Standard RP 0178-95 Grade D. All preconstruction primers shall be removed from the underwater hull, freeboard, superstructure (including masts and kingposts), decks, and all tanks. Protective coatings shall be applied as soon as practical after cleaning before corrosion or soil forms.

Prior to application of each coating system, the previously wheel-abraded and primed surfaces shall be treated as follows:

• Non-immersion areas: Degrease, spot-blast all areas of corrosion to standard SSPC-SP-10; grit sweep or waterblast to remove zinc salts prior to application of top coats.

• Areas of immersion, including ballast, potable water and fuel tanks: Return to SSPC-SP-10.

Prior to blasting and application of each coating system, all sharp edges, weld splatter, temporary fittings and other protuberances shall be removed so that no projections exist that would penetrate the coating film.

Immediately after blasting each surface to be painted, all surface contaminates shall be removed and primer applied to prevent rust bloom. Under no circumstances shall a freshly blasted steel surface be left overnight without primer. Should freshly blasted steel be left unprimed, it shall be re-blasted to the originally required quality, removing all traces of rust bloom.

At the conclusion of all grit blasting, all interior spaces shall be thoroughly cleaned to ensure that they are free of dirt, residues and moisture.


631.5 Coatings

The coatings listed in Table 600-1 are mandatory.

Table 600-1. List of Mandatory Coatings

Area Minimum Required Coating Underwater 2 coats epoxy anti-corrosive, 2 coats ablative anti-

fouling

Exterior decks (except areas where nonskid is applied) and exterior deck machinery

1 coat zinc primer 1 coat epoxy anti-corrosive (color different from top coat) 1 coat color acrylic epoxy

Exterior above waterline, except decks and deck machinery

1 coat zinc primer 1 coat epoxy anti-corrosive 1 coat color polyurethane See Note below

Exposed steel area in deckhouse 1 coat primer 2 coats color finish

Steel area in deckhouse behind sheathing 1 coat primer

Machinery spaces 2 coats epoxy system - white

Ballast and roll tanks 2 coats epoxy system – white

Voids 1 coat zinc system 1 coat epoxy – white

Freshwater tanks 2 coats epoxy system (National Sanitation Foundation approved)

Note: Finish coating thickness shall be per manufacturer’s recommendation to maximize endurance with minimum touch-up.

835

840

845

631.6 Galvanized Sheet Steel Lining

All greases, oils, water, salt and other surface contaminants shall be removed from galvanized sheet steel linings using a suitable degreasing detergent prior to application of coating systems. Coating systems shall be applied as described in Table 600-1.

631.7 Glass-Cloth Faced Insulation

Sealing and finish coats shall be applied to glass-cloth faced insulation throughout the vessel as described in the Table 600-1.

631.8 Tank Interiors

Coating systems as described in the Paint Schedule shall be applied to the interior surfaces of the ballast tanks, voids, cofferdams, potable water tanks, sewage tanks and the oily water holding tank. The coatings shall be extended at least 12 inches into the pipe connections of all tanks.


Excess coating shall be removed from all pipe connections. Small connections such as those used for tank level indicators, gauge glasses, thermowells and other such openings shall be confirmed to be free and clear prior to closing the tank. 850

855

860

865

870

875

Immediately after blasting and cleaning, tanks for lubricating oils, diesel oil and sumps shall have their interiors coated with nonvolatile preservative oil compound compatible with the products to be carried in these tanks.

631.9 Safety Marking

Fire stations, pull boxes, fire extinguishers and other similar firefighting equipment shall be painted throughout the vessel using Signal Red.

633 CATHODIC PROTECTION

633.1 General

A zinc anode cathodic protection system shall be installed to protect the underwater hull, appendages, seachests and other external seawater exposed components. Selection and location of anodes shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations for a minimum service life of three years between drydockings.

Zinc anodes shall be installed in all locations where galvanic corrosion of steel structure may occur. These locations shall at least include the following:

• Underwater hull, appendages and other external seawater exposed components.

• The seawater side of seachests and bow thruster seachest.

• The interiors of the ballast tanks.

Anodes installed on the exterior hull and within the seachests shall be zinc cast-in-steel straps welded to the hull.

Zinc anodes within tanks and other interior locations shall comprise at least 22 pounds of zinc each, and shall bolt on to steel straps welded to the vessel’s structure.

The number of anodes to be installed shall be based on the formula N = 6.5W/1000, where “W” refers to the surface area to be protected and “N” refers to the number of 6 inch by 12 inch anodes, after rounding up to the nearest whole number. This quantity shall be doubled where 3 inch by 12 inch anodes are required, and adjusted accordingly for the corresponding surface area of the 22 pound bolt-on zinc anodes used in interior locations.

The anode straps and their welded attachments shall be painted, except where the steel straps are in contact with the zinc material. The zinc material shall not be painted.


634 DECK COVERINGS

634.1 General 880

885

890

895

900

905

910

Materials, thickness, underlayments and applications shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturers’ recommendations.

Materials shall contain no asbestos, formaldehyde, 4-PCHs or any other compound that is known, or has been identified, as a potential hazardous material due to long or short term exposure.

Deck coverings shall not be laid until any required testing for watertightness has been completed and after all connections to decks for fastening machinery, equipment, furniture, etc., are installed.

All deck coverings shall be thoroughly cleaned after finishing, and waxed or otherwise sealed as recommended by the deck covering manufacturer. Thereafter, the decking shall be thoroughly protected so as to prevent damage or wear prior to delivery of the vessel.

Deck covering colors shall be approved by the Owner.

634.2 Surface Preparation

Decks shall be dry, free of dirt and rust, and primed or otherwise protected in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations prior to application of underlayments and deck coverings. All deck steel shall be primed and otherwise protected in accordance with recommendations to prevent rust and corrosion. Welds shall be ground to a maximum of 1/8 inch to avoid excessive underlayment thickness. Underlayments shall be clean and fully cured before installation of deck covering.

634.3 Underlayment

Latex underlayment shall be used to fill all hollows and uneven interior decks. Where adjacent deck coverings are of different thickness, the underlayment for the thinner shall be gradually increased in thickness such that the top of the thinner covering will lie flush with the top of the thicker covering. Particular attention shall be given to walking areas to acquire a smooth contour without noticeable change in pitch.

Underlayment thickness shall be held to a minimum consistent with regulatory agencies and application requirements. In accessible spaces, deck coverings shall be leveled to door sills for wheelchair access.

Underlayments must be clean and fully cured before installation of deck covering. Deck coverings shall be sloped to the drains where deck drains are installed.

Bonding agents for deck coverings shall be as recommended by the manufacturer and approved by all regulatory bodies. Where manufacturer’s specifications require sealer, manufacturer’s instructions shall be strictly adhered to.


All deck coverings must be thoroughly cleaned after installation and shall be free of stains and discoloration. 915

920

925

930

935

940

945

Galley flooring shall be installed after installation of galley equipment. The seamless floor shall then be coved up the bases of the galley equipment.

634.4 Deck Coverings

Deck coverings shall be provided throughout the vessel in accordance with Table 600-2.

All deck coverings shall be commercial grade and selected to provide long life under heavy traffic and abuse.

Each deck covering shall have a low maintenance level for appearance retention over the product’s life span. Many of the required deck coverings are hard surfaces that can easily be washed. Carpeted areas, where feasible, shall be solution dyed for enhanced cleanability.

Epoxy-based terrazzo deck covering, with a five-inch cove, shall be installed in food preparation and cleanup areas, laundry and built-in sanitary spaces.

Vinyl composition deck covering shall be installed in the mess, pilothouse and chart room.

The main lab and hydro/wet lab shall be provided with polyurethane seamless coating. Operating stations that require prolonged standing shall be provided with standing mats.

Deck covering in the computer lab, the ET shop, and the radio area of the pilothouse shall be electrical grade sheet. Operating areas around electrical or electronic equipment shall be provided with electrical grade mats.

Deck covering shall not be installed under enclosed built-in furniture or under equipment with enclosed foundations. Decks in machinery spaces, workshops and storerooms shall be painted.

Three 6 x 24-inch, fabric-backed, slip-resistant deck treads shall be installed on each side of weather doors, at the head and foot of inclined ladders and on each side of doors with sills higher than 4 inches.

Staterooms and the lounge shall be carpeted. The carpet shall be 100% wool, single-level loop pile, woven through to the back.

In built-in shower stalls, within coamings and in the immediate vicinity of drains, adjustment of deck covering thickness or underlay shall be used to slope the deck for drainage. Underlay may be used for drainage in other areas where location of drains makes this necessary, and to smooth over deck welds and irregularities to prevent wear spots.


Slip-resistant deck covering, shall be applied in all working deck areas, hydro/wet lab, the deck around the anchor windlass, and in weather deck areas.

Table 600-2. Deck Covering Schedule

Type of Space Car

pet

Poly

uret

hane

Se

amle

ss

Epox

y-B

ased

Te

rraz

zo

Rub

ber T

ile

Wal

k-O

ff M

ats

Hea

vy U

se

Abr

asiv

e Sh

eet

Viny

l Flo

orin

g

Elec

tric

al G

rade

Sh

eet

Pain

ted

Stee

l

Remarks Mess X

Staterooms and Lounge X Floating Floor on Hold Level

Stateroom showers and WCs X If Built in w/mats at switchboard

Laundry X

MCS X

Passageways X Floating Floor on Hold Level

Hospital X

Labs – Main & Hydro/Wet X

Entrances off exterior decks X

Storerooms and workshops X

Stairways X

Galley and scullery X

Offices X

Linen, C.G. and misc. lockers X

Pilothouse X

Public restrooms X

Auxiliary machinery rooms and fan rooms, main deck and above

X

Computer Lab, ET Shop, Radio Area/Chart Room

X

950 All deck coverings shall be selected so that they satisfy the regulatory bodies and the following minimum requirements.

Carpet:

• Construction: Woven, Axminster • Pile height: 0.312 inches 955


• Face weight: 48 oz/sq. yd. • Rows per inch: 10 • Pitch: 7 • Yarn ply: 3 • Primary backing: Polypropylene 960 • Secondary backing: Fray resistant latex • Color and pattern direction: Color boards • Warranty: 10 year limited wear

Rubber Tile:

• Thickness: 5.0 mm 965

970

• Tile size: Standard • Content: Minimum 55% virgin rubber without processing oils, balance material to

be made of vulcanizers, color pigments, dirt expelling agents and mineral fillers • Slip resistance: ASTM D2047 equal to or greater than .6 • Color and pattern direction: Color boards • Warranty: 10 year limited wear warranty

Paint

All decks not covered with deck covering shall be painted as generally outlined in Section 631. Color shall be described in the color boards.

Walk-Off Mats: 975

980

• Content: 100% polypropylene • Size: Appropriate for each application • Backing: Vinyl • Edging: Vinyl • Pattern: Raised block • Color direction: Color boards

Heavy Use Abrasive Sheet Vinyl Flooring:

• Gauge: 3.5 mm • Slip resistance: ASTM D2047, dry greater than .90 • Wear resistance: ASTM C501, abrasive wear index in excess of 400. 985

990

• Static load limit: 250 psi in accordance with LF-475a • Antibacterial • All seams must be heat welded according to manufacturer’s instructions for instal-

lation. • Backing: Woven fiber glass • Contents: Quality vinyl, aluminum oxide and quartz crystals, silicon carbide, and

fiberglass mesh • Color Direction: Color boards • Warranty: 7 year limited warranty


634.5 Polyurethane Seamless Coating – Interior 995

1000

1005

1010

1015

1020

1025

1030

Polyurethane seamless coating shall be Products Research & Chemical Corporation, of colors to be approved by the Owner’s Representative. The installation shall consist of No. 430M primer, No. 1539U polyurethane rubber deck coating, No. 1, 1395 low profile nonskid coating and two coats of No. 1, 154 glaze. Total thickness of coating shall be 1/4 inch nominal, except in the labs where it shall be 1/2 inch thick (level to the top of the bolt-down fittings).

The polyurethane seamless coating shall be applied over underlayment in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Deck clips shall be tack welded in place to secure the underlayment. An approved technique to protect the deck and clips against corrosion shall be used prior to installation of the underlayment. Coves of underlayment shall be provided around the perimeter of the space over which the polyurethane shall be carried up to a minimum height of 5 inches to finish in a neat line.

The final finish shall be a nonskid surface with a surface profile of approximately 15 to 20 mils, and shall be smooth enough to allow wet mop cleaning.

634.6 Floating Floor

The floating floors shall be NORAC F-300 Floating Floor. The finished acoustic installation shall be suitably covered with a carpet, poured terrazzo deck, or vinyl tile as per Table 600-2.

Floating floors shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. Penetrations through the floating floors shall be kept to the absolute minimum. Where unavoidable, penetrations shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations, in order to maximize the performance of the floating floor installation.

Joiner bulkheads in compartment with floating floors shall be located on top of the floating floor and isolated from the ship through rubber attachments at all other points.

634.7 Cove Molding

Sanitary rubber base cove molding shall be provided around all boundaries of vinyl tile and rubber tile deck coverings. Coving shall be a minimum of 5 inches high and of continuous roll type with inside and outside corners. Rubber base cove molding shall be firmly secured to joiner bulkheads with adhesive, such as a suitable silicon, which will not react with the plasticizers in the joiner wall vinyl. Coving shall also be sealed along its top edge to prevent any moisture from seeping behind the molding.

Carpet and sheet vinyl shall be coved up bulkheads a minimum of 5 inches and capped with metal extrusion at the cove edge.

All deck covering and coving materials shall be installed in strict adherence to manufac-turer’s specifications.


634.8 Safety Treads

Pressure sensitive, fabric-backed, silicon carbide safety treads shall be provided at the head and foot of all interior and exterior stairways, inclines and vertical ladders, outside elevator doors, on each side of door thresholds, on stair treads that are not safety treads by design, and in other locations where it is deemed necessary to ensure safe footing. Safety treads shall not be installed on any surface until they have been thoroughly cleaned of all waxes, sealers, oils, and other contaminants that may prevent firm adhesion to the deck.

1035

1040

1045

1050

1055

1060

1065

634.9 Stair Tread Nosings

All stair treads shall have aluminum nosings with anti-slip PVC grit insets on the exposed surface of the nosing. The gauge of the aluminum shall be 9/32 inch. The nosing shall be approximately 2-7/16 inches deep from front to back and 3/8 inch high. Fitting and fixing necessary for proper installation and integration with flooring materials must be identified by the shipyard. Means of fastening shall permit periodic replacement of worn nosings without damaging the stairs.

All door thresholds will also have aluminum nosings with anti-slip PVC grit insets. The gauge and size of threshold tread nosings shall be proportionate to door threshold.

634.10 Electrical Safety Sheet Covering and Matting

Electrical grade sheet deck covering shall be installed on decks in electrical and electronic spaces. No seams shall be within 3 feet of electrical or electronic equipment, panels, or work benches. If this is unavoidable, seams shall be heat welded or chemically sealed to provide a continuous surface free of seams, craters or porosities.

In spaces other than electrical or electronic spaces, portable rubber safety matting with ribbed top surface shall be provided in front and back (where accessible) of all switch-boards, control consoles, motor control centers and other electrical equipment as required by regulation and wherever shock hazard exists. Exposed corners of the matting shall be rounded off.

635 INSULATION

635.1 General

The insulation system shall minimize the air conditioning load and meet noise requirements. Insulation exposed to view shall be provided with protection from damage.

All structural fire protection insulation, thermal insulation and acoustic insulation shall be faced type. All cut and exposed edges shall be taped and sealed and a suitable sealer shall be applied. Acoustic insulation facing must not be painted.

At intersections defining the boundary extent of the insulation for thermal and acoustic barriers, the insulation shall be extended or wrapped at least 12 inches. For fire


boundaries, insulation shall be extended or wrapped at least 18 inches (450 mm) in accordance with the regulations.

All insulation, linings and ceiling materials shall be incombustible. Installation shall comply with U.S. Public Health Service ratproofing requirements.

In designing the insulation systems, the effect of structural fire protection shall be considered in the acoustical treatment. Both structural and acoustical insulation may be considered as contributing to the thermal insulation for heat transmission.

1070

1075

1080

1085

1090

1095

Insulation material shall be impaled on steel welding studs or pins. Studs or pins shall be spaced not over 12 inches on bulkheads and 9 inches on overheads, with staggered centers, and be a maximum of 3 inches from the edges of the insulation, or as approved. Insulation shall be secured with 1-1/2" dia washers secured with button-head washer caps, which are to be brought even with the insulation surfaces without depressing or cutting the insulation. Insulation shall not be packed in or compressed during installation.

All insulation shall be in direct contact with the surface that is being insulated (plates, beams, stiffeners, etc.) to eliminate voids between the structure and the insulation.

The metal to which insulating material is to be applied shall be cleaned by suitable means of all dirt, dust, oil, grease, rust and other foreign matter and then given protective coat(s) of paint.

In way of bolted access plates, insulation and sheathing shall be installed in such a manner as to permit the removal of the bolted access plate without the necessity of totally removing or seriously damaging the insulation and sheathing. The outline of the bolted access plate shall be stenciled on the sheathing or insulation in a visible contrasting color.

635.2 Anti-Sweat Protection

Anti-sweat treatment shall be applied on the warm side of uninsulated boundaries, including webs and flanges of beams and stiffeners; in areas where sweating can occur because of temperature differences on the deck under; on all vertical boundaries of air-conditioned spaces common to non-air-conditioned spaces; on the exterior surface of tanks; and on any area where condensation can affect electrical installation.

635.3 Vapor Barriers

Vapor barriers shall be applied to insulation located within the laundry, scullery, and galley, and to the insulation on the warm side of refrigerated stores spaces.

635.4 Structural Fire Protection

All surfaces shall be insulated as required to satisfy USCG and SOLAS requirements for structural fire protection.


All material used in the structural fire protection provided shall be currently certified by the USCG for the use intended and shall be 100 percent free of asbestos-containing material. Documented proof of the certification shall be required prior to the start of installation.

1100

1105

1110

1115

1120

1125

1130

Structural fire protection shall be mineral wool batts or blankets faced with fiberglass cloth attached to the mineral wool using an approved adhesive. All seams shall be sealed with fiberglass cloth strips and the surface of the cloth coated with two coats of latex type coating.

Insulation installed on bulkheads shall be cut back approximately 4 inches from the bottom at the deck bulkhead intersection, as allowed by the regulations, to prevent possible wicking. The edges of the insulation shall be tightly and neatly sealed with tape of a type recommended by the insulation manufacturer.

635.5 Thermal Insulation

All thermal insulation shall be fiberglass and faced.

Thermal insulation shall be applied on the boundary surfaces of all spaces that are heated or cooled, and which are exposed to the weather or are adjacent to or below unheated spaces, except in way of stacks. Insulation shall in general cover the inside surface of the bulkhead and overhead plating and shall extend at least 12 inches beyond the exposed area around webs and flanges of beams, stiffeners, girders and other contiguous structure.

Thermal insulation installed on bulkheads and overheads shall be at least 3 inches thick and shall have a K-factor of 0.23 at 75°F.

Beam wraps shall be 1 inch thick and shall have nominal density of no less than 3 pounds per cubic foot.

All material used in providing thermal insulation shall be currently certified by the U.S. Coast Guard for the intended use and shall be 100 percent free of asbestos.

All edges and joints shall be sealed with tape of a type recommended by the insulation manufacturer to present a smooth, continuously sealed surface.

Insulation installed on bulkheads shall be cut back 4 inches from the bottom at the deck bulkhead intersection to prevent possible wicking. The edges of the insulation shall be tightly and neatly sealed with tape of a type recommended by the insulation manufacturer.

Thermal insulation for the chill and freeze rooms shall be as described in Section 638.

635.6 Acoustical Insulation

The following treatments shall be provided and installed, to attenuate noise within the limits prescribed in Section 073 for each space.


Insulation installed on bulkheads shall be cut back 4 inches from the bottom at the deck/bulkhead intersection to prevent possible wicking. The edges of the insulation shall be tightly and neatly sealed with tape of a type recommended by the insulation manufac-turer.

1135

Acoustic Treatments

Table 600-3 lists absorptive treatments, damping treatments, and joiners that shall be provided and installed on the vessel. Note that additional treatments of these types may be used elsewhere as necessary.

1140

1145

1150

1155

1160

1165

1170

The acoustic insulation types listed in Table 600-3 shall be as follows:

• Type 1 – 4" mineral wool, 6 pcf, with perforated sheet metal sheathing

• Type 2 – Damping Tile

• Type 3 – Delta dB spray on damping material.

• Type 4 – 2” fiberglass, 3 pcf, with perforated sheet metal sheathing

All damping tile shall be EAR Specialty Composites model CN. The damping tile shall be used in the unconstrained format. The thickness of each of the damping tiles shall be greater than or equal to the thickness of the plating to which it is applied.

General guidance for damping tile installation will be taken from NAVSEA (NAVSHIPS) 0939-LP-000-1010, "Vibration Damping Materials, Procedures for Installation Maintenance and Repairs," dated June 1968. Damping tiles coverage shall be approximately 70% of the center of unstiffened plating area. No stiffeners, angles or flanges require damping tiles.

Damping tiles shall not be installed on curved surfaces having a radius of 18 inches or less. Damping tiles shall not be installed closer than 1 inch from stiffeners. Damping tiles shall not be installed to locations where tile would be less than 8 inches wide or 64 square inches of area. All areas of coverage shall be with a single damping tile unless th3e area of coverage is greater than 12x12 inches. Damping tiles shall not be installed over any weld beads or near any Zinc anodes. No burning or welding shall be allowed after tile installation.

The steel surfaces where the damping tiles are to be installed shall be cleaned of oil, grease, or waxy substances using a cloth wetted with 1,1,1 Trichloroethane. The metal surfaces shall be covered with one coat of Amercoat 150 (Formula 150 perMIL-P-24441 or equivalent) paint. If oil, grease, or other contamination remains on the painted surfaces, it shall be removed by using a cloth wetted with 1,1,1 Trichoroethane just prior to installation of the damping treatment. Before installation of the damping tiles, the shipyard shall lay out the exact locations of all tiles with a template, by outlining each tile with a marker. The owner's representative shall inspect the locations before installation shall proceed.


The tiles shall be attached to the steel surfaces using Bostik 7132/Boscodur #4 (EAR Specialty Composites), Phillybond TA-30 (Philadelphia Resins) or another adhesive complying with MIL-A-24456. The adhesive is a two-component system, and shall be blended together just before application. No adhesive shall be used that has a "pot-life" of longer than 1-1/2 hours. Adhesive components which are below 70°F in temperature shall be preheated to 70 to 95°F before blending. To provide intimate contact with curved steel plating, damping tiles shall be preformed by heating to 150°F, and bent into the shape of the steel plate.

1175

1180

1185

1190

1195

1200

The adhesive shall be applied to one side of the damping tile and to the steel plate with a grooved trowel. The entire face of the damping and steel plating shall be covered with adhesive. The tiles shall be pressed, adhesive side down, onto the coated metal surface, ensuring that pressure is applied over its entire surface. Excess adhesive shall be removed immediately, and may be applied to subsequent tiles or to the surface being damped. It will be necessary to shore tiles installed on vertical, overhead, curved, and irregular surfaces to prevent them from slipping until the adhesive sets, and to ensure that the tile conforms to the underlying surfaces. When tile adhesive has cured, the installed damping tiles shall be covered with one coat of Amercoat 150 paint (or equivalent).

During painting and tile installation, the temperature of the work area shall be between 50 and 95°F. When the work area temperature is below 50°F, the paint shall be mixed and allowed the proper induction time at 70°F or greater (not to exceed 95°F), and then carried to the work site. When the work area temperature is below 50°F, the adhesive components shall be preheated to 70°F, mixed at 70°F or greater (not to exceed 95°F), and then carried to the work site.

Damping treatments are susceptible to damage or destruction by heat. No burning or welding shall be performed in the vicinity of such installations without first removing the damping material in the way of the heated plate.

All Type 3 spray on damping shall be Mascoat Delta dB without equal. The thickness shall be 0.125"±20%, or as recommended by the vendor. Installation shall be performed according to manufacturer instructions by a qualified installer recommended by the manufacturer.

Table 600-3. Locations for Acoustic Insulation

Deck Compartment Bulkhead Location

Bulkhead Insulation

Type

Deckhead Insulation

Type

Hold Level Engine Room All 1 1

Hold Level Bow Thruster Room All 2 or 3 2 or 3

All Fan Rooms All 4 4


637 SHEET METAL SHEATHINGS AND LININGS

637.1 General

Access panels shall be provided in sheathing for maintenance and inspection of equipment located behind the sheathing.

1205

1210

1215

1220

1225

637.2 Sanitary Sheathing

Sanitary bulkhead and overhead sheathing shall be installed in the galley and the interior of refrigerated spaces. Sanitary sheathing shall be CRES Type 304, satin finish, USSG 16 for the bulkheads, and USSG 20 for the overhead.

637.3 Protective Sheathing

Protective sheathing shall be installed in spaces without linings or sanitary sheathing, in stair towers, and where insulation is subject to damage by personnel, material handling or storage.

Sheet metal sheathing shall be attached to all surfaces required to be sheathed in general accordance with Table 600-4, Sheet Metal Lining Schedule.

Portable sections of sheathing shall be provided where required for accessibility in way of wiring, ducts, piping, air conditioning controls, filters at unit air conditioners, etc. They shall be hinge-fitted with quick-acting catches where frequent access is necessary.

All edges of linings shall be neatly trimmed and deburred. Seams shall be butted and covered with a smoothed and deburred strip of the next heavier gauge metal.

Trim pieces and escutcheon plates of like material shall be provided around linings and penetrations. Fasteners for stainless steel linings shall be stainless steel. Fasteners for galvanized lining shall be either plated to resist corrosion or of stainless steel.

Table 600-4. Sheet Metal Lining Schedule

Space Location Type Engine Room Bulkheads and Overhead Perforated sheet metal over acoustic

insulation – See Section 635.

Storerooms Bulkheads to 4' above deck Sheet metal sheathing over insulation

Fan rooms Bulkheads to 4' above deck Perforated sheet metal sheathing over insulation

Auxiliary machinery rooms Bulkheads to 4' above deck Sheet metal sheathing over insulation

Chill and Freeze Room Bulkheads and Overhead CRES Sheathing

Galley Bulkheads and Overhead CRES Sheathing


638 THERMAL INSULATION FOR REFRIGERATED SPACES

638.1 Walk-In Chill and Freeze Rooms

Prefabricated insulated panels shall be provided to form the boundaries of the walk-in chill and freeze rooms adjacent to the galley. Modular panels shall be fabricated from stainless steel sheet (.035" minimum thickness) and shall have at least 4 inches of insulation, providing an R value of at least 30. The panels shall be reinforced as necessary to support the loads imposed by the shelving.

1230

1235

1240

1245

1250

1255

1260

638.2 Shelving

Each refrigerated compartment shall be fitted out with three courses of adjustable 1/8-inch thick aluminum (Type 5086) or stainless steel (Type 304 or 316) shelving around the perimeter of each compartment. The shelving shall be arranged to maximize the available storage space in each compartment. Proposed detailed arrangement drawings of each compartment shall be submitted to the Owner’s Representative for approval, prior to fabrication.

The shelving shall be approximately 18-24 inches deep and flanged up 2 inches at the edge. The edges shall be tightly rolled or have round bar welded to them to avoid sharp corners. The shelving shall be neatly fitted in the compartment corners and supported by stanchions, where necessary. The shelving shall be capable of supporting a minimum load of 50 pounds per square foot.

638.3 Grating

Portable, FRP plank grating, approximately 1 inch thick, shall be provided and installed to completely cover the deck in each refrigerated compartment.

640 REQUIREMENTS FOR LIVING ACCOMMODATIONS SPACES

640.1 General

All furniture shall be Jamestown Metal Marine Sales (JMMS), marine style furniture of steel or aluminum construction and furnished complete in every respect (i.e., finish, hardware, molding, securing hardware and sub bases). Surface finishes shall be baked enamel, fluidized epoxy, or chrome plated for steel, and anodized clear satin finish for aluminum. End tables, coffee tables and game tables shall have plastic laminate decorative tops. Fixed furniture and furnishings shall be installed level to the baseline. Inaccessible spaces in way of furniture and furnishings shall be flashed. Fixed furniture and decorative lighting fixtures shall be secured as necessary, and portable furniture shall be fitted with securing devices and flush deck sockets.

Coat and hat hooks shall be provided for each public space in a quantity equal to the seating capacity. Four bulletin boards shall be provided and located as directed by the Owner.


Portlights or windows in accommodation and living spaces shall be outfitted with lined and weighted curtains.

Color schemes shall be designated by the Owner. 1265

1270

1275

1280

1285

1290

1295

640.2 Staterooms

Stateroom outfitting shall be in accordance with ASTM Specification Volume 01.07 Shipbuilding that provides each person assigned to the stateroom a berth w/light wardrobe and drawers for clothes storage and lifesaving jacket and survival suit stowage. Each stateroom shall be provided with a desk w/chair, trash receptacle, book storage, grooming facilities and 2.5ft3 self-contained refrigerator.

Wardrobes may be free standing or built-in, and shall be equipped with locks, shelf, hanging rod with adjustable clamp, six hooks, shoe rack and tie rack (inside door). Book racks and bookcases shall have a 13-inch minimum depth and 13-inch minimum clear height between shelves.

The Master’s stateroom shall be provided with a safe and key cabinet.

Berths shall generally be oriented longitudinally and shall be a minimum of 39 inches wide, 80 inches long, and shall be provided with inner spring mattresses. Where tiered double berths exist, there shall be a minimum of 26 inches clearance above the mattresses. Berths shall have drawers underneath (lower only). The berths shall not be obstructed by pipes, ventilating ducts or other installations. Privacy curtains shall be provided for each berth in two berth staterooms. Overhead lights and vent terminals shall not be in the area enclosed by privacy curtains.

Four license boards for posting U.S. Coast Guard licenses shall be provided on officer stateroom doors.

640.3 Lounge

The Lounge shall be designed for seating for eight persons utilizing a combination of comfortable lounge chairs, sofas and side chairs. Tables shall be provided for lamps and recreation activities. An entertainment console for electronic entertainment components shall be provided. Storage shall be provided for tapes, CDs, books and magazines.

640.4 Accessible Stateroom

The accessible double stateroom shall include the following features:

• A turning space. The turning space shall be either a circle of 60 inches diameter minimum or a T-shaped space within a 60-inch square minimum with arms and base 36 inches wide minimum. Each arm of the T shall be clear of obstructions 12 inches minimum in each direction, and the base shall be clear of obstructions 24 inches minimum.


• A clear deck space of 30 inches minimum by 48 inches minimum. The clear deck space shall be positioned for parallel approach to the side of the bed.

• Toe clearance shall extend 25 inches (635 mm) maximum under furniture or fixtures.

1300

1305

1310

1315

1320

1325

1330

1335

• Where knee clearance is required under furniture or fixtures as part of a clear deck space, the knee clearance shall be 11 inches deep minimum at 9 inches above the finish deck surface, and 8 inches deep minimum at 27 inches above the finish deck surface.

• Knee clearance under furniture and fixtures shall be 30 inches wide minimum.

The toilet/shower for the accessible double stateroom shall include the following features:

• The toilet shall be positioned with a wall or partition to the rear and to one side. The centerline of the toilet shall be 16 inches minimum to 18 inches maximum from the side wall or partition. Toilets shall be arranged for a left-hand or right-hand approach.

• Clearance around the toilet shall be 60 inches minimum measured perpendicular from the side wall and 56 inches minimum measured perpendicular from the rear wall. The required clearance around the toilet shall be permitted to overlap the toilet, associated grab bars, dispensers, sanitary napkin disposal units, coat hooks, shelves, accessible routes, clear deck space and clearances required at other fixtures and the turning space. No other fixtures or obstructions shall be located within the required toilet clearance.

• The seat height of a toilet above the finish deck surface shall be 17 inches minimum and 19 inches maximum measured to the top of the seat. Seats shall not be sprung to return to a lifted position.

• Grab bars shall be provided on the side wall closest to the toilet and on the rear wall. The side wall grab bar shall be 42 inches long minimum, located 12 inches maximum from the rear wall and extending 54 inches minimum from the rear wall. The rear wall grab bar shall be 36 inches long minimum and extend from the centerline of the toilet 12 inches minimum on one side and 24 inches minimum on the other side.

• Flush controls shall be hand operated or automatic and located on the open side of the toilet.

• Toilet paper dispensers shall be 7 inches minimum and 9 inches maximum in front of the toilet measured to the centerline of the dispenser. The outlet of the dispenser shall be 15 inches minimum and 48 inches maximum above the finish deck surface and shall not be located behind grab bars. Dispensers shall not be of a type that controls delivery or that does not allow continuous paper flow.

• Wheelchair accessible compartments shall be 60 inches wide minimum measured perpendicular to the side wall, and 56 inches deep minimum for wall hung toilets, and 59 inches deep minimum for deck surface mounted toilets measured perpendicular to the rear wall.


• Lavatories and sinks shall be installed with the front of the higher of the rim or counter surface 34 inches (865 mm) maximum above the finish deck surface. 1340

1345

1350

1355

1360

1365

1370

1375

• Controls for faucets shall be operable with one hand and shall not require tight grasping, pinching or twisting of the wrist.

• Water supply and drain pipes under lavatories and sinks shall be insulated or otherwise configured to protect against contact. There shall be no sharp or abrasive surfaces under lavatories and sinks.

• A folding seat shall be provided in the shower compartment adjacent to the controls, and shall extend from the back wall to a point within 3 inches of the compartment entry. The top of the seat shall be 17 inches minimum and 19 inches maximum above the bathroom finish deck surface.

• Grab bars shall be provided on the back wall and the side wall opposite the seat. Grab bars shall not be provided above the seat. Grab bars shall be provided on the wall where the shower head is mounted. Grab bars shall be installed 6 inches maximum from adjacent walls.

• The shower compartment shall be a roll-in type, 30 inches wide by 60 inches deep. The controls, faucets and shower spray unit shall be installed on the wall adjacent to the seat wall and shall be located 27 inches (685 mm) maximum from the seat wall.

• A shower spray unit with a hose 59 inches long minimum that can be used both as a fixed-position shower head and as a hand-held shower shall be provided. The shower spray unit shall have an on/off control with a non-positive shut-off. If an adjustable height shower head on a vertical bar is used, the bar shall be installed so as not to obstruct the use of grab bars. Shower spray units shall deliver water that is 120°F maximum.

• Grab bars with circular cross sections shall have an outside diameter of 1-1/4 inches minimum and 2 inches maximum.

• The space between the wall and the grab bar shall be 1-1/2 inches. The space between the grab bar and projecting objects below and at the ends shall be 1-1/2 inches minimum. The space between the grab bar and projecting objects above shall be 12 inches minimum.

• Grab bars shall be installed in a horizontal position, 33 inches minimum and 36 inches maximum above the finish deck surface measured to the top of the gripping surface.

• Allowable stresses shall not be exceeded for materials used when a vertical or horizontal force of 250 pounds (1112 N) is applied at any point on the grab bar, fastener, mounting device or supporting structure.


644 SANITARY SPACES, PLUMBING FIXTURES, FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES

644.1 Plumbing Fixtures and Fittings

Plumbing fixtures and fittings shall be provided in accordance with Table 600-5.

Table 600-5. Plumbing Fixtures and Fittings 1380

Item

Stat

eroo

m

Publ

ic T

oile

ts

Shar

ed T

/S

Hyd

ro/W

et L

ab

Mai

n La

b

Wor

ksho

p

Hos

pita

l T/S

Laun

dry

Lavatory, 15x18 inches 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0

Shower 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0

Toilet 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0

Cabinet, toilet w/mirror, light and outlet 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0

Dispenser, paper towel 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1

Trash receptacle, surface mounted 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1

Dispenser, soap, liquid 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1

Soap dish for lavatory 2 0 0 0 0 0 1 0

Soap dish for shower 0 0 2 0 0 0 1 0

Tumbler and toothbrush holdr 2 0 0 0 0 0 1 0

Towel bar 2 0 2 0 0 0 1 0

Handgrab, 24 inches 2 1 2 0 0 0 2 0

Hook, robe 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0

Hospital sink, 24x30x16 CRES 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0

Toilet paper holder 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0

Dispenser, soap, powder 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1

Light mirror w/receptacle 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0

The lavatories, sinks and showers shall be provided with drains trapped at the fixture. Access to traps shall be arranged for ease of maintenance. Traps for fixtures shall be chrome-plated brass, swivel pattern.

Hot and cold potable water shall be supplied to the lavatories, sinks, showers and labs. Supply pipes to fixtures shall be outside diameter tube size, with chromium-plated brass stop valves fitted in the supplies adjacent to the fixtures, except for fixtures with integral stops. Water hammer arrestors shall also be installed in the supply lines to the plumbing fixtures.

1385


644.2 Lavatories 1390

1395

1400

1405

1410

1415

1420

Sinks shall be made of 14-gauge CRES, Type 304, No. 4 finish.

Shower heads shall be installed so that the minimum clearance between the top of the finished deck and the shower head is 74". Showerheads shall be fitted with restricting devices that limit the flow of water to 2 gal/min at 40 lb/in2 and quick shut-off devices. Showers shall be provided with shower curtain, curtain rod, curtain hooks and a 4" watertight coaming around the base. One handgrab shall be provided for each shower and one for each toilet.

Toilet and shower enclosures shall be provided with plumbing fixtures and fittings of equal quality and function as those required in Table 600-5.

Faucets for all lavatories shall be self-closing with an adjustable, 10- to 15-second closing time. Faucets shall have chrome finish and brass bodies, renewable seats and aerators with 2.5 gpm flow restrictors.

A pop-up drain shall be provided for each lavatory.

644.3 Showers

Showers shall be at a minimum measure of 32" x 32".

Shower stalls shall be rigidly constructed and finished with a material that is durable, waterproof, sanitary, easily cleaned and easily maintained.

Wheelchair-accessible showers shall be equipped with a shower spray unit, having a hose at least 60 inches long that can be used as a fixed shower head or as a hand-held shower.

The showers and shower accessories shall include a push-pull, single-lever concealed control unit, ball joint shower head, rod, curtain, holdback and soap dish.

644.4 Water Closet

All water closets shall be of vitreous china, water saver type. All water closets shall have elongated white bowls and shall be fitted with open fronted black seats, without covers. Water closets shall be compatible with the VCHT system.

All flushing shall be siphon jet by chrome plated dolphin type flushometers which are approved by the manufacturer for seawater service. Easy access shall be provided to all flushometers for inspection and repair.

Water closets may be either deck or bulkhead mounted. Their attachment shall be specifically reinforced to prevent damage or removal due to severe abuse. All units shall be mounted with a minimum of four bolts.


644.5 Accessories

The following accessories shall be provided:

• Toilet paper holders, with lock spring rollers and bulkhead brackets, shall be provided at each of the water closets. 1425

1430

1435

1440

1445

1450

1455

• Grab rods, 1 inch diameter by 9 inches long, shall be provided at each of the water closets. The wheelchair-accessible water closets shall have the required wheelchair grab bars.

• Towel bars, 18 inches long, shall be provided for each occupant in the staterooms, and at each of the lavatories and at each of the showers.

• Two double hooks shall be provided within each of the washrooms.

• One mirror vanity cabinet, approximately 24" x 32", stainless steel, surface mounted, shall be provided at the lavatory in each stateroom. Cabinets shall have positive locking devices.

644.6 Drinking Fountains

Drinking water fountains with self-contained cooling units shall be provided and located as follows:

• Pilothouse

• 01 deck accommodation block

• Main deck in the mess/lounge

• Hold level accommodation block

• Hold level MCS

The units shall be a refrigerated type, rated at 6 gph. The fountains shall be connected to a potable water supply with filters and waste water drains. The drinking fountain in the lounge shall be ADA compliant.

644.7 Service Sinks

Service sinks with faucets shall be provided and installed in cleaning gear lockers, laundries and elsewhere as shown on the plans. The sinks shall be of cast iron construction with acid-resistant enamel tile. Faucets shall have brass bodies, renewable seats, center spout outlet, and brass lever handles. Spouts shall be formed with a bucket hook and be provided with a vacuum breaker.

644.8 Eye Wash Stations

Portable eye/face wash fountains shall be provided and located near areas of chemical use in the labs and near the working deck area. Portable eye/face wash fountains shall be provided near battery charging areas. Service shall be taken from a cold potable water supply.


644.9 Emergency Washdown Showers

A deluge shower shall be located near the labs. Service shall be taken from a cold potable water supply.

644.10 Public Heads 1460

1465

1470

1475

1480

1485

1490

One public head shall be furnished on the main deck off the passageway. It shall contain a toilet and a sink, and otherwise be furnished similar to the washrooms.

A second public head shall be furnished in the pilothouse. It shall contain a toilet and a sink, and otherwise be furnished similar to the washrooms.

651 FOOD SERVICE SPACES

651.1 General

A mess and galley shall be provided to service the crew and scientist complement. The mess shall be provided with the furnishings listed in Table 600-6, sized for the total personnel complement. At least one space in the mess shall be ADA compliant. The galley shall be provided with marine grade equipment as listed in Table 600-6, sized for the total personnel complement.

The tops of dining surfaces shall be 28 inches minimum and 34 inches maximum above the finish deck surface. Clear deck space shall be provided adjacent to seating to permit approach by wheelchair equipped persons. The top of seat surfaces shall be 17 inches minimum and 19 inches maximum above the finish deck surface. Allowable stresses shall not be exceeded for materials used when a vertical or horizontal force of 250 pounds is applied at any point on the seat, fastener, mounting device, or supporting structure.

The passage contiguous to the galley serving window shall be designed for use for queuing and cafeteria style service.

The scullery area shall be separated from the food preparation and service area by a CRES partition. The partition shall extend a minimum of 24 inches above the top of the dressers. Access between the galley and scullery areas shall be at least 30 inches wide.

A separate pass-through window shall be provided from the passage into the scullery area for passing soiled dishes. See Section 624.

Equipment in the galley shall be arranged for preparation and service of meals and clean-up. The mess shall be arranged to accommodate the smooth flow of personnel from the serving line, past the self-service beverage service area and to the mess tables with minimum interference with seated or exiting personnel.

Deck-mounted equipment and dressers shall be installed on 6-inch high, round legs, except the trash compactor. Where height is restricted, equipment shall be mounted on angle base


foundations. Equipment mounted on dresser tops shall be installed on 4-inch high round legs.

Cabinets shall be provided with hinged doors. Bulkhead mounted cabinets and shelves shall be mounted 18 inches above the dresser tops.

The mess shall also have the capability of serving as a conference room, including a bulkhead-mounted, minimum 32-inch flat panel monitor with connections to the entertainment system and video network.

1495

1500

Installations shall satisfy the requirements of the U.S. Public Health Service and World Health Organization “Guide to Ship Sanitation.”

Table 600-6. Messroom Furnishings

Quantity Description 1 Dresser with cabinets under

1 Coffee maker (connected to potable water supply)

1 Refrigerator/freezer with glass doors

1 Milk dispenser

1 Juice dispenser

1 Ice maker

1 Microwave oven

1 Toaster

1 Dispenser, cup/glass/ silverware

20 Total seating and mess table capacity

651.2 Materials, Fabrication, and Installation

Materials used shall be smooth, hard, impervious to moisture, and resistant to stain and corrosion.

Any exposed surfaces which may come in contract with food and drink, unless otherwise specified, shall be stainless steel, AISI 304, Finish No. 4.

1505

1510

Construction details of equipment, both pre-fab and customized, shall provide for the elimination of sharp edges, corners, and burrs that might cause injury to personnel or unsightliness of the equipment, or that might hamper cleaning and maintenance.

All welding including field joints shall be flush, ground smooth, and polished on exposed surfaces. Solder and/or rivets shall not be used.

Equipment abutting other pieces of equipment or bulkheads shall be installed so that they are easy to clean, and in a manner to prevent soil, grease, or other organic material from catching in crevices. Equipment located on countertops in the galley and mess shall be


securely fastened. All top seams shall be butt-welded. Flashing and sealing shall be provided as necessary to make all areas vermin proof and shall be at least 16 gauge.

1515

1520

1525

1530

1535

1540

1545

Sub-bases for equipment shall be provided, and equipment shall be secured to deck, sub-base, or bulkheads as necessary. Securing devices shall be capable of withstanding loads generated by vessel motions.

All equipment mounted on countertops shall be without legs, set and sealed to the countertops with no gaps or crevices between the top and equipment.

651.3 Hardware

Door and drawer handles shall be stainless steel flush type combination pull and positive latching devices to eliminate opening due to vessel motions. Hinged doors shall use semi-concealed type hinges with lubrication-free nylon bearing inserts.

651.4 Tops

Tops of counters and drainboards shall be constructed of one-piece, 14-gauge stainless steel wherever possible. Tops shall be fully reinforced so tops can support heavy loads without deflection. Tops shall be provided in the longest lengths possible.

All seams in horizontal surfaces, including sinks and other inserts abutting tops, shall be butt-welded and finished as an integral part of the top.

Tops in way of bulkheads shall be constructed with a minimum 6-inch high integral backsplash, flanged back a minimum of 1 inch at approximately a 45 degree angle to the bulkhead or lining. Backsplashes in way of faucets shall be 2 inches deep. Top edges of backsplash shall be fitted with finishing strips. Backsplashes shall be continuous wherever possible. Where utility outlets are needed, they shall be located above the top of the backsplash.

The edges of tops not provided with backsplashes shall be formed to provide a retainer edge and an apron integral with the countertop. The top of the retainer shall be approximately 3/4 inch above the working surface, and the apron shall extend down far enough to cover the top horizontal frame member. The crown of the retainer shall be formed to approximately a 5/16-inch inside radius. The retainer shall be coved at the working surface to at least a 3/8-inch inside radius.

All corners between tops and backsplashes and marine edges shall be constructed with a minimum radius of 1/2 inch. All outside corners shall be constructed with a 3-inch radius for safety.

651.5 Counters and Cabinets

Counters in the galley shall be approximately 36 inches high from finished deck to working top when mounted on a sub-base, unless otherwise noted. Countertops and tray


slides in the serving line and mess area shall not be more than 34 inches high from the finished deck.

1550

1555

1560

1565

1570

1575

1580

1585

Counter and cabinets shall be enclosed on sides, back, and front, except in way of drawers and doors, with panels of 18-gauge stainless steel secured to 12-gauge frames, and shall be fitted with a 16-gauge stainless steel bottom with a marine edge.

Cabinets shall have adjustable shelves of 16-gauge stainless steel with marine edge and with removable sea rails. Shelving shall sustain uniformly distributed loads of not less than 100 pounds per square foot and concentrated edge loads of no less than 200 pounds per square foot.

All drawers shall be fabricated of 18-gauge stainless steel with all corners rounded and coved. Mount drawers with fabricated 14-gauge interlocking channel supports having large size quiet ball bearing wheel suspension and stops to prevent drawers from being pulled out of fixture. Support slides shall be constructed so that drawers may be pulled out a minimum of two-thirds of their length and support heavy loads without deflection. Drawers shall be easily removable without the use of tools.

Doors for cabinets and sideboards shall have double doors with 18-gauge stainless steel outer panel and 20-gauge inner panel with hemmed edges. Doors shall be fitted with insulation to provide sound deadening, and be approximately 3/4 inch thick.

651.6 Sub-bases

Sub-bases for the installation of counters, lockers, cabinets, etc., shall be constructed of 3/16-inch stainless steel top plate supported at the front by a stainless steel coaming plate, finishing approximately 6 inches above the finished deck, and welded to the top plate 4-1/2 inches in from the front edge to form a toe space. Sub-bases shall have watertight welds on the wet side and form an airtight enclosure when installed. A 1/16-inch neoprene watertight gasket shall be installed between the equipment and sub-base. Equipment shall be securely attached to the sub-base. Deck covering shall be coved up to the sub-bases.

651.7 Shelves

Shelving units shall be 16-gauge stainless steel and shall sit on adjustable height supports. Exposed edges of shelving shall have a 1-1/2-inch retainer edge hemmed over 3/8 inch and removable sea rail(s) unless otherwise noted.

651.8 Sinks

Sinks shall be integral with the top and be constructed of no less than 16-gauge stainless steel. They shall have cove corners. The bottom of each compartment shall have four (4) radial die-stamped grooves pitched to center drain. Partitions for compartment sinks shall be of the same material, double thickness and continuously welded where sinks join at the top and front.


Sink compartment covers shall be provided for prep sinks. Covers shall be 14-gauge stainless steel.

651.9 Galley Equipment

All new equipment provided shall be AC powered and approved by Underwriters Lab and the National Sanitation Foundation. Equipment shall be designed specifically for marine use whenever possible.

1590

1595

All refrigerated galley equipment shall be self contained and utilize use a refrigerant with an ozone depleting potential of zero. Self contained refrigeration equipment shall standardize on the refrigerant used when practical.

All equipment shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

The equipment specified in Table 600-7 shall be provided, located, and installed as shown on the plans.

Table 600-7. Galley Equipment

Quantity Galley Equipment Description 1 Range

3 Food warmer, drop-in

1 Sanitary sneeze shield, over hot food warmer

1 Ventilator hood, for range, and steam kettle

1 Ventilator hood for griddle

1 Utensil rack, CRES

2 Dish cabinet, CRES, 36 inches long with hinged doors, for clean dish stowage

10 Dresser, sized to suit

1 Food mixer

1 Slicer

3 Shelf, installed on bulkhead, length to suit by 15 inches deep, installed on bulkhead

1 Tray dispenser

1 Salad plate dispenser, built-in

1 Plate dispenser, built-in

1 Soup bowl dispenser, built-in

1 Cold food counter with shield

2 Tray slide, length to suit

1 Microwave oven

1 Convection oven

1 Pressureless steamer (single)


Quantity Galley Equipment Description 1 Proofer

1 Food cutter, portable

1 Dishwasher rack stowage, for twelve 10 x 20 inch racks under dresser

1 Griddle

1 Stowage for ten baking pans under dresser

1 Stowage for ten sheet pans under dresser

1 Garbage grinder

1 Refrigerator/freezer

1 Steam jacketed kettle

1 Lavatory

1 Paper towel dispenser

1 Soap dispenser, liquid

1 Ventilator hood, for convection oven and pressureless steamer

2 Rolling counter door with dead bolt to prevent fall

1 Passing window

1 Dishwasher, built-in with booster heater

1 Sink heater with thermometer, for pot sanitizing sink

1 Spray rinse unit

1 Sink, 14 x 18 x 12 inches, silverware soak, built-in

1 Sink, 24 x 24 x 9 inches, prewash with grating cover, built-in with garbage grinder and spray rinse unit

2 Sink, 24 x 24 x 12 inches, pot wash and rinse, built-in

1 Sink, 24 x 30 x 16 inches, pot sanitizing, with sink heater and thermometer

1 Knife rack, with removable plastic liner

1 Sink, double, 14 x 18 x 12 inch each, vegetable preparation, built-in

1 Shelf, dishwasher rack loading, sloped with drains

2 Cabinet unit, 24 inches wide

1 Drawer unit, 24 inches wide under dresser

652 HOSPITAL 1600

1605

A dedicated hospital shall be located on the main deck level as shown on the plans. The hospital space shall contain a single berth, similar to those in the officers’ staterooms.

A 30" high by 24" long by 12" deep metal locker with shelves shall be installed in the hospital space, suitable for stowage of medical supplies. The locker doors shall be fitted with a staple and hasp.


655 LAUNDRY SPACES

One self-service laundry shall be provided, and outfitted in accordance with Table 600-8.

Table 600-8. Laundry Equipment

Quantity Item Laundry Equipment Description 2 Washer Commercial grade, non-coin operated, front loading,

capacity based on complement

2 Dryer Commercial grade, non-coin operated, stackable, capacity based on complement

1 Ironing board

1 Iron, steam and dry with timer cut-out

1 Cabinet, stowage

1 Jackrod Minimum 6 foot length

1 Clothes Folding Table

1 Service sink Stainless steel

662 MACHINERY CONTROL STATION FURNISHINGS 1610

1615

1620

1625

The machinery control station (MCS) shall be outfitted with the following furniture and furnishings.

• A log desk, approximately 60" x 30" deep.

• A metal waste basket (~5 gallon capacity).

• (1) chair.

The requirements for the furniture are specified in Section 640

The MCS shall be totally enclosed with steel bulkheads, overhead and deck. These boundaries and their openings shall be fitted with acoustic treatments as described in Sections 634 and 635 for meeting the sound level criterion specified in Section 073.

All penetrations of the MCS shall be minimized and grouped. All openings around beams, stiffeners, pipes, cables, and ducts passing through the boundaries of the MCS shall be filled with additional acoustical insulation or sealant. Sealant shall be applied to prevent sound leaks through panel seams, fastener holes, and other miscellaneous small openings. All panel connections to structural steel shall be isolated to minimize structure-borne noise transmission. Stanchions and similar structure within the MCS are prohibited.

Furnishings shall be provided in the MCS as described in Section 662. In addition, a plan center as manufactured by Plan Hold Incorporated (Catalog No. 48CR-30) shall be provided to store engineering drawings in the MCS. The plan center shall be furnished with a locking cover and at least twelve drawing binders.


663 PILOTHOUSE AND CHARTROOM FURNISHINGS 1630

In addition to the racks, shelves and cabinets required to house electronics, navigation and control equipment, the pilothouse and chart room shall be provided with the furnishings listed in Tables 600-9 and 600-10.

Table 600-9. Pilothouse Furnishings

Quantity Item Description

1 Book rack

2 (P&S) Binocular holder

2 Vessel status board

1 Helmsman chair

2 (P&S) Pilot chair

1 Flag stowage locker

1635 Table 600-10. Chart Room Furnishings

Quantity Item Description 2 Book rack

1 Desk lamp with red filter

1 Stool

1 Chart table with drawers for charts

1 Computer work station, 48 inches wide x 30 inches deep with adjustable keyboard mount, shelf and drawer unit

1 File cabinet, four-drawer, legal size, with lock

1 Bulkhead mounted storage locker

1 Chair, side

664 WORKSHOPS

664.1 Repair Parts

An engineer’s workshop shall be provided, and outfitted in accordance with Table 600-11. 1640

Table 600-11. Workshop Furnishings

Item Quantity Size Arbor Press 1 Hand operated, 3 ton, 7 inch throat, 17-1/2 inch capacity

Vertical Milling/Drill Machine

1 17 inch

Flat Sheet Stock Stowage

1


Item Quantity Size Grinder 1 8 inch, 2 wheel, 3/4 horsepower, 3600 RPM, with pedestal and

eye protectors

Lathe 1 Lathe, engine, 11 inch swing, 1 horsepower drive motor

Shelves 1 Bulkhead mount

Sink 1 Service sink

Storage Cabinets w/Upper Shelves, Lower Drawers

3

Stowage Box 1

Tool Cabinet 1 Multi drawer, deck mounted, approx 30 inch width x 60 inch height

Vise 1

Work Bench 1 Workbench, metal, approximately 27-1/2 inches wide by 72 inches long

Wrench Stowage 1 Bulkhead mounted

Welder 1 Portable, 300 amp, DC, GTA or SMA

Gas Welding Outfit 1 Gas welding outfit, oxygen/acetylene flame cutting/welding outfit, including torch and cutting tips, oxygen and acetylene regulator, 12 foot-6 inch hose, igniter and hand truck

664.2 Lifting Gear

Fixed padeyes shall be installed over all heavy machinery components and arranged to facilitate disassembly. Where practicable, padeyes shall be in line with each other, with eyes of sufficient size to insert a bar between groups. Particular attention shall be given to proper location of padeyes to facilitate main engine maintenance.

1645

1650

1655

1660

Lifting gear shall be furnished to service, remove, and overhaul machinery components and piping systems, in addition to special lifting guides, jacks, and supports furnished by manufacturers of machinery plant components.

Overhead rail and trolley systems shall be provided in the engine room and the propulsion motor room for maintenance and movement of major equipment and components.

At least one chain hoist shall be provided on each rail system, each with a certified capacity suitable for the heaviest component to be lifted in the space. The quantity of hoists provided shall be sufficient to service all machinery in the space, without requiring manual transfer of a hoist from one rail system or section to another.

Padeyes, or in some areas, suitable mountings for clamps, shall be provided in the number, location, and capacity as necessary along shipping and service routes, to facilitate the movement of machinery and equipment. All padeyes and lifting gear shall be tested and certified and marked with a reference number and SWL locally and on a lifting gear plan.


664.3 Electronic Technician (ET) Shop

A separate electronic technician (ET) shop for electronics and equipment repair shall be provided and shall be outfitted as follows:

Table 600-12. ET Shop Equipment

Item Quantity Characteristics Electronics Workbench 1 Approx. 66 inches long by 28 inches wide, with two

modular drawer units under, electrical power disconnect switches, electrical protective sheeting, shelf unit over, and 2-6 drawer units under

Cabinet 3 Modular drawer, locking, approximately 5 feet high with lock-in/lock-out drawers of various heights

Cabinet 1 File, 2 drawer, letter size

Stool 1 Steel

Cabinet 1 36 inches wide by 24 inches deep by 78 inches high, with four adjustable shelves and double door

Book rack 1

1665

1670

1675

The ET shop shall be provided with the following items:

• One 30 inch by 72 inch steel workbench, with two 5-inch deep sliding drawers fitted with a 5-inch vise.

• One hardwood topped steel workbench, 30 inches by 72 inches with two 5-inch deep sliding drawers.

• Metal tool boards the same length as the workbench served, located above and behind each workbench to accommodate tools.

• Sheet metal tool locker approximately 4 feet wide by 3 feet deep by 7 feet high.

• Bins for parts and special tools.

The ET shop shall be provided with a ship service compressed air manifold for use with portable air driven tools.


664.4 Bosun’s Storeroom(s) and Bosun’s Workshop

The bosun’s storeroom(s) and workshop areas shall be outfitted with a steel workbench with vise, line stowage racks, and shelving for other miscellaneous deck gear.

The bosun’s workshop shall be provided with a ship service compressed air outlet for use with portable air-driven tools.

1680

1685

1690

1695

665 LABS

665.1 General

The main lab and hydro/wet lab shall be located on the main deck adjacent to each other and adjacent to the main working deck area. Doors into the weather shall have removable sills and coamings to allow rolling equipment and pallets in and out.

Two (20 cubic foot) stand-alone refrigerator/freezer units shall be provided and installed in the main lab.

665.2 Lab Services

Provisions for removable fixtures in the lab spaces designed to secure compressed gas tanks shall be provided.

In exterior bulkheads of labs that adjoin the weather deck, openings shall be cut and fitted with sections of 6-inch standard pipe, with external fiberglass camlock pipe caps, to permit leading cables from the lab to the weather deck. Openings shall be located approximately 6 feet 3 inches above the deck, and shall be spaced at a distance no greater than 10 feet in each lab. Pipe caps shall be fitted with retaining lines to prevent loss.

Cabinetry and Furnishings - Based on lab bulkhead linear footage, cabinetry in the labs shall be not less than the following percentages:

Benchtops, 36 inches high 65 %

Bulkhead (unistrut) mounted wall cabinets 30 %

Bulkhead (unistrut) mounted wall shelving 30 %

Base units with doors 25 %

Base units with drawers 35 %

Benchtops, 29 inches high 30 %

Benchtops shall be 3/4-inch birch plywood finished with polyurethane. One benchtop in the hydro/wet lab shall be covered with stainless steel for trace element analysis work.

1700


Fume Hoods - Two removable, lab grade, laminar flow, Class A fume hoods shall be provided as follows:

• One 47-inch type with acid storage cabinet installed in the main lab.

• One 47-inch type with solvent storage cabinet and stainless steel work surface installed in the hydro/wet lab.

1705

1710

1715

Hoods shall be provided with explosion-proof lighting, as well as connections to an explosion-proof blower located remotely at the discharge terminal. Lab hoods shall be set on their own storage cabinets. Hood linings shall meet NFPA Std. 45 and ASTM E162.

Ventilation - Each fume hood shall have an independent exhaust. Exhaust from fume hoods shall discharge directly to the weather at a distance greater than 15 feet from working areas.

Compressed Air - Standard lab-type outlets for compressed air shall be provided along lab benchtops at not less than 8-foot intervals. Compressed air for lab use shall be provided from the ship service air system, reduced to 100 lb/in2, dried to a 50°F dew point through after coolers and regenerative silica gel dryers, and oil-separated. A consumption of 4 ft3/min per outlet and 0.30 use factor (diversity) shall be assumed.

Plumbing - Lab sinks shall be provided in accordance with Table 600-13.

Table 600-13. Workshop Furnishings

Location Type QuantityMain Lab 24x30x16 stainless steel 2 each

Hydro/Wet Lab 24x30x16 stainless steel 1 each

1720

1725

1730

Sinks in the labs shall be provided with hot and cold potable water and shall be removable.

Reach Ranges - Operational controls for lab equipment shall be mounted to allow full access to controls and gages that the scientific party normally would be allowed to use. Where a forward reach is unobstructed, the high forward reach shall be 48 inches maximum and the low forward reach shall be 15 inches minimum above the finish deck surface. Where a high forward reach is over an obstruction, the clear deck space shall extend beneath the element for a distance not less than the required reach depth over the obstruction. The high forward reach shall be 48 inches maximum where the reach depth is 20 inches maximum. Where the reach depth exceeds 20 inches, the high forward reach shall be 44 inches maximum and the reach depth shall be 25 inches maximum. Where a clear deck space allows a parallel approach to an element and the side reach is unobstructed, the high side reach shall be 48 inches maximum and the low side reach shall be 15 inches minimum above the finish deck surface.


665.3 Computer Lab

The computer lab shall be provided with the following furnishings: 1735

Item QtyDesk, SPFT 3

Book rack, double 3

Chair, side 3

Deck pad and tie down assy 3

Cabinet, filing, 4-drawer 3

Board, dry erase 1

Trash receptacle 3

665.4 Scientific Van Sites

Space shall be provided on the port side of the after main deck to carry two (2) UNOLS/ISO standard 8 foot x 20 foot portable deck vans for lab, storage or other specialized uses. Connections shall be provided for hot and cold fresh water, uncontaminated seawater, compressed air, drains, ISO twist lock fittings, communications, alarms, data and shipboard monitoring systems.

1740

1745

1750

1755

1760

Connections and other provisions for vans shall be designed around UNOLS standard vans, including the following provision:

• Electrical connections for 20-amps 480 VAC 3-phase, 40 amps 240 VAC 3-phase, 40 - 50 amps 208 VAC three phase, and 120 VAC single phase shall be provided.

• Vans shall be capable of having weather-protected access to vessel interior and be located in wave sheltered spaces. Safe access to and from the vans is the primary consideration.

• Radiation vans shall be capable of installation so that they can be isolated from the interior of the vessel while still allowing safe access for personnel.

670 STOWAGE REQUIREMENTS

Stowage aids shall be provided for portable articles, repair parts, food service equipment, and similar items and in storerooms. Stowage aids shall be designed and installed to retain the stowed material without damage under the maximum dynamic conditions of roll, pitch, list and trim. Bin, rack and shelving compartments with vertical compartment clear openings of 10 inches or more, shall be provided with removable horizontal battens. Front flanges of lower shelves of bins, racks, and shelving shall be stiffened, as necessary, to prevent damage from persons climbing to upper bins or shelves. Stops shall be provided on backs of shelving and bins.

Storerooms, or portions thereof designated for bulk stowage, shall be fitted with fixed battens adjacent to structural boundaries and with removable stowage stanchions. The


ends of the stanchions shall be compatible with fittings on the deck and overhead. Fixed battens shall be fitted on shell plating, framing, or structural bulkheads in bulk stores area, to prevent stores from contacting surfaces on which condensation is likely to occur. Installation of fixed battens shall permit circulation of air and protect insulation, piping, and wire cables from being damaged by stores. Remote operating mechanisms shall be protected from stores interfering with their operation. The ends of the battens shall be closed.

1765

1770

1775

1780

1785

1790

Where cabinets with modular drawer units are required, they must conform to GSA Standard A-A-59470 “Cabinets, Modular Drawer Storage (Naval Shipboard)” with lock-in/lock-out drawers.

671 SPECIAL STOWAGE

The following dedicated special stowage spaces shall be provided.

671.1 Gasoline Storage

A quick-release overboard jettison stowage slide for four outboard motor gasoline fuel tanks and two 55-gallon drums of gasoline shall be provided. The drum arrangement shall permit refilling of the outboard motor gasoline fuel tanks.

In accordance with the regulatory requirements, each rack shall be capable of being released by a mechanical quick release pull cable to dump the gasoline drum over the side of the vessel in case of fire, capable of being released from a distance of 40 feet.

671.2 Sewage Treatment Locker

A locker shall be provided for stowage of packaged sodium hypochlorite for sewage treatment.

671.3 Immersion Suit Stowage

Immersion suit racks shall be provided for all exposure suits.

671.4 Linen Lockers

Linen lockers shall be provided as shown on the plans. Each linen locker shall be outfitted with adjustable shelving arranged to maximize the use of the space. The shelving may be either galvanized steel or fabricated from hardcore joiner linings.

Linen lockers shall be provided with 36-inch deep shelving.

671.5 Hazardous Materials Locker

A removable hazardous materials locker shall be provided in the main lab for ready use storage of scientific chemicals and reagents. The locker shall be rated for flammable


liquids, shall have self-closing doors, shall have a capacity of at least 83 liters, and shall be equipped with adjustable shelving and tiedown points.

1795

1800

1805

1810

The space shall be protected by the fixed CO2 fire extinguishing system as discussed in Section 555.

671.6 Medical Locker

Lockable stowage cabinets shall be provided in the hospital to store medical items.

671.7 Pyrotechnics Locker

A self contained pyrotechnics locker shall be provided and installed as shown on the plans. The pyrotechnics locker shall be used to store emergency flares and other flammable emergency equipment.

671.8 Damage Control Locker

Damage control locker(s) shall be provided and installed as required to meet the regulations. Each damage control locker shall be provided with all the regulatory body required damage control equipment as outlined in Table 600-14. Damage control lockers shall be outfitted with shelving, hooks, brackets, etc., as necessary to neatly stow the required damage control equipment.

Table 600-14. Emergency Squad Locker Equipment (each squad locker)

Description Quantity Self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA) Two (2) Zico Walkaway® bracket for SCBA Six (6) Spare SCBA air bottles (fully charged) Four (4) Spare face pieces for the SCBAs, sizes S, M and L Two (2) each size Flame safety lamp One (1) Fire axe One (1) CO2 extinguisher, 15 pound One (1) Dry chemical extinguisher, 15 pound One (1) Flashlight, three (3) cell, explosion-proof Two (2) Spare flashlight batteries Six (6) Lifeline, 50 foot Two (2) Fireman’s bunker pants Eight (8) Fireman’s bunker coats Eight (8) Helmet Four (4) Helmet flash hood Four (4) Boots, pair – various sizes Eight (8) Suspenders Four (4) Gloves, rubber Eight (8) Gloves, leather Eight (8)


672 STOREROOMS

Dry and ship stores shall be provided as shown on the plans and as described below.

672.1 Dry Stores 1815

1820

1825

1830

1835

1840

The dry storeroom shall be provided on the main deck as shown on the plans. The dry storeroom shall be fitted out with galvanized steel shelving for storing dry galley stores.

672.2 Aft Bosun Stores

An aft bosun storeroom shall be provided adjacent to the aft working deck as shown on the plans. Shelves, pipe, jackrods, portable metal battens and hooks for blocks and tackles shall be provided. A workbench, with a combination bench and pipe vise shall be provided. Storage for mooring lines shall be provided.

672.3 Fwd Bosun Stores

A forward bosun storeroom shall be provided for storage of tools and mooring lines.

672.4 Deck Gear Stores

Two deck gear storerooms shall be provided, one forward and one aft, as shown on the plans. Fittings shall be provided for the stowage of washdown gear for weather decks. Swab and broom racks shall be installed. A service sink shall be provided in each deck gear locker

672.5 Cleaning Gear Stores

Cleaning gear storerooms shall be located on every accommodation deck level, as shown on the plans, and provided with a deep service sink, louvered door, shelving, swab and broom rack and vacuum cleaner stowage.

672.6 Repair Parts Stores

A repair parts storeroom shall be provided, as shown on the plans, with modular drawer-type stowage cabinets.

672.7 Scientific Stores

A scientific storeroom shall be provided and configured to provide top and bottom support at the intersections of a two foot grid, and over the entire storage area, for Unistrut portable stowage stanchion system. Vertical stowage stanchions or elements shall be provided to fill one-half of the resulting support sites.

672.8 Hazardous Materials Stores

Two approximately equal sized storerooms for bulk stowage of scientific chemicals, reagents, chemically treated scientific samples and paint shall be provided as shown on the


plans. One storeroom shall be located adjacent to the main lab and one adjacent to the hydro/wet lab. The storerooms shall be equipped with adjustable shelving and tiedown points, and shall have the capability to maintain the space temperature between 13°C and 26°C. High and low space temperature alarms shall be provided at the main control console and in the pilothouse. The storerooms shall be protected by fixed CO

1845

1850 2 fire

extinguishing systems as described in Section 555.
